Simplified Estimates by Max Fajardo

TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER - IO PAINTING CHAPTER

10-1 Pail1t 297
10-2 ' Ingredient of Paint ' . 298
10-3 Essential and Specific Properties of Good
Quality Paint .' 300 CONCRETE
10-4 Elements of a Good Painting Job 301
10-5 Surface Preparation 302
305
1-1 PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE
10-6 Kinds of Paint, Uses and Area Coverage
10-7 Estimating Your Paint 311
10-8 Paint Failures and Remedy 317 Concrete is either Plain or Reinforced. By definition, Plain
10-9 Wall Papering 320 Concrete is an artificial stone as a result of mixing cement, fine
aggregates, coarse aggregates and water. The conglomeration
CHAPTER .. 11 AUXILIARY TOPICS of these materials producing a solid mass is called plain con-
crete.
11-1 Accordion Door Cover 323
11-2 Glass Jalousie 325 Reinforced Concrete or'! the other hand, is a concrete with
.
:,
11-3 Water Tank 326 reinforcement properly embedded in such a manner that the
11-4 Wood Piles 329 two materials act together in reSisting forces.
11-5 Bituminous Surface Treatment 331
11-6 Filling Materials 332
334 The Different Types of Concrete Used in Construction are :
11-7 Nipa Shingle Roofing
11-8 Anahaw Roofing 338
1. The Ordinary Portland cement.
2. The Rapid Hardening Portland Cement which is preferred
when high early strength cc;mcr,ete is desired.
3. The Blast Furnace or Sulfate Cement used on concrete
structures designed to resist chemical attack.
4. The Low Heat Portland Cement used for massive' sec-
tions designed to reduce the heat of hydration.
5. The Portland Pozzolan Cement with a low hardening
characteristic concrete.
6. . The High Alumina Cement.
(
The High Alumina Cement is sometimes called aluminous
cement or cement fundu. Its chemical composition is different
from that of Portland cement for having predominant alumina
-oxide conlent of at least, 32% by weight. The alumina lime is
to
within the limit of 0.85% .1.3%.
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE
CON~1tET
This type of cement has a very high rate of strength devel-

The coarse aggregate should be small enough for the con-
opment compared with the ordinary Portland cement. Aside
crete mixture to flow smoothly around the reinforcement. This Is
from its rapfd hardening properties, it can resist chemical attack
referred to as workability of concrete.
by sulfate and weak acids including sea water. It can also with-
stand prolonged exposure to high temperature of more than
o
1,000 C. Alumina cement however, is not advisable for mixing 1·2 THE PRINCIPLES OF CONCRETE MIXING
with any other types of cement.
" The purpose in mixing concrete is to select an optimum pro-
The Main Composition of Cement are~ portion of cement, water and aggregates, to produce a concrete
mixture that will meet the following requirements:
, 1.6 to 65% Lime
18.0 - 25% Silica
1. Workability 3. Durability
2. Strength 4. Economy
3.0 8% Alumina
3.0 5% Iron oxide
The proportion that will be finally adopted in concrete mixing
2.0 5% Magnesia
has to be established by actual trial and adjustment processes
1.0 5% Sulfur trioxide
to at~in the desired strength and quality of concrete required
under the following procedures:
AGGREGATES
1. The water cement ratio is first determined at the very first
j' Aggregates for concrete work are classified into two: hour of mixing to meet the requirements of strength and
durability.
1. Coarse Aggregate such as crushed stone, crushed
gravel or natural gravel with particles retained on a 5 2. The cement-aggregate ratio is then chosen and estab-
mm sieve. lished to satisfy the workability requirements. Workability,
means the ability of the fresh concrete to fill all the voids
2. Fine Aggregate such as crushed stone, crushed gravel, between the steel bars and t~e forms withollt necessarily
sand or natural sand with particles passing on a 5 mm exerting much effo.rt in tamping.
sieve.
Laboratory tests showed that the water-cement content ratio
Size of Aggregates. - For coarse aggregate (gravel), the is the mO$! important consideration in mixing because it deter-
maximum nominaisize varies from 40, 20,14 or 10 mm diame- mines not only the strength and du~abilty of the concrete but
ter. The choice from the above sizes depends upon the dimen- also the wo"rkability of the mixture.
sions of the concrete member more particularly, the spacing of
the steel bars reinforcement or as specified. Concrete mixtures in a paste form, is preferred than those.
mixtures which are flowing With water. .
Good practice demand that the maximum size of coarse ag-
gregate (gravel) should not exceed 25% of1he' minimum thick- The ACI Requirements for Concrete are as follows:
ness of the member structure nor exceed the clear distance
between the reinforcing bars and the form. 1. Fresh concrete shall be workable. Meaning, that fresh con-
2 3
r
CONCRETE
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRllCTION ESTIMATE Today, i~stead of the·traditional measuring wooden box, the
empty plastic bag of cement is popular1y used to measure the
crete could freely flow around the reinforcements to fill all volume of sand and gravel for convenience ·in handJing aggre-
the voids inside the form. gates during the mixing operations.
2. That, the hardened concrete shall be strong enough to TABlE 1-1 CONVERSION ' FROM INCHES TO METER
carry the design load.
Number Accurate Approximate Number Accurate Approximate
3. That, hardened concrete could withstand the conditions to Value Value Value Value
which it is expected to perform.
1 .0254 .025 21 .5334 .525
4. That, concrete should be economically produced. 2 .0508 .050 22 .5588 .550
3 .0762 .075 23 .5842 .575
4 .1016 .100 24 .6096 .600
Concrete Mixture,may be classified as either: 5 .1270 .125 25 .6350 .625
a. Designed Mixture 6 .1524 .150 26 .6604 .650

b. Prescribed Mixture 7 .1778 .175 27 .6858 .675
8 .2032 .200 28 .7112 .700
Designed Mixture. Where the contractor is responsible in 9 .2286 .225 29 .7366 .725
establishing the mixture proportion that will achieve the required 10 .2540 .250 30 .7620 .750
strength and workability as specified in the plan. 11 .2794 .275 31 .7874 .775
12 .3048 .300 32 .8128 .800
Prescribed Mixture. Where the designing engineer specify 13 .3302 .325 33 8382 · .825
the mixture proportion. The contractor's responsibility is only to 14 .3556 .350 34 8636 850
provide a prcpert y mixed concrete containing the right propor- 15 .3810 .375 35 .8890 .875
tions as pre cribed in the plan.
16 .4064 .400 36 .9144 .900
. 17 .4318 .425 37 .9398 .925
1-3' THE UNIT OF MEASURE 18 4572 .450 38 .9652 .950
19 .4826 .475 39 .9906 .975 -
20 .5080 .500 40 1.016 1.00
Prior tn 'the wor1dwide acceptance of Metrication, otherwise
known as 5ystem Intemational (51), materials for concrete
structures were estimated in terms of cubic meter although, the
components thereof like; cement, sand, gravel and water, are The values presented in Table 1-1 could be useful in:
measured in pounds, cubic foot and gallons per bag respec-
tively. 1. Find~g the accurate conversion of length from English to
Metnc measure.
Lately however, under the 51 measures, the 94 pounds per
bag cement equivalent to 42.72 kilograms was changed and 2. ~etrmni the approximate value to be used generally
fIXed at 40 kilograms per bag. The traditional wooden box used In our slmpliffed methods of estimating. '
to measure the sand and gravel is 12 inches wide by 12 inches
long and 12 inches high, having a"net volume of 1 cubiC foot.
!I 5
4
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE CONCQTE
Take note that all length in inches is divisible by one or any

For Instance: combination of these 'five numbers. Thus, it could be easily con-
A) In solving problems, the probability of committing error is
vert~ to meters by summing up their quotient equivalent.
substantially high when sevem! digit numbers are being use!::!.
Example:,
Example: a. What IS the meter length equivalent of 7 inches? By sim-
It is easier to use .10 meter, the approximate equivalent of 4 ple analysis, 7 inches could be the sum of 4 and 3, there-
inches than .1-016 it's exact equivalent, be it by multiplication or fore:
4 Inches = .10 meter
by division processes.
3 Inches =.0'75 _meter
~ = 80 by inspection and analysis Answer =.175 meter
.10 h, How about 21 . inches?
JL = 78.7 by long process of division
.1016 5 x 4 inches = 20 + 1 = 21 inches
B) To memorize the values given in Table 1-1 is a wast~ of since 4" = .10 m. and
time and not a practical approach in estimating. A simple gUide 1" = .025; multiply
will be adopted so that one could easily determine the equiva-
lent values from English to Metric or vise versa.
5 x .10 m. = .50 + .025
. ::
, .525 m,
Example:
Problem Exercise
1. To convert Meter to Feet: Divide the length by .30 Using the foregoing simple guide, convert the following num-
bers from inches to meters or vise versa.
Say 6.00 meters = 20 ft .
.30 Inches to Meters rMeters to Inches
2. To convert Feet to Meters: Multiply by .30 , 66 2.42

99 3,35
Say, 30 feet x .30 = 9.00 meters 113 4.27
178 4.88
3. To convert Inches to Meter, just remember the following 233 5,19
values of equivalent.
1-4 CONCRETE PROPORTION
Proportioning concrete mixture is done in two different ways:
by weight or by volume method. The most common and con-
venient way is by the volume method using the empty plastic
bag of cement, ' or by a measuring box for sand and gravel as
7
6
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMA1E CONCRETE
explained in Section 1-3. Measuring the agret~s and water lance, the composition of these two materials fill the voids of the
by weight is sometimes used. in a . concrete batchmg plant for gravel and thereafter, form a solid mass called concrete equiva-
ready-mix <tQncrete or as specified 10 the plan. lent to one cubic meter.
Based on actual conr~tig work, one cubic meter of gravel

plus one-hEllf cubic meter sand mixed with cement and water
will obtain a little bit more tITan (lOe cubic meter solid concrete.
The small excess over one cubic meter will be considered as
contingency ..
Comment:
In actual concreting and masoniy work, there are several

factors that might affect the accuracy of the estimate. Some of
which are enumerated as follows:
1. Inaccurate volume of delivered aggregates which is very

FIGURE 1-1 MEASURING BOX
common. Delivery truck should be measured to check if '
the volume of aggregates being delivered is exactly as or-
TABLE 1-2 CONCRETE PROPORTION
dered.
Mixture Cement in Bag Sand Gravel 2 . . Dumping of aggregates on uneven ground surface and
Class Proportion 40 kg. 50 kg. cu. m. cu. m. grass areas reduces the net volume of aggregates.
.'
3. Improper measuring of the aggregates during the mixing '

AA 1: 1 ~ 3 12.0 9.5 .50 1.0 operation. This is common practice when the work is on its
A 1: 2 4 9.0 7.0 .50 1.0
1: momentum where laborers f~ils to observe the right meas-
B 2~ 5 7.5 6.0 .50 1.0
C 1 3 .50 1.0 uring of aggregates being delivered to the mixer.
6 6.0 5.0
4. The cement and fine aggregate for grouting concrete
Proportioning concrete by volume method had long been joints are mostly overlooked in the estimating processes.
practiced in almost all types of concrete construction. Time has
proven it to be effective and sucef~l: Howev~, ~n construc- 5. Cement waste due to reckless handling and hauling.
tion where space for materials stock pIling and. mixing ~oes not
permit. ready-mixed concrete is the most practical solution. 6. The pure cement powder used by mason in plastering op-
erations to prevent fhe plaster from sliding downward Is
It is interesting to note in Table 1-2 that the volume of sand not considered in estimating. .
and gravel for all classes of mixture is constant at :50 and 1.0
cubic meter respectively. It is true, on the assumption tha~ the 7. Pilferage of materials. This could be avoided with an effec-
cement paste enters the void of the sand and at the same ms- tive system of construction management.
8 9
CONCRETE
Ordering of Coarse Aggregate must be Specific as to: SOLUTION
a. Kind of gravel, either crushed stone or natural gravel from 1:, Determine the volume of the proposed concrete pave-
the creek. ment.
b. The minimum and maximum size of the stone must be Volume = Thickness x Width x Length
specified. It should be free from mixed sand because V = .10 x 3.00 x 5.00
sand is cheaper than gravel.
V = 1.5 cubic meters ,
c.. Natural gravel from the creek requires screening to obtain
a well-graded coarse aggregate. Take note that screening 2. Refer toTable 1-2. Using 40 kg. cement class C mix-
of aggregates means additional cost of labor and reduc- ture; multiply the volume by the corresponding values:
fion in the net usable volume of gravel.
Cement: 1.5 x 6.0 = 9.0 bags
Sand: 1.5 x .50 = .75 cu. m.
1-5 CONCRETE SLAB Gravel: 1.5 x 1.0 = 1.50 cu. m.
The discussions from cement to concrete proportions plus 3. Take note that the computation ,is for a 40 kg . cement.
the Tables as pr~sentd could be more meaningful and appre- Suppose there is no 40 kilograms cement and what is
ciated if accompanied by illustrations of actual applications. available are 50 kilograms per bag. How many bags will
be ordered using the later?
ILLUSTRATION 1-1 ,
SOLUTION - 2 ( Using a 50 kg. Cement)
A proposed concrete pavement has a general dimension of
10 cm. thick, 3.00 meters wide and 5.00 meter? long. Determine 1. Knowing the volume to b,e 1.5 cubic meters; refer again
the quantity of cement in bags, sand and gravel in cubic meters to Table 1-2. Under 50 kg. cement, using class "C" mix-,
required using class "C" mixture. ture; multiply the volume by the corresponding values.
Cement: 1.5 x 5.0 = 7.5 bags

Sand: 1.5 x
.50 = .75 cu .•m.
.10 em , ,. Gravel: 1.5 x 1.0 = 1.5 cu. m .
ILLUSTRATION 1-2
(
A rural road 6.00 meters wide after base preparation re-
quires concreting of one kilometer long. Find the number of
bags cement, sand and gravel requi(ed using class "A" concrete
if the slab is 6 inches thick.
FIGURE 1-2 CONCRETE PAVEMENT
11
10
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTThiATE CONCRETE
ILLUSTRATION 1-3
A national highway' project as shown in Figure 1-4 specify 25

centimeters thick concrete. Find the number of bags cement,
6"
sand ~nd.gravel required using class "A· mixture.
1,000 m.
FIGURE 1-3 CONCRETE ROAD
PLAN
SOLUTION FIGURE 1·4 CONCRETE ROAD
1. Solve for the volume of concrete pavement, convert 6 SOLUTION

inches to meter = .15 m. (see table 1-1)
1. Find the volume of the concrete slab;
V = Thickness x Width x Length
V - = Thickness x Width x Length
V = .15 x 6.00 x 1,000 m.
V = .25 x 7.20 x 1,000 meters
V = 900 cubic meters
V = 1,800 cubic meters
2. Refer to Table 1-2. Using 40 kg. cement, multiply the vol- . 2. Refer to Table 1-2. Using 40 kg. cement class A mixture,
ume by the corresponding values: multiply the volume by the corresponding values:
Cerr.. lllt: 900 x 9.0 = 8,100bags Cement: 1,800 x 9.0 = 16,200 bags
Sand: 900 x .50 = 450 cu. m. Sand: 1,800 x .50:: 900 cu. m.
Gravel: 900 x 1.0 = 900 cu. m. Gravel: . 1,800 x 1.0 = 1,800 cu. m.
3. If there is no available 40 kg. cement, a 50 kg. cement will 3. If 50 kg. cement will be use, we need:
require:
Cement: 1,800 X 7.0 "12,600 bags
Cement: 900 x 7.0 = 6,300 bags Sand and Gravel same as in step 2.
Sand: 900 x .50 = 450 cu. m.
Gravel: 900 x 1.0 =
900 cu. m. ILLUSTRA TION 1-4
(
Take note that the thickness was first converted from The ground floor of a residential house has an area of 200
inches to meters using the approximate values in Table 1-1. square meters. The plan specify 4 inches thick concrete floor on
fill using class C concrete. List down the materials required.
·12
13
.SIMPLlFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE CONCRETE
2. From the following figure, solve for cement, sand and gravel
using class B concrete if the floor is 5 inches thick.
10.00 m.
20.00 m.
S.OOM.
FIGURE 1-4 FLOOR PLAN
SOLUTION
FIGURE 1·7 FLOOR PLAN
1 . Find the volume of the floor slab. Convert 4 Inches to
meter =
.10 m. and then multiply:
1-6 ESTIMATING CONCRETE SLAB BY THE
200 x .10 = 20 cubic meters
AREA METHOD
2. Refer to Table 1·2 under 40 kg. cement along class C
mixture, multiply: Estimating concrete slab by the "Area Method" is much eas-
ier than the Volume Method as explained in Sec. 1-5. However,
Cement : 20 x 6.0 120 bags= this could· be done with the aid of Table 1-3 which readily offer
.Sand: 20 x .50 = 10 cu. m. the quantity of cement, sand and gravel per square meter de-
Gravel: 20 x 1.0 = 20 cu. m. pending upon the required thicknes~ of the slab.
Problem Exercise
TABLE 1-3 QUANTITY OF CEMENT, SAND AND GRAVEL FOR SLAB
AND WALLS PER SQUARE METER AREA
1. A concrete road 15 meters wide, 5 kilDmeters. long, is de-
signed with a thickness as shown in the following cross sec- Mixture Class "
tion. Specifying class "Aft concrete, determine the quantity Slab
of 40 kg. cement, sand and gravel required . If there is no Thick 40 kg. Cement 50 kg. Cement Sand Gravel
available"40 kg. cement, how many bags at 50 kg . would be ness I
cm. A B C A B C cu. m. cu. m.
needed instead?
5.0 .45Q .375 .300 .350 .300 . .250 .0250 .050
--1
7.5 .675 .563 .450 .525 .450 .375 .0375 .075
8" 8" 10.0 .900 .750 .600 .700 .600 .500 .. 0500 .100
~:
12.5 1.125 .938 .750 .875 .750 .625 .0630 .125
15.0 1.350 1.125 .900 1.050 .900 .750 .0750 .150
17.5 1.575 1.313 1.p50 1.225 1.050 .875 .0880 .175 .
Tf------r;;;--10" 20.0 1.800 1.500 1.200 1.400 1.200 1.00 .1000 .200
22.5 2.030 1.688 1.350 1.575 1.350 1.125 .1125 .225
25.0 2.250 1.875 1.500 1.750 1.500 1.250 .1250 .250
15.00 m. 27.5 2.475 2.063 1.650 1.925 1.650 1.375 .1380 .275
30.0 2.700 2.250 1.800 2.100 1.800 1.500 .1500 .300
FIGURE 1~ CROSS SECTION OF THE ROAD
15
. '"""\i.
SIMPLIFIEJl CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE CONCRETE
3. Again, comparing the result with that of Illustration 1-2 the

ILLUSTRATION 1-5 answers are practically the same. Thus, solving the quan-
tity of cement, sdncJ snd gravel for concrete pavement
Solving the problem of Illustration 1-1 ~nd 1-2 by the Area and walls can be done by the Volume Method and the
Method we haxe the following"-solutions: Area Method. The choice is yours.
Solution (or Ulustration 1-1

ILLUSTRATION 1-6
1. Solve for the pavement area.
A concrete wall, 3 inches thick with general dimensions of
Area = Width x Length 3.00 meters high by 7.00 meters long specify class "S" mixture.
Find the number of 40 kg. cement, sand and gravel required .
A = 3.00 x 5.00 m.
A = 15sq. m.
2. Refer to Table 1-3. Along 10 cm.slab thickness under 40 3.00m.

kg. cement class "C· mixture, multiply: .
Cement: 15 x .600 ~ 9.0 bags

Sand: 15 x .050 =
.75 cu. m. 7.00m.
Gravel: 15 x .100 = 1.5 cu . m.
FIGURE 1-8 CONCRETE WALL
3. Compare this quantity to that of Illustration 1-1, the results
are the same.
SOLUTION
Solution for Ulustration 1-2 1. Convert 3 inches to centimeters r = 7.5 (see Table 1-1)
1. Find the area of the concrete road pavement; 2. Find the Area of the wall:
Area = Height x Length
A = Width x Length
A = 3.00 x 7.00 m. = 21 sq. m.
A = 6.00 x 1,000 meters
A = 6,000 sq. m. 3. Refer to Table 1-'3. Under slab thickness 7.5 cm. 40 kg.
cement class S mixture we obtain the number .563
2. Refer to Table 1-3. Using class "An concrete for a 15 cm. 4. Likewise, under columh sand and gravel of Table 1-3 we
thick concrete slab, multiply: obtain .0375 and .075 respectively.
Cement: . 6:~0 x 1.350 = 8,1 OO_bags
Sand: 6,000 X" .075 = 450 cu. m. 5. Multiply the Area by each of these numbers to get tile
Gravel: 6,000 x.150 = 900 cu. m. quantity of cement, sand and gravel respectively.
17
16
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTI1!fATE CONCRE.TE
Cement:. 21 x .563 =11.82 say 12 bags 1-7 SQUARE CONCRETE COLUMN

Sand: 21 x .0375 = .79 cu. m.
Gravel: 21 x .075 =
1.57 cu. m.
Estimating the quantity of materials for concrete post or col·
umn can also be done In' two simple ways: '
Problem Exercise
1. By Volume Method and
1. By the Area Method, determine the quantity of cement , 2. By Linear Meter Method.
sand and grave,1of the proposed concrete parking area 6
Inches thick with a general dimensions of 150 x 120 me· ILLUSTRATION 1-7
ters using class "A" mixture.
A reinforced concrete square column Is 5.00 meters long
120,00 m , with a cross sectional dimensions of 16 by 16 inches. Deter-
mine the quantity of cement, sand and gravel using class A
concrete. .
5O.COm,
16"
FIGURE 1-9 FLOOR PLAN OF PARKING AREA
16"
2. By the Volume and Area Method, find the quantity of ce-
ment. sand and gravel of the concrete pavement 4" thick
as shown in Figure 1-10 using class "S" concrete.
Cross Section
FIGURE 1-11 SQUARE COLUMN

9.00
B.OOm. SOLUTION:
12.00m.
A. By Volume Method
20.00 S.COm.
1. Convert first all measurements from inches to meter. ,16
inches = .40 meter (See Table 1-1)
10.00 m.
(
2. Solve fQrthe cross 'sectional area of the column .
Area: .40 x .40 = .16sq. m.
FIGURE 1-10 CONCRETE PAVEMENT PLAN 3. Find the volume of the column.
18 19
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE CONCRETE
v = .16 x 5.00 meters .SOLUTION

V = .80 cu. m.
1. Convert all ,dimensions from inches to meters. (Refer to
Table 1~. use approximate values).
4. Refer to Table 1-2, using 40 kg. cement class "A" con-
crete, multiply: 20 inches = .50m.
Cement: .80 x 9.0 =
7.2 say 8 bags 2. Solve for the volume of one square column.
Sand: .80 x .50 = 0.4 say 0.5 cu. m.
Gravel: .80 x 1.0 = 0.8 say 1.0 cu. m. V = .50 x .50 x 7.00
ILLUSTRATION 1-8 V = 1.75 cu. m.
A concrete column is 7.00 meters high with a cross sec- 3. Ftnd the volume of the 8 columns. '
tional dimensions of 20 by 20 inches. Detennine the quantity of
cement sand and gravel content of th(; column if there are 8
columns in the row using class "An conc/ete.
-=
V = 1.75 x 8
V 14 cubic meters
4. Refer to Table '1-2. Using a 40 kg. cement class "A" mix-

ture, multi~y:
Cem~nt: 14 x 9.0 =126 bags

Sand,: 14 x ~ 50 =7.0 cu. m.
Gravel: 14 x 1.0 .= 14.0 cu. m.
x x
1-8 ESTIMATING SQUARE CONCRETE
ELEVATION COLUMN BY LINEAR METER METHOD
20"
Another way of estimating the quantity of materials for con-
crete column is by tha Linear Meter Method.
20"
(
Under this method, the length of the column is first deter-
mined. With the aid of Table 1-4, the materials required are
CROSS SECTION x-x found by multiplying the length by the corresponding values of
cement, sand and gravel given in Table 1-4.
FIGURE 1·12 CONCRETe COLUMN
20 21
TABLE 1-4 QUANTITY OF CEMENT, SAND AND GRAVEL FOR POST

aLUSTRATION 1-9 BEAM AND GIRDER PER METER LENGTH
Solving the problem of Illustration 1-8 Figure 1-12 where Size Mixtul'8 la~C Sand . Gravel
cm. ~O kg. Cemeot 50 kg. ce[!Jn~
there are 8 columns at 7.00 ml;·,.m; high each, we have:
---_.
15 x 20
A
.270
B
.225
A
.210
B.
.180
cu m.
.015
cu. m.
.030
SOLUTION 15 x 25 .338 .281 .263 .225 .019 .038
15 x 30 .405 .338 .315 .270 .023 .045
1. Find the total length of the 8 columns 15 x 35 .473 .394 .369 .315 .026 .053
15 x 40 .540 .450 .420 .360 .030 .060
8 column x 7.00 m. = 56.00 meters 2Ox20 .360 .300 .280 .240 .020 .040
2Ox25 .450 .375 .350 300 .025 .050
2. Refer to Table 1-4. Along 50 x 50 cm. column, using 2Ox30 .540 .450 .420 .360 .030 ' .060
40 kg. cement class "An concrete, multiply: 2Ox35 .630 .525 .490 .420 .035 .070
2Ox40 .720 .600 .560 .480 .040 .080
Cement: 56.00 x 2.250 =
126 bags
Sand: 56.00 x .125 =
7.0 cu. m.
25x25
25 x 30
.563
.675
.469
:563
.438
'.525
.375
.450
031
.038
.063
.075
Gravel: 56.00 x .250 = 14.0 cu. m. 25 x 35 .788 .656 .613 525 .044 .088
25x40 .900 .750 .700 .600 .050 .100
3. Comparing the results to that of Illustration 1-7, the an- 25x45 1.013 .844 .788 .675 .056 .113
25 x50 1.125 .938 875 .750 .06'3 .125
swers are the same.
3Ox30 .81'0 .S75 .S30 .540 .045 .090
3Ox35 .945 .788 .735 .S30 053 .105
Pro blem .Exercise 3Ox40 1.080 .900 .840 .720 .060 .120
3Ox45 1.125 1.013 .945 .810 .068 .. 135
1. From the following figure, solve for the quantity of ce- 30 x50 1.350 1.1-25 . 1.050 .900 .075 .1.50
ment, sand and gravel by the Volume Method using (a)
35x35 1.'103 .919 .858 ' .735 .061 .123
class "An concrete; (b) Class B concrete. 35 x40 1.2S0 1.'050 .980 .840 .070 .140
35x45 1.418 1.181 1.103 .945 • .0'(.9 .158
10" 24" 35x50 1.575 1.313 1.225 1.050 .088 .175
35 x55 1.890 1.575 1.470 1.2S0 .105 .210
12"
20" 4Ox40 1.440 1.200 1.120 .960 .080 .160
4Ox45 1.S20 1.350 1.2S0 1.080 .090 .180
4Ox50 1.800 1.500 1.400 1.200 .100 .200
8" 40x55 1.980 1.650 1.540 1.320 .110 .220
40xSO 2.160 1.800 . 1.680 1.440 .120 .240
22" 10"
45 x 45 1.823 1.519 1.418 1.215 .101 .203
CROSS SECTION FIGURE 1-13 ,CROSS SECTION 45 x50 2.025 1.688 1.575 1.350 .113 .226
45 x55 2.228 1.856 1.733 1.485 .124 .248
a.) S COLUMN AT 13 M. HIGH b.) 8 COLUMNS AT 16 fv1. HIGH 45x60 2.430 2.025 1.890 1.620 .135 .270
I
22 23
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE . CONCREtE
1-9 POST AND FOOTING

so x 50 2.250 1.875 1.750 1.500 .125 .2SO
SOx 55 2.475 2.063 1.9925 1.650 .138 .275
SOx 60 2.700 2.250 2.100 1.800 .150 .300
Structurally, post is always supported by slab called footing
i
or foundation. Estimating the quantity of materials for these
55 x 60 2.970 2.475 • 310 1.980 .165 .330 types of structures could be done by:
55 x 70 3.465 2.888 695 2.310 .193 .386
55 x80 3.960 3.300 :, 080 2.640 .220 .440 1. The Volume Method or
55 x90 4.455 3.713 3.465 2.970 .248 .495 2. The Area and Linear Meter Method combined for
55 x 100 4.950 4.125 3.850 3.300 .275 .5SO post and footing. ,
60x60 3.240 2.700 2.520 2.160 .180 .360
60x70 3.780 3.150 2.940 2.520 .210 .420
60 x 80 4.320 3.600 3.360 2.880 .240 .480
ILLUSTRATION 1-10
60x90 4.860 4.050 3.780 3.240 .270 .540
60 x 100 5.400 4.500 4.200 3.600 .300 .600 A concr£.te post 4.00 meters high with cross sectional di-
mensions of 40 cm. x 40 cm. is supported by a footing slab 20
65x 60 3.510 2.925 2.730 2.340 .195 .390 cm. thick by 1.20 m. square. Using class "Aft concrete, find the
65 x70 4.095 3.413 3.185 2.730 .228 .455
65x80 4.680 3.900 3.640 3.120 .260 '.520 quantity of cement, sand and gravel if there are 12 posts of the
65 x90 5.265 4.388 4.095 3.510 .293 .5~ same size.
65 x 100 5.850 4.875 4.550 3.900 .325 .650
70x70 4.410 3.675 . 3.430 2.940 . .245 .490 1.20

70x80 5.040 4.200 3.920 3.360 .280 .560
70x90 5.670 4.725 4.410 3.780 .315 .630
70 x 100 6.300 5.250 4.900 4.200 .350 .700 Ht. = 4.00 m.
75 x70 4.725 3.938 3.675 3.150 .. 263 .525 1.20m.

75x80 5.400 4.500 4.200 3.600' .300 .720
75 x90 6.075 5.063 4.725 4.050 .338 .675
75 x 100 6.750 5.625 ·5.250 4.500 .375 .7SO 1.20m.
80x 80 5.760 4.800 4.480 3.840 .320 .640 PLAN ELEVATION
80 x90 6.480 5.400 5.040 4:320 .360 .720
80 x 100 7.650 6.375 5.950 5.100 .525 1.050
FIGURE 1-14 POST AND FOTIN~
85 x80 p 120 5.100 4.760 4.080 .340 .680
85 x 90 I v.885 5.738 5.355 4.590 .385 .7.65
85 x 100 7.650 6.375 5.950 5.100 .425 .8SO SOLUTION
90 x90 7.290 6.075 5.670 4.860 .405 .810
90 x 100 8.100 6.750 6.300
A. By the Volume Meth6d
5.400 .450 .900
95x 90 7.695 6.413 5.985 5.130 .428 .855 1. Find the volume of the 12 posts
95 x 100 8.550 7.125 6.650 5.700 .475 .950
100 l( 100 9.00 7.500 7.000 6.000 .SOO 1.000 Volume = Sectional area x Heigh x NO . .of post
24 25
I
I CONCRETE
SIMPLIFIED C()NSTRUCTION ESTIMATE
4. Refer to Table 1-3, using 40 kg. cement class "Aft mix-
Volume = 12 posts x (.40 x .40) x 4.00 m. ht. ture for 20 em. thick slab; multiply:
V = 7.68 cubic meters
Cement: 17.28 x 1.80 = 31.1 bags
2. Solve for the volume of 12 footing slab
Sand: 17.28 x .100 = 1.72 cu. m,
I Gravel: 17.28 x .200 = 3.46 cu . m.
v= 12 ( .20 x 1.20 x 1.20 ) 5. Add results of step 2 and step 4.
V = 3.456 cubic meters
Cement: 69.12. + 31.1 = 100.2 bags
3. Find the total volume. Add 1 and 2 Sand: 3.84 + 1.72 = 5.56 cu. m.
Gravel: 7.68 + 3.45 = 11.13 cu. m.
Total Volume =
7.68 + 3.456
V = 11.136 cu. m.
ILLUSTRATION 1-11
I"
4. Refer to Table 1-2. Using 40 kg. cement class "Aft From Figure 1-15, determine the number of 40 kg . cement,
: concrete, multiply: sand and a gravel required using class· A' concrete for the foot-
ing and class "C' concrete for the flooring 4" thick.
Cement: 11.136 x 9.0 = 100.2 bags -!'
Sand: 11.136 x .50 =

5.56 cu. m: .30
ii
Gravel: 11 .136 x 1.0 = 11.136 cu. m.
~ .
4.00m.
E:]
~
11. 30
4" floor I'» ): ~ :} ~ : : ~ {: ~ : :T -roo:.'""'

.....""
.:"",
:: --"
..::1
B. Solution by the Linear Meter and Area Method
4" concrete floor slab 3.00m.
P .90
1. Find the total length of, 12 posts
L = 12 posts x 4.00 m. ht.

L =48 meters .80
PLAN ELEVATION
2. Refer to Table 1-4. Along the 40 x 40 cm. column size ' FIGURE 1-1&
I
class "Aft mixture; multiply..
SOLUTION
Cement: 48 x 1.440 =
69.12 bags
Sand: 48 x .080 =
3.84 cu. m. A. Footing Slab
Gravel: 48 x .160 = 7.68 cu. m .. (
1. Solve for the volume of F
3. Find the area of the footing slab
Volume = .15 x .80 x .80 = .096 cu. m.
Area = 12 pes. ( 1.2' x 1.2 ) 2. Total volume of 4 pie~s footing slab
... 17.28 sq. m. /
27
26
CONCRETE
v = .096 x 4 footings ...... ......... ...... . 0.3S4
.1-lORECTANG RCOLUMN
B. Pedestal
1. Solve for the volume of P The procedure in estimating rectangular column is practically
Vp = .30 x .30 x .90 the saine as that of the square column. It 'could be either !>y..
Vp = .OS1 cu. m. x 4 pieces ............... 0.324 volume method or by the linear meter method as previously
' explained. The choice of the method however, depends upon
Total volume .......... 0.70S cu. m. the convenience and preference of the estimator.
2. Refer to Table 1-2. Using 40 kg. cement class "An con- ILLUSTRATION 1-12
crete; multiply:
A series of 8 rectangular concrete columns with typical
Cement-: .70S x 9.0 = 6.37 bags cross sectional dimenSions of 40 x 60 cm. is supporting a beam.
Sand' : .70S x .50 =
.354 cu. m. The column has a clear height of 5.00 meters from the floor line
Gravel: .70S x 1.0 = .70S cu. m. to the bottom line of the beam. Specifying class "A" concrete,
determine the quantity of cement sand and gravel required .
C. Concrete Floor Slab
1. Solve for the volume of concrete floor slab.
Volume =
.10 x 3.00 x 4.00
V = 1.2 cu. m.
2. Refer to Table 1-2. Using 40 kg. cement ~Ias ·C" con-

crete; multiply:
Cement: 1.2 x 6.0 = 7.2 bags. ELEVATIOW

Sand: 1.2 x .50 =
0.6 cu. m.
Gravel: 1.2 x 1.0 = 1.2 cu. m. .4Dm.
3. Summary of the materials Band .C.

.8Om. Cross Section A-A
Cement: 6.37 + 7.2 = 13.57 say 14 bags
Sand: .354 + 0.6 = .95 cu. m.
Gravel: .70S + 1.2 = 1.90 cu. m. F GURE 1-16 RECTANGULAR COLUMN
(
Comment:
SOLU~N ( 'By Linear Meter Method)
To a meticulous estimator, the area occupied by the posts
. will be subtracted from the gross area of the floor although the 1.. Find the total length of the S columns .
result is an insig':l;ficant amount.
Length: 8.00 x 5.00 m. = 40 meters
28 '
29
CONCRETE
3. Find the volume of the plaster at 12 mm thick.
2. Refer to Table 1-4. Along the 40 x 60 cm. column size
under 40 kg. cement class ·A.... concrete, multiply: -
V = Area x thickness of the plaster
V = 80 x .012 m. = .96 cu. m.
Cement: 40 x 2.16 = 86.4 bags
Sand:' 40 x ' .120 = 4.8 cu. m. 4. Refer to Table 2-1. Using 40 kg. cement class "A" mix-
Gravel: 40 x .240 = 9.6 cu. m. ture, multiply:
Cement: .96 x 18.0 = 17.2 bags
SOLUTION (By Volume Method) Fine Sand: .96 x 1.0' =, .96 cu. m.
1. .Find the volume of the eight columns: Plastering is a separate subject matter, to be discussed
thoroughly in Chapter - 2.
, V = .40 x .60 x 5.00 ht. x 8
V =
9.6 cubic meters
1-11 RECTANGULAR BEAM AND GIRDER
2. Refer to Table 1-2. Using 40 kg. cement class "A" con-
A Beam is defined as a strong horizontal piece of reinforced
crete, multiply: concrete for spanning and supporting weights. On the other
cement: 9.6 x 9.0 = 86.4 bags hand, a be~m that is carrying or sapporting another beam is '
..~ and: 9.6 x .50 =
4.8 cu. m. called girder. Similarly, estimating the materials for these types
13'ravel : 9.6 x 1.0 =
9.6 cu. m. . of Structures is either by the volume or the linear meter method.
','':1'
compani1g the result of the two methods, the answers are . Girde~
the same. As to ,which method to use is now your choice. 16.00 m.
Plastering
8.00m
If the post will be plastered with class "A" mortar mixture, the '
solution will be as followS:
1. Find the total surface area of the 8 columnS. .

PLAN '
Perimeter = 2 ( ,40) + 2 ( .60)
P =
2.00 m. 25
(
2. Solve for the surface area of the .8 columns. 40 FIGURE 1·17 .60
Area =P x height x Number of posts

Cross Section of Beam Cross Section of Girder
A = 2.00 x. 5.00 x8
A = 80 sq. m.
31
30
1
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE CON~TE
3. Find the total length ot the Girder

. :LLUSTRATION 1;.13
.From Figure 1-17, using class MA" concrete, list down the
16 m. x 2 pes. = 32 meters
matenals required.
4. Reterto Table 1-4 along cOlumn size 40 x 60 under
coh~mn 40 kg class A mixture, multiply:
SOLUTION (By Volume Method)
Cement: 32 x 2.160 = 69.12 bags
1. Find the volume of the beam Sand: 32 x .120 3.84 cu. m. =
Gravel : 32x .240 . = 7.68 cu. m .
. Volume = 5 pes. x .25 x .40 x 8.00 m. span
V =
4 cubic meters
5. Summarized results of 2 and 4 .
2. Solve for the volume of the girder
Cement: 36 + 69.12 =
105.12 say 106 bags
Volume =
2 pes. x .40 x .60 x 16.00 m. span Sand: 2 + 3.84 =
5.84 cu. m.
V = 7.68 cu. m. Gravel: 4 + 7.68 = 11.68 cu. m .
3. Total volume ·of beam and girder

1-12 CIRCULAR COLUMN
Total V = 4 + 7.68
V = 11.68 cu. m. Estimating tile matari als for circular column is typically the
I[
same as the volume method for the square and rectangular col-
I' 4. Refer to Table 1-2. Using 40 kg. cerrient class "4" COIl- umns with the aid of Table 1-2. However, Table 1-5 was also
crete; muitiply: prepared for circular column problems to avail of the linear me-
ter method of estimating
Cement : 11 .68 x 9.0 , = 105.1 2 bags
Sand: 11 .68 x .50 =5.84 cu. m .
Gra vel: 11.68 x 1.0 =
11.68 cu. m. ILLUSTRATION!· 4
SOLUTION (By The Linear Meter Method) A cirGLI lar concreh. ::olumn has a diameter o. to em . by 6.00
meters high. Find the concrete materials requir d if there are 5
1. Find the total length of the Beam columns of the same size in a row.
5 pes. x 8.00 m . = 40 meters SOLUTION - 1 ( ~ y the Volu me Method)

\
2. Reter to Table 1-4 . Along column size 25 x 40 cm. uncler
1. Solv'" for the cross sectional area of the column.
40 kg. class A concrete, multiply:
Cement: 40 m. x .~O = 36 bags A. ='rrr;> r A = 0.7854 x d 2 (FNnula)
Sand: 40 m. x .050 = 2 cu. m.
Gravel: 40 m . x .100 = 4 cu. m. A = (0.7654 x .60 2) = .283 Sq. III
32 \ 33
SIMPLIFIED ~QNSTRUCIO ESTIMATE CONCRETE
4. Refer to Table 1.:2. Using 40 kg. cement class -A· con-

crete: multiply: '
Cement: 8.49 x 9.0, = 76.4 bags

6.COm. Sand: 8.49 x .50 = 4.24 cu. m.
A A
Gravel: 8.49 x 1.9 = 8.49 cu. m.
SOLUTION - 2 ( By Linear Meter Method)
ELEVATION SECTION A-A
1. Detennine the total length of the 5 circular columns.
FIGURE 1-18 CIRCULAR COLUMN
2. Find the volume of one column. L = (5 x 6.00 m ht.) = 30.00 meters

v = .283 x 6 m. ht. = 1.698 cu. m. 2. Refer to Table 1-5. Along the 60 cm. column diameter
under 40 kg. cement, class "A" mixture, multiply:
3. Solve for U.e volume of 5 columns.
Cement: 30.00 x 2.545 = 76.4 bags
Total volume: (1.698 X 5) = 8.49 cu. m. Sand: , 30.00 x .141 =
4.23 cu. m.
Gravel: 30.00 x .282 = 8.46 cu. m.
TABLE 1-5 QUANTITY OF CEMENT, SAND AND GRAVEL PER METER
LENGTH OF CIRCULAR COLUMN
Problem Exerci§e '.,
MIXTURE CLASS
1. From the following figure, List down the concrete materials
Col.
Dia.
40 kg. cement 50 kg . cement
. Sand Gravel
by any method using. class "A" concrete .
cm. A B A B cu. m. cu. m .
30"
25 .442 .368 .344 .295 .025 .050
30 .636 ,530 .495 .424 .035 .070
35 .866 .722 .673 .577 .048 .096
40 1.131 .942 .880 .754 .063 .126 a.OOm.
50 1.767 1.473 1.374 1.178 .098 .196
55 . 2.138 1.782 1.663 1.425 .119 .238 36"
60 2.545 2.121 1.979 1.696 .141 .282
65 2.986 2.488 2.323 1.991 .166 ' .332
70 3.464 2.886 2.694 2.309 ·.192 .384
.30
75 3.976 3.313 3.093 2.651 .221 .442
80 4.524 3.770 3.519 3.016 .251 .502
8(; 5.107 4.256 3.972 3.40S .284 .568 PLAN ELEVATION
90 5.726 4.771 4.453 3.817 .318 .636 ",'
100 7.069 5.890 5.498 4.712 .393 .786
. FIGURE 1-19 PoST AND FOOTING
34 35
CONCRETE
SIMPLIFIED COlllSTRUCTlON ESTIMATE
3. From the following figure, find the concrete materials re-
2. From the following figures, solve for the concrete materials quired for t he columns 9.00 meters high each using class A
of slab, beams and girders using class MAn concrete. concrete. . .
Beam
4.80m.
12 pc$. Octagonal Column 10 pes. Hexagonal Column
FIGURE 1-22
PLAN
4. From the following Figure 1-23, find the cement, sand and
35cm.
25cm. gravel if there are 8 columns, using class "An mixture.
45"
4O·cm. 50 cm.
6.00m.
Cross Section of Beam Cross Section of Girder
FIGURE 1'0 20
6.oom. 6.oom.
. PLAN ELEVATION
6.oom.
FIGURE 1·23 CROSS SECTION OF ELIPTICAL COLUMN
3.00 4" Cone. slab 5. A building deSign has spiral reinforced concrete column 9
4" Cone. Slab 5" Conc. slab
meters high with a general cross sectional diameter of 45
6.50
inches. Determine the required materials by the volume
method and the linear meter method using class A concrete
if there are 6 columns in the plan.
4.00
1-13 CONCRETE PIPE r
3.50
Concrete pipe is much in demand for smBl1' and. medium
C 'IS Section of Beam FLOOR PLAN drainage construction. The use· of cOncrete pipe as drainage
structure materially save cost of forms, time and labor costs as
FIGURE 1~2 well.
36 37 .
Procedures in Estimating the Materials for Concrete Pipe. Formula: . Volume = 0.7854 0 2 h Formula
1. Find the net volume of the concrete pipe. That is, by sub- V = 0.7854 x 1.10 2 x 1.00 m.
tracting the volume occupied by the hole from the gross volume
of,the pipe: V = .950 cu. m.
2. Knowing the net volume of the concrete, refer.to Table 1-

2, under 40 kg. cement and class of mixture specified, multiply
by the net volume found for cement, sand and gravel or
,3. Use Table 1-6 for final result.
Groove Tongue
90 em. Diameter Concrete Pipe Cross Section
FGURE 1-25 CONCRETE PIPE
D
2. Solve for the volume of the hole.
V =,0.7854 x d 2h
1.00 Meter Pipe V = (0.7854 x .90
2
x 1.00 length) = .636 cu. m.
Where: 0 ::;Diameter of the Pipe 3. Subtract result of step 2 from step 1 to get the net volume
d =
diameter of the pipe hole of the concrete pipe.
L =
Length of the pipe 1.00 tn.
Vc = .950 - .636 = .314 . .
FIGURE 1-24 CONCRETE PIPE
4. Total volume of the 12 pipes.
~LUSTRAION 1-15 Vt = .314 x 12
A road construction requires 12 pieces of 90 cm. -diameter Vt . = 3.768 cubic meters

concrete pipes for drainage purposes. Determine the qu~ntiy of
cement, sand and gravel needed to manufacture said pipes 5. Refer to Table 1-2. Using 40 kg. cement class "Aft con-
. using class MA" concrete. (excluding reinforcement which will be ~et; multiply:
(
discussed later in chapter 3).
Cement: 3.768 x 9.0 = 33.912 say 34 bags
SOLUTION (By Volume Method) S'a nd: 3.768 x .50 = 1.88 say 2.0 cu. m.
1. Solve for the gross volume of the concrete pipe.
Gravel: 3.768 x 1.0 = 3.77 say 4.0 cu. m.
38 39
SIMPLIFIED {:ONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE
TABLE 1-6 QUANTITY OF CEMENT, SAND AND GRAVEL CHAPTER

PER CONCRETE PIPE.
Diameter in CEMENT IN BAGS

Centi~ eter Class of M:. ,W~ Sand Gravel
D d A 6 cu. m. cu. m.
MASONRY
, .152 ,! 27 .009 .018
21 15
.163 .01 1 .022
26 40 .195
.274 .018 . 0~7 2-1 CONCRETE HOLLOW BLOCKS
33 25 .~28
39 30 .436 .363 ,:025 .050
,635 .530 .036 .072
50 40 Concrete Ho"ow Block is popularly known as CHB. It is
60 50 .779 .650 .044 .088
.098 .1 96 classified as load bearing and non-bearing blocks. Load bearing
78 60 1.755 1.463
2.260 1.883 .126 .252 blocks are those whose thickness ranges . from 15 to 20 centi-
90 70
100 80 2.538 2.115 .141 ' .282 meters and are used to carry load aside from its own weight.
110 90 2.826 2.355 .157 .314
120 · 100 3.110 2.595 .173 .346 Non-bearing blocks on the other hand, are blocks intended
120 4.482 3.735 .249 .498
144 for walls, partitions, fences, dividers and the like carrying its
174 150 5.500 4.583 .306 .. 612
own weight whose thickness ranges from 7 to 10 centimeters.
SOLUTION - 2 (Per Pipe Using Table 1-6)

1. To say 90 centimeters concrete pipe, it re~stho the Iho1ee
diameter. And for the purpose of estimatmg e vo u~
of concrete, we consider the inside diameter of the pipe
as presented in the second column d of Table 1-6.
2. Refer to Table 1-6. Under d = 90 pipe diameter, class

"A" mixture, multiply:
FIGURE 2-1 CONCRETE HOLLOW BLOCK
Cement: 12 x 2.826 = 33.9 say 34 bags
Sand: 12 x .157 = 1.88 say 2.0cll.m. The standard hollow blocks has three void cells and two half
cells at both ends having a total of four. These hollow cells vary
Gravel: 12 x .314 = 3.77 say 4.0 cu. m. in sizes as there are different manufacturers using different
types of mold. Hence, it is recommended that concrete hollow '
blocks with bigger cells. be, considered in estimating for a mor~
realistic result. .
In this study, what we want to know is the quantity of the ma-

terials needed for a certain masonry wock made of concrete.
41
40
MASONRY
SIMPLIFIED OONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE '
hollow blo( \' ,vhlch generally comprises of the following items. SOLUTION - 1 (By Fundamental Method)
1. Divide the height of the fence by the height of one block.
1. Concrete hollow blocks.
2.
3.
Cement and sand for block laying.
Cement, sand and gravel filler for the hollow core or cell.
3.00 = 15 layers
'. 20
4. Cement and fine sand for plastering.
5. Cement sand and gravel for foundation or footing.
2. Divide the length of the fence by the length of one block
6. Reinforcing steel bars and , -,/
7. Tie wires. 4.00 = 10 pieces

.40
Item 1 to 5 will be discussed in this chapter. The reinforcing
, steel bars and Tie wires will be presented in Chapter 3 -Metal 3. Multiply the result of step 1 by step 2
Reinforcement.
15 x 10 = 150 piec~s
Estimating the materials for masonry work using hollow
b! ,;~ks.r could be done in either of the following methods: SOLUTION - 2 (By the Area Method)
..
Jy Fundamental methods
By the Area methods
Let us examine first how many pieces ofCHB can cove~ up
one square meter area.
, D.-LUSTRATION 2-1 1.00 m.
A concrete hollow block wall has a general dimension of

3.00 meters high by 4.00 meters long. D~termin the number of
CHB, cement and sand required to construct the wall. 1.00m.
FIGURE 2-3 NUMBER OF CHB PER SQUARE METER
3.00m. From .the above figure it appears, that one square meter
area. re~Uls 12.5 pieces concrete hollow blocks. Therefore, by
Floor line multiplYing the entire ,area of the wall by 12.5, we find the total
.50 _.L-~
Footing line number of CHB required. Thus,
ELEVATION
1; Area of the fence; 3.00 x 4.00 m - 12 sq. m.
!=Kl'l3 ': '.~ ~ ONCRET HOLLOW BLOCKS WALL

2. Multiply: 12.00 sq. m. x 12.5 =150 pieces.
43
42
SIMPLIFIED 'CONSTRlJCTION ESTIMATE
MAS y
ILLUSTRATION 2-2
2. If there are 12.5 blocks in one square meterthen,
From the following Figure 2-4, find the number of 4~ x 8" X multiply by the area.
16 concrete hollow blocks to construct the fence.
ft
156 x 12.5 = 1,950 pieces.

2O.oom.
Comments
1. Comparing the results obtained by the two methods, the

answers are practically the same, but for convenience,
the solution by the ar a method is much favored for' be-
ing simple and direct .0 the answer.
PLAN ELEVATION 2. Take note that in the above example, we computed the
number of hollow blocks without posts. Suppose that
FIGURE 2-4 CHB FENCE Figure 2-4 was provided with the necessary posts as in-
dicated in Figure 2-5, in this case, the area covered by
SOLUTION - 1 ( By Fundamental Method .> the post will be subtracted from the total area of the wall,
then solve for the CHB adopting the area method for
simplicity of the process.
1. Find the Perimeter of the Fence
P = 4 + 4 + 12 + 20 + 20 = 60.00 meters. 2O.oom. .20 x .20 post
2. Divide this perimeter by the length of 9ne block
60.00= 150 pieces 2.60

12.00
.40
3. Divide the height of the wall by the height of one block . x x

2.60 = 13 layers PLAN
.40
.20 .60
Section X-X
4. Multiply 2 and 3: 150 x 13 = 1,950 pieces.
FIGURE 2-6 CHB FENCE
SOLUTION - 2 ( By the Area Method) ' ILLUSTRATION 2-3

1. Find the area of the wall.
From Figure 2-5, using class B mixture find the nunioer of:
A = 2.60 x 60.00 m. = 156 Square meters.
a) 10 x 20 x 40 em. concrete hollow bloCKS
44
45
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION' ESTIMATE MASONRY
b) Cement and sand. Volume= :rhickn~s J: Width J: Lerigth

c) Concrete for the posts and footings.
V =,.15 x .60 x .60 .
. V= .054 cu. m..·
SOLUTION - 1 (~indg the eBB)
.20 m. IC .20 m.
1. Find the' per:imeterof the iNfolL " .60m.
p' = 20 + 2Q + 12 + 8 "
P = 60.00 meters
2. ' Find the sp~e Itmgth occupied by the posts

.15
.60 .60
Along 20 m. ( .20 x 6) 2 ;z 2.40
Along 12 m. (.20 x4) '2 = 1.60 ,ELEVATION PLAN
Total space occupied by posts, = 4.00 FIGURE 2-8 POST AND FOOTING '
3. Subtract: 60.00 m. - 4.00 m. 2: Find the volume of 16 footings

= 56.00 m. net length for CHB, V =( .054 x 16) = .864 cu. m.
5. Multiply by th~ hetght of fence to get the Net ~rea. 3. Find the volume of 16 concrete posts
Net Area = 56.00 x 2.60 ht. .V = (.20 x .20 x 2.60 x, 16) = 1.67 cu. m.
A '= 145.6 square meterS
4. Total volume of concrete P.OSts and its footing:
6. Multiply by 12.5 to get the total number of concrete hol- Add results of step 2 and 3: _
low blocks required. '
W; .864 + 1.67 = 2.53 cu. m .
.145.6 x 12.5 = 1,820 pieCes.
5. Re(er to Table 1-2. Using class -B" concrete under col-
7. Comparing this 'resuit to that of illustration 2-2, with 1,950 umn 40 kg. cement, multiply: " .. ,
pieces hollow blocks, there is a material difference 01'130
pieces because we subtracted the space occupied by the Cement: 2.53 x 7.5 19.0 bags=
concrete posts. ' Sand: 2.53 1x .50 =
1.26 cu. m.
Gravel: 2.53 x 1.0 = 2.53 cu. m.
SOLUTION-'2 (Concrete Posts and its.Footing) .. Note:
1. Find the volume of one concrete footing slab. Concrete was thorpughly discussed in Chapter - 1
47
46
1
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE MASONRY
ILLUSTRATION 2-4 7. Find the CHB at Area C: 5.00 = 12.50

.40
From the following Figure, determine the number of 15 x 20
x 40 cm. CHB required to construct the building firewall. 8.' Height of C divided by height of one block
1.90 = 9.50
~.o
.20
,,:
3.00
, 9. Multiply (7) and (8) 12.50 x 9.50 = 118.75 pieces
:
I 4.50
B 6.90 :, Add Total CHB for Area A, Band C.
,, 5.00
,!
3.00 15 X 20 X 40 CHB Firewall
A c 170 + 603.75 + 118.75 = 893 pieces
:, 1.50
7.00 ,
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ,
____t ____________ _ . .40
Comment:
ELEVATION
Take note that in the preceding example solution, fundamen-
FIGURE 2-7 15 CHB FIREWALL
tal methods of determining the number of blocks were used.
The methods had undergone a very long process of finding the
SGl..,UTJON (By Dired Counting) quantity by area one at a time. The process must be simplified
with the aid of Table 2-2, presented as follows:
1. Find the CHB at Area A : 4.00 = .10 pieces
.40
SOLUTION - 2 ( By the Area Method)
2. Height of wall A divided by heigl l~ of ol)e block
1. Find the Area of A: 3.40 x 4.00 = 13.60 sq. m.
3.19. .- 17 )ieces
.20 2. Find the Area of B: 7.00 x '6.90 = 48.30 sq. m .
3. Multiply: (1) and (2) : 10 x 17 = 170 pieces 3. Find the Area of C: 5.00 x 1.90 = 9.50·S9. m.
Total Area - - - - - - - - 71.40 sq. m.
4. Find the CHB at Area B : 7.00 = 17.5
.40 4. Refer Jo Table 2-2. Along 15 x 20 x 40 CHB under column
number per square meter; multiply:
5. Average Heil1ht of Area B divided by .20 ht. of one block
. 6.90 = 34.50 71.40 x 12.50 = ( 893 pieces .

.20
Reminder
6. Multiply (4) and (5): 17.5 x 34.50 = 603.75 pieces
Before estimating the quantity of concrete hollow blocks, be
48 49
I l,

I,
sure to verify the plan specially the clear height of the wall
which is very important in the process. The following questions
ILLUSTRATION 2-5
should be given due consideration for these might affect the
result of the estimate. Continuing the problem of Illustration 2-1 Figure 2-2, deter-
mine how many bags of cement and sand needed to install the
1. Does the elevation as indicated in the plan specify the 150 pieces 10 x 20 x 40 cm . CHBusing class "B" lJ1ortar.
height from the first floor to the s'econd floor line, or is it
from floor to ceiling? In either case, the depth of the There are three solutions offered in finding the cement mortar
beam has to be considered in the estimate, either added for cencrete hollow blocks installation.
or subtracted.
1. By volume method.
2. Have you considered the CHB to be installed from the 2. By the Area Method .
underground foundation to the floor line? This particular 3. Per Hundred Block method.
portion of the wall is often overlook in the process of es-
timating especially when there is no detailed plan or
cross section detail. Don't ever commit the same mis- SOLUTION -1 (By Volume Method)
take experienced by most estimators ,
1 . Determine the volume of mortar in between the layer of
3. See to it that the concrete hollow blocks to be installed the blocks, adopting the 12 mm ( W) or .012 meters uni-
are uniform in sizes and in thickness. Have it ordered form thickness of the mortar.
from one manufacturer or supplier only. Installing differ-
ent sizes of CHB means additional expenses for cement Volume = Thickness x Width of CHB x Length
plaster and labor. If several suppliers cannot be
avoided, have their respective blocks installed in a par- V =
.012 x .10 x 4.00 m.
ticular phase of work. - V = .0048 cubic meter
2-2 ESTIMATING CEMENT MORTAR 2. Take note that 3.00 meters high wall divided by .20 m.
height of one block is = 15 layers. Thus, multiply:
After knowing the number of blocks needed for a particular V = 15 layers x .0048
masonry work, the next step is to find its work partner called
cement mortar. Cement mortar is a mixture of cement, sand
V = .072 cu . m.
and water. It is used as bonding materials in installing masonry
This is the total volume of the mortar in between the 15
blocks and other various plastering work. In estimating yement
layers of concrete hollow blocks.
mortar, one has to consider the following items.
a. The mortar to be used in between the layer of CHB .

3. Aside from the cement mortar used in between block
layers, there are 4 hollow cores or cells per block to be
b. The mortar filler for the hollow core or cell of the blocks.
filled up with mortar. Find the volume per block.
This filler could be pure mortar or mortar with gravel for
economy. '
c. Fine screened sand for plastering.
Volume = .05 x .075 x .20 x 4 cores
V = .003 cu . m.
5,0
51
I '!
!
I
MASONRY
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE ·
Area: (3.00 x 4.00) =. 12 square meters.
2. Refer to Table 2-2. Along 10 x 20 x 40 CHB under

.2Om class aB" mixture; multiply:
Cement: 12 x .522 = 6.26 bags
.075m.
Sand : 12 x .0435 = .522 cu. m .
TABLE 2-2 QUANTITY OF CEMENT AND SAND FOR CHB MORTAR

FIGURE 2- 8 HOLLOW CELL OF 4 x 8 x 16 CHB
PER SQUARE METER
--
4. Find the total volume of hollow core for the 150 CHB. Bags Cement
MIxture
V = 150 x .003 = .45 cu. m. Sizeof CHB
in em.
Number Sand
per sq. m A B C 0 cu. m
5. Total volume; add the results of step 2 and step 4. 10 x 20 x40 12.5 .792 .522 .394 .328 .0435
Total Vol~me: .072 + .45 = .522 cu. m. 15x20x40 12.5 1.526 1.018 .763 .633 .0844
20 x 20 X 40 12.5 2.260 1.500 1.125 .938 .1250
6. Refer to Table 2-1 . Using class "B" mixture, multiply:
-
Cement: .522 x 12.0 6.26 bags = SOLUTION - 3 (By the Hundred Block Method)
Sand: .522 x 1.0 = .522
TABLE 2-1 QUANTITY OF CEMENT AND SAND FOR MORTAR

The Hundred Block Method is the third solution offered for a
AND PLASTER IN CUBIC METER more simpler approach with the aid of Table 2-3 .
Class Proportion Cement in BallS Sand 1. Find the number of concrete hollow blocks.
Mixture 40 kg. 50 kg . cu. m.
A 1 : 2
Area: - 3.00 x 4.00 =12 sq. m.
18.0 14.5 1.0
B 1 ; 3 12.0 9.5 1.0
12 sq. m. x 12.5 = 150 pieces CHB
C 1 : 4 9.0 7.0 1.0
b 1 : 5 7.5 6.0 1.0 2. Convert to unit of 100: 150 = 1.5
.. 100
Another way of finding the mortar for block laying is by the 3. Refer to Table 2-3. Ulfiderclass 8B" mixture for a
Area Method with the aid of Table 2-2. 10 x 20 x 40 CHB, multiply:
SOLUTION - 2 ( By the Area Method) Cement: 1.5 x 4.176 = 6.26 bags

Sand: 1..5 .x ,346 = .522 cu. m.
1. Find the area of the Wall.
53
52
SIMPLIFIED tONSTRUCTIQN ESTIMATE MASONRY
TABLE 2-3 QUANTITY OF CEMENT AND SAND PER ONE 3. Find the cement and sand. Refer again to Table 2-2, us-
HUNDRED BLOCKS
ing class B ,mortar; Multiply:
Cement in Bags 40 kg . .
Size of CHB .
Mixture Sand Cement: 156 x .522 = 81.43 say 82 bags
A B C 0 cu. m.
Sand: 156 x .0435 = 6.78 say 7 cu. m.
10 x 20 x 40 6.336 4.176 3.152 2.624 0.348 .'
4. Summary of the mat~rils:
15 X 20 x 40 12.150 8.104 6.072 5.064 0.675
20 X 20 x 40 1,950 pieces CHB
18.072 12.000 9..000 7.504 1.000
82 bags cement
7 cubic meters sand.
Comment:
o~paringC the answers of the three methods in finding the Take note that the above materials found does not include
the cement, sand and gravel for the footing. For this item, refer
matenals for ~emnt mortar, the results are practically the
same. The estimator now has the choice which method to use to Chapter 1 where it was thoroughly discussed.
but before using Table 2-2 and 2-3, know first the kind of mix~
ture and the size of CHB to .be used because this is where most 2-3 CEMENT MORTAR FOR PLASTERING
errors are being committed.
Aside from the cement mortar for block laying, plastering is
ILLUSTRATION 2-6 another item to consider. Most estimators however, make their
estimate of mortar for block laying and plasteri~g through sim-
. Going. back to the problem of Illustration 2-2, Figure 2-4, find ple guessing and calculation, assuming the quantity of cement
the quantity of hollow blocks, cement and sa'nd, for mortar using and sand without the pain of computation. The reason is simple,
the area method of estimating . they are just in a hurry an.d has no time to do it. And for this rea-
~ons, we offer the following methods accompanied by a simpli-
SOLUTION: fied tables of equivalent values.
1. Find the area of the wall. Estimating the cement mortar for plasterjng can be done by:
o Area = Perimeter x Height
1. The Yolume Method and
A = 60.00 m. x 2.60 m. 2. . The Area Method
A = 156 square meters
,
ILLUSTRATION 2-7 f
2. Find the number of CHB. Refer to Table 2-2, under col-
umnnumber per sq. m. multiply:' . Continuing the problem of Illustration 2-1, find the cem~nt
and sand necessary to plaster two sides of the 3.00 x 4.00 me-
156 x 12.5· = 1,950 pieces terswall.
54
55
SIMPLIFIEDCQNSTRUCTION ESTIMATE
MASONRY
....'OLUTION (By Volume Method)
2. Solve for the cement and sand. Refer to Table 2-4. Under
1. Find the two sides area of the wall. 16 mm thick plaster class "8" mixture, multiply:
A = 3.00 x 4.0 2 sides Cement : 24 x .192 = 4.6 say 5 bags

A = 24 sq. m.
! V
Sand: 24 x .016 = .384 cu. m.
2. Assuming that the plaster is 16 mm (.016 m.) average Comparing the answers of the two methods, the results are
thickness, determine the volume of the plaster. practically the same. As to what method to use depends on
your choice and convenience.
V = 24 sq. m. x .016
V =.384 cu. m . . ILLUSTRATION 2-8
3. Solve for the cement and sand. Refer to Table 2-1. Us- From the following Figure 2-9, list down the cement and .
ing 40 kg. cement class "8" mixture; multiply:
sand necessary to plaster the two faces of the fence at an av-
. erage thickness of 20 mm. class "cn mixture.
Cement: .384 x 12.0 = 4.6 say 5 bags.
Sand: .384 x 1.0 = ,384 say fine sand.
TABLE 2-4 QUANTITYOF CEMENT AND SAND FOR PLASTER
PER SQUARE METER AREA
Cement in Bags
Thickness of Plaster
Mixture
Class 8 mm 12mm 16 mm 20 mm 25mm
A .144 .216 .288 .360 ' .450
B .096 .144 .192 .240 .300
C .072 .108 .144 .180 .225 FIGURE 2-9 PLASTERING
D .060 .090 .120 .150 .188
Sand .008 .012 .016 .020 .025 SOLUTION (By the Area Method)
1. Find the surface area of the fence.
SOLUTION - 2 (By Area Method using Table 2-4)
Area = Perimeter X' Height x 2 faces
1. Find the area of the wall ( two sides) A = 55 m . x 2.70 m. ·x 2 faces
A =297 sq. m.
Area = 3.00 x 4.00 x 2 sides
A = 24 sq. m. 2. Solve for the area of the front and the top surface of the
fence .
56
57
SIMPLIFIED C6NSTRUCTION ESTIMATE MASONRY
A .= .15 x (2.70+2.70+ 40.00 + 15.00) Gross Area = (3.50 x 40.00) = 140 sq. m.
A = 9,06·sq. m.
2. Subtract the area occupied by the posts.
3. Total Area to be plastered add 1 and 2
Net Area = 140 sq. m. - ( .25 x 3.50 ht. x 11 posts.)
Tota l Area = 297 + 9.06 = 306.06 sq. m.
A = (140 - 9.625) = 130.4 sq. m.
4. Find the cement and sand. Refer to Table 2-4. Under
3. Find the number of CHB. Refer to Table 2-2, multiply:
20 mm thick along class "C" mixture; multiply:
Cement: 306.06 x .180 = 55 bags

130.4 sq. m. x 12.5 = 1,630 pieces.
Sand: 306.06 x .020 = 6.1 cu. m: 4. Find the cement mortar. Refer to Table 2-2. Using class
"B" mixture for a 15 x 20 x 40 CHB; multiply:
ILLUSTRATION 2-9
Cement: 130.4 x 1.018 = 132.75 bags
Sand : . 130.4 x .0844 = 11.0 cu. m . .
The owner of a commercial lot wants to fence the frontage of
his lot with 15 x 20 x 40 cm. concrete hollow blocks. The fence 5. Solve for the cement plaster. Refer to Table 2-4. Using
is 3.50 meters high and 40 meters long provided with a 25 x 25 16 mm thick plaster, class "B". mixture, multiply:
cm . reinforced concrete posts spaced at 4.00 meters distance.
Using class B mixture list down the materials required . 130.4 sq. m. x 2 sides = 261 sq . m.
Cement : 261 x .192 = 50 bags
Sand : 261 x .016 = 4.2 cu. m.
Summary of the Materials

40.00 m.
ELEVATION 1,630 pes. '5 x 20 x 40 clJl. CHB

25 183 bags cement .
.15
DEI 16 cu. m. sand
Concrete Post Comment:

3.50m . 3.50m.
.15 m. CHB 1. Take note that in finding the wall area, the height should
be measured from the top of the fence down to the
foundation line not just to the floor line only. '
2. In the preceding ex~mp . le, two sides of the wall werf!
FIGURE 2-10 considered for plast'erl(lg. The area occupied by the
posts was subtracted from the gross wall ·area. For
SOLUTION practical purposes it should not be subtracted because
by computing back to determine its area and the plaster
1. Solve for the gross area of the fence. required is considerably a waste of time.
58 59
SIMPLIFIED' C'oNSTRUCTION ESTIMATE MASONRY
3. The area to be plastered is 140 x 2 sides or 280 square ILLUSTRATION 2-10

meters including the space occupied by the posts.
Continuing the problem of Illustration 2-9, Figure 2-10, if the
2-4 CONCRETE HOLLOW BLOCK FOOTING wall footing is 15 centimeters thick and 50 centimeters wide,
determine the quantity of cement, sand and gravel necessary
Concrete hollow block wall, is supported by a continuous using class MA" concrete.
wall .footing of various thickness and width, depending upon the
~H:=37m_.
size of the blocks and the load it has to carry or. as indicated in
the plan. Table 2-5 was prepared for easy reference in estimat-
ing the materials for concrete hollow blocks footing.
.15
TABLE 2-5 QUANTITY OF CEMENT, SAND AND GRAVEL FOR
CHB FOOTING PER METER LENGTH .50
Dimension Cement in Bags AQ~regats FIGURE 2·12 CHB FOOTING

Centimeters Class Mixture Sand Gravel
T x W A B , C cu. m. cu. m SOLUTION -1 (By Volume Method)
10 x 30 ,270 .225 .180 .015 .030 1. Find .the volume of the wall footing. Length minus the
10 x 35 .315 .263 .210 .018 .035 space occupied by the posts to get the net length.
~o x 40 .360 .300 .240 .020 .040
x 50
10 .450 .375 .300 .025
40.00 m. - (.25 x 11 posts)
.050
15 x 40
40.00 - 2.75 = 37.25 m. net length
.540
15 x 45 .612
.450
.510
.360
.048
.030 .060
Volume =
.15 x .50 x 37.25 m. 2.79 cu. m. =
.034 .068
15 )( 50 .675 .563 .550 .038 .076 2. Refer to Table 1-2. Using class "A" concrete; multiply:
15 x 60 .810 .675 .540 .045' .090
Cement: 2.79 x 9.0 25 bags =
Sand: 2.79 x .50 = 1.4 cu. m.
Gravel: 2 ..79 x 1.0 = 2.8 cu. m.
SOLUTION - 2 ( By the Linear Meter Method)

CHB
1. Solve for the Net Le~gth of the CHB wall.
T Net length = 40.00 m. - (.25 x 11 posts) = 37.25 r'n.

w ,
2. Refer to Table 2-5. Along 15 x 50 cm. footing dimension
FIGURE ~·1 CROSS SECTION OF CHB FOOTING class "Aft mixture, multiply:
60
61
-......... ,
j !I
r
Cement: 37.25 x .675 = 25.14 bags 3. Find the net length of CHB wall
Sand: 37.25 x .038 1.42 cu. m. =
Gravel: 37.25 x .076 = 2.83 cu. m. L = 95.00 - 4.00 = 91.00 m.
4. Find the net area of the CHB wall fence.
ILLUSTRATION 2-11
Area = 91.00 x 2.5 m. ht. = 228 sq. m.
From the following figure, prepare the bill of materials using
class "B" mixture for concrete and mortar. 5. Find the number of 10 cm. CHB. Refer to Table 2-2,
multiply:
25.00 M. .20 228 x 12.5 = 2,850 pieces
.20 m@1 . 10cm. CHB
· i ~l
B. Cement Mortar for Block Laying
•
. · 25.00
3.00
••••••. 2.50
1. Find the cement and sand for block laying. Refer to
Table 2-2. Using class "B" mixture, multiply:
• Grd.line
~ It 1 · .15 IM1[@• • ;:.i!I~1

."
~o
2. Cement: 228 x .522 = 119 bag
Sand : 228 x .0435 =
9.92 say 10 cu. m .
T, r .........
...
5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00 .60 .40 C. Cement Mortar fot Plastering
PLAN POST CHB
1. If two sides of the wall will be plastered, then:
FIGURE 2-13
Area = 95.00 m. x 2.00 m. ht. x 2 sides
SOLUTION
A =
380 sq. m. ( including the posts)
Take note that the height of the wall is only 2.00 meters be-
A. Solving for CHB cause we do not plaster the wall below the ground line.
. 1. Find the Perimeter of the hollow block ,fence. 2. For plastering, refer to Table 2-4 .•Using 16 mm thick
plaster class "B" mixture; multiply:
P = 3 ( 25.00 ) + 4( 5.00 )
P = 95.00 meters. Cement: 380 x .192 = 73 bags
Sand: 380 x (.016 = 6.1 cu. m.
2. Subtract the length occupied by the posts.
D. Solving for Concrete Post and Footing
Length = .20 width x 20 posts (see' figure)
1. Materials for ~B
L = 4.00 meters footing. The net length of the CHB
62 63
•
wall is 91.00 meterS. Refer to Table 2-5. Using a 10 x 40

footing class" S" mixture; multiply:
Cement: 91.00 x .300 = 27.3 say 28 bags 2.00

Sand: 91.00 x .020 =1.8 say 2.0 cu. m.
Gravel: 91.00 x .040 =3.64 say 4.0 cu. m.
2. Find the volume of the concrete posts. 3.00

4.00
Volume = 20 posts x (.20 x .20) x 3.00 m ..ht.

V =
2.4 cu. m.
4.50
3. Find the volume of the footing. 15x20x40CHB
Plastered on two sides 3.00
V = ,20 footings x (.15 x .60 x .60 )
V = 1.08 cu. m.
20,00
4. Total Volume of posts and footing. Add step 2 and 3
FIGURE 2·14 FIRE WALL
V = 2.4 + 1.08 = 3.48 cu. m.
5. Refer to Table 1-2. Using class US" mixture; multiply:
Cement: 3.48 x 7.5 = 26.0 bags

Sand: 3.48 x .50 = 1.74 cu. m.
Gravel: 3.48 x 1.0 = 3.48 Clh m.
6. Summary:
2,850 pieces 10 x 20 x 40 cm. CHS 2.00

246 bags cement
20 cubic meter sand
7.5 cubic meter gravel
3.00
Problem Exercise 1,OOI+-..Ji;W;i--
1. From the following figures, find the following materia'is re-

quired for its construction. ELEVATION
a) 15 x 20 x 40 cm. concrete. hollow blocks.
b) Cement, and sand for mortar and plastering. FIGURE 2-15
64
65
2-5 OTHER TYPES OF CONCRETE BLOCKS

The standard common types of concrete hollow blocks are
those with three hollow cores as explaind ~ in Section 2-1. There 19 em 19
are however various type of blocks especially designed for ar-
chitectural and structural purposes such as; the stretcher,block,
the L-comer block, the single end block, the half block and the
beam block.
The purpose of making these types of blocks is to create a

wider core to accommodate concrete and steel reinforcement. 2 Core Stretcher Block
2 Core L- Corner Block
The 'estimating method is similar with the standard type of
blocks using the constant value of 12.5 pieces per square meter
and 25 pieces for the half block although this type is usually
determined by direct counting. 19cm.
19
In estimating the quantity of concrete hollow blocks,' what is
considered is the side portion of the block. The thickness is only
used in computing the cement mortar for block laying. ' 2 Core Single End
Block
The introduction of these special types of concrete hollow IHalf Block

blocks facilitated the use of posts and beams for housing pro-
jects avoiding the much used of form lumber. The wall is de-
signed as a continuous interlocking support of the roof framing.
Comer blocks combined with stretcher blocKs are used on cor-
ners provided with reinforcement instead of reinforced concrete
post. With this method, the costs of forms and labor were felt as
a substantial savings.
Half Block
In block laying work, concrete being a mixture of cement,
sand and gravel should be used to fill the hollow core of the
blocks for economical reasons. If cement mortar will be used to
fill the core, cost will be substantially high because of the.higher 19cm
cement content in proportion with sand without gravel.
( 1gem
Remember that cost is the primary consideration in any type
of construction, and to use pure mortar to fill the hollow core of
the blocks is costlier than to use a reinforced concrete walls
even if forms are used. One can prove this by applying the prin- Single End Block
ciples as explained in chapter-1 FIGURE 2-16 'S PECIAL TYPES OF CHB
66 67
MASONRY
SIMPLIFIED CO~STRUIN ESTIMATE
TABLE 2~ QUANTITY OF CEMENT, SAND AND GRAVEL PER BLOCK SOLUTION

40 kg. Cell)ent in bag 1. Itemized the blocks according to its category and indicate
Size in Class Mixture the number of pieces.
Centimeters B C Sand Gravel 1,500 pieces
2-core 15 cm. stretcher bloCk
Stretcher Block Single end block 100
2- core 20 cm. .0920 .0720 .0067 .0085 120
Half block
2- core 15 cm. .0623 .0488 .0030 . .0045 L-Corner Block 200
Beam .Block 80
L - Corner Block
2- core ' 20 cm. .0867 .0687 .0060 .0095 2. Refer to Table 2-6. Under column class "S" mdi~ure, m ul~i
2- core 15 cm. .0590 .0467 .0041 .0070 ply the number of blocks to each correspon ' mg. va lue m
the table to get the cement, sand and gravel reqUired.
Single End Block
2- ·core 20 cm. .0885 .0698 .0063 .0090
2- core 15 cm. .0612 .0482 .0044 .0075 a.) 1,500 ~ Stretcher Blocks
.0035 .0055
2- core 10 cm. .0420 .0315
Cement: 1,500 x .0623 = 93.45 bags
Half Block Sand: 1,500 x .0030 = 4.50 cu . m.
20 x 20 cm. .0400 .0320 .0030 · .0050 Gravel: 1,500 x .0045 = 6.75 cu. m.
15x15cm. .0270 .0215 .0020 .0035
b.) 100 - Single End Block
Beam Block A B
2- core 20 cm. .0878 .0732 .0050 .0098 Cement : 100 x .0612 = 6.12 bags
2- core 15 cm. .0585 .0488 .0040 .0070 Sand: 100 x .0044 = 0.45 cu. m.
Gravel : 100 x .0075 = 0.75 cu. m.
The mortar for block laying is a mixture of cement and sand c.) 129 - Half Biock
laid in between the layer of the blocks at ap~oximtely Y:z of an
inch or 12 mm as bonding materials . The hollow core is filled Cement : 120 x .0270 = 3.24 bags
with concrete; a mixture of mortar and grav~1. And to fill the core Sand: 120 x ,.0020 = 0.24 cU.m .
with pure mortar alone is a very costly cOl]struction undertaking Gravel: 120 x .0035 = 0.42 cu. m.
to the /advantage of cement manufacturer at the expense of the

contractor. How to use the table, the fol,lowing example is pre- d.) 200 - L Corner Block
sented. Cement: 200 x .0590 = 11.80 bags
Sand: 200 x .0041 = 1.40 cu.
0.82 m.
ILLUSTRATION 2-12 Gravel: 200 x .0070
I
= cu. m.
A masonry wall 15 cm. thick requires 1,500 pieces of 2-core e.) 80 - Beam Block
stretcher blocks, 100 pieces single end block, 120 half block, Cement: 80 x .0488 = 3.90 bags
200 carner blocks and 80 pieces beam block. Find the cement
Sand: 80 x .0040 = 0.56 cu
0.32 m.
sand and gravel using class, "S" mortar mixture.

Gravel: 80 x ·.0070 = cum.
69
68
~
I
MASON~Y
3. Summary of the Materials
1,500 stretcher blocks 100 single end block

120 half block 200 L-corner block
11 9 bags cement ITALIAN
80 beam block
6.33 CU. m.sand '1. 88 cu. m. gravel
55x215x125mm
2-6 DECORATIVE BLOCKS

Decorative hollow blocks are manufactured from either ce-
ment mortar or clay. These types of construction materials had '
been widely used for ventilation and decorative purposes.
BOLIVIAN
100 x 180 x 180 mm
TABLE 2-7 QUANTITY OF CECORATIVE BLOCKS CEMENT
AND SAND PER 100 BLOCKS.
o
Cement in 8ag at 40 kg.
Class Mixture Sand per
Size in Number
A 8 100 blocks .
cm. per sq. m.
.180 .120 .010
5 x 10 200
.270 .180 .015
5 x 15 133 100 x 140 x 240 mm
.360 .240 .020 LUZ
100
5 x
5 x
10 x
20
25
20
80
50
.450
.720
.300
.480
.025
.040 (lQ,eJ ~Ol - qotl
[)Q<I
10 x 25 40
33
.900
1.080
.600.
.720
.050
.060 ~ ~Oq
Cot! t?otJ
10 x 30 Q;V'CJ, (lOll ql:7tJ
[)Q<l COO Doa
t:1atl l10tl dAti
TABLE 2.t1 QUANTITY OF CEMENT AND SAND FOR VARIOUS TYPES
100 x 250 x 250 mm
OF BRICKS PER 100 BLOCKS CORINTHIAN
Cement in 8ag 40kg Sand per.

Size in 100
Number Mixture Class
Centimeters llIocks
per sq. m. A 8
T H L
.346 .230 .019
6 x 12 x 19 38.5
.612 .408 .034
1~4 x 19 33.3
.684 .456 . .038
1 x14x .23 27.8 ROMAN 100 x 230 x 250 mm
.882 .588 .049
JO x 24 x 24 16.0
.972 .648 .054
10 x 14 x 39 16.7 FIGURE 2-17 DECORATIVE BLOCKS
1.062 .708 .059
10x 19 x 39 12.5
71
70 '.
MASONR.Y
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION
, '
ESTIMATE
2-', .~DOBE STONE
Adobe Stone is commonly used for fencing material., as
substitute to concrete 'hollow blocks for economic reasons.
Lately however, the used of adobe stone was no longer limited
to the ordinary zocalo and fencing work but also extensiv.!ili'
used as finishing and decorative materia,ls for exterior and inte-
JOSEPHIN e rior of buildings and other related structures.
The use of adobe stone fOl' fences, buttresses, cross- foot-

ings, and stairs minimizes the use of mortar filler unlike in work-
ing with concrete hollow blocks. Plastering is sometimes not
applied speCially when the design calls for exposure of the
natural texture of the stone.
ASG 100 l< 25O ,x 250 mm
c.V'.b 0.q..£l 0.o.ll

C76"'C C"6"C C7A-,:]
~".D o.~ Co."t.D
'.:I"A~ D"G'g O'A~
c.• .c a.o.c QO,c

1:7.o."C O'A'C c:rA~
~O'.a ~. a.O.cl
~6"C O'AQ C7"'g
AUM 100 x 250 x 250 mm
EGYPTIAN 100 x 250 x 250 mm
rm
!;JEiI.~ " :'~;l K ~ -,:,.;, ,
na Coa~M , lr ][:.;, 1\,';'.;.':' ll ' , j
[)V(] D ~ DV(]
DOC cCia CClD
1"001 DOD DQD
D<JDODa
aOc C{SD COD
FIGURE 2-19 ADOBE STONt:
100 x 250 )( 250 mm

Three tables were prepared to simplify the process of obtain-
PERSIAN
ing the quantity of adobe stone and cement mortar for ston-:;
laying and plastering.
FIGURE 2-18 DECORATIVE BLOCKS
73
72 -.
i
SIMPLIFIED ,CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE MASONRY
TABLE 2-9 QUANTITY OF CEMENT AND SAND FOR ADOBE

MORTAR PER SQUARE METER.
40 kg. Cement in Bags

Commercial 1\1.0. per Class of Mixture Sand
Size in cm. sq. m. B C 0 cu . m.
15x15x45 14.8 .173 .130 .108 ,015

15 x 20 x 45 11.0 .132 .099 .083 .01 1
15 x 30 x 30 11.0 .088 .066 .055 .007
Buttress,- 150
15 x 30 x 40 8.3 .089 .067 ,056 .008
15 x 30 x 45 7.4 .091 .068 .057 .008
Ground line
50
* Mortar at an average thickness of 16 mm.
15
45
TABLE 2-10 QUANTITY OF ADOBE STONE CEMENT AND SAND SECllON
FOR BUTRESSES AND FOOTINGS
,
FIGURE 2-20 ADOBE FENCE
Buttress and FootinQ Cement' per Meter Ht.
Sand
Buttress
Cross
No.
of
Number
of stone
Class of MixturE!
Length = 15.00 - (.30 x 3 posts)
Section course per. M. ht. A B C cu. m. ( 2 post plus .the two 1/2 side posts =3)
30x45
45x45
2 12
18
.233
.350
.156
.233
.117
.175
.013
.019
L = 14.10 meters
3
45x60 4 24 ' .468 .312 .234 .026
2. Solve ·for the net area of the wall.
45 x75 5 30 .583 .389 .292 .032
45x95 6 36 .702 .46a .351 .039
Area =
14.1U x 2.00 m.
A = 28.20 sq. m:
* Mortar at an average thickness of 16 mm,
3. Refer to Table 2-9. USing a 15 x 15 x 45 cm. adobe
ILLUSTRATION 2-13 stone, multiply:
From Figure 2-20, find the quantity of adobe stone, cement 28.20 x 14.8 = 418 pieces
and sand using class "B" mortar.
B. Solving for Buttresses
SOLUTION 1. Find the total length of the post
A. Solving for Adobe Stone Wall ~O m. x 4 posts = 8.00 meters
1. Determine the length of the fen,ce minus the space oc-
cupied by the buttresses. 2. Refer to Table 2-10. Using a 30 x 45 buttress, multiply:
75
74
T
8.00 x 12 stone per meter height = 96 pieces. 3. Mortar for wall footing = 82 pieces. Refer t6 Table
2-10, using class ."B" mixture; multiply:
3. For a 45 x 60 buttress footing refer to Table 2-10, the
number of course ,is 4. Multiply: ·Cement : . 82 x .027 =
2.2 bags
Sand: 82 x .0023 = .19 cu. m.
4 x 4 footings = 16 pieces
TABU: 2-11 QUANTITY OF CEMENT AND SAND FOR PLASTERING
4. Add the results of 2 and 3. ADOBE STONE PER SQUARE METEr.:,. *
96 + 16 = 112 pieces Side

Cement in Bag 40 kg.
Class of Mixture Sand
B C 0 cu . m. i
C. Solving fo[ Wall Footing One Face .240 .180 .150 .020
1 . Length of the fence minus the space occupied by the Two Faces .480 .360 .300 .040
buttress footing. * Cement Plaster at an average thickness of 20 mm
15.00 m. - (.45 x 3) = 13.65 m. D. Solving for Cement Plaster

3 is the 2 center posts plus the two 1/2 at the sides.
1. Find the total surface area of the wa ll and the but-
tresses to be plastered. (one face)
2. Multiply by 6 stones ' per meter length. The adobe
stones are laid crosswise the wall, see figure 2-19. Length = 15.00 + 2 (.15) + (.15 x 6) = 16.2 m.
Area = 16.2 x 1.50 ht. = 24.3 sq . m.
13.65 m. x 6 = 82 pieces.
2. The height is only 1.50 because we do not plaster th~
D. Solving for the Cement Mortar wall below the ground line. Refer to.Table 2-1 1. Using
class "B" mixture, multiply: .
1. The area of the fence is 28.20. Refer to Table 2-9. Us- Cement : 24.3 x .240 = 5.83 say 6 bags
ing class "B" mortar, multiply:
Sand: 24.3 x .020 = .49 cu. m.
Cement: 28.20 x .281 =
8.0 bags 3. This is for one side plaster only. Tf two sides will be
Sand: 28;20 x .024 = .68 cu. m.
plastered, double the quantity .
. 2. For buttresses and footing = 112 pieces stone. Refer Summary of the Materials
to Table 2-10. Along 30 x 45 buttress class "B" mixture
multiply:
612 pieces. 15 x 15 x 45 cm. adobe stone
20 bags Portland cement
Cement: 112 x .021 = 3.0 bags
2.0 cubic meters sand
Sane': 11.2 x .0023 = .26 cu. m. . 't
77
76
I
SIMPLIFIED C:0NSTRUCTION ESTIMATE MASONRY l

I
Problem Exercise 2-8 RETAINING WALL
From the following figure; find the number of 15 x 20 x 45 The practical use of gravity retaining wall is controlled by
cm. adobe stone, the cement and sand required to construct height limitations. Indeed, the required wall cross section in-
the fence using (a) Class A mixture; (b) Class C mixture. The creases with heights due to the effect of the triangular soil pres-
plan specify plastering both sides of the wall using class 8 mix- sure distributed behind the retaining wall.
ture.
If the ground water level rises into the backfill behind a re-
taining wall due to either changing ground water condition or
percolating water surface, the lateral pressure against the wall
is also changed. The combined effect of soil and water pressure
causes overturning moments and sliding forces. This is greater
than the condition where there is 'no water.
~ .
To avoid the rise of water that is building up behind the re-

-f- FI-3.50 m. taining wall, a weep hole or collector drainage system or both
I···. are provided as part of the design construction. Weep holes
should be at least 3 inches in diameter provided with a granular
,. 15 x 20X :~5 ; St6n~1 soil filter fabric at the wall to prevent backfill erosion. The hori-
90 zontal spacing ranges from 120 to 300 centimeters apart.
SECTION For taller walls, two or more rows of weep noles may be pro-
vided with a typical vertical spacing of 150 centimeters.
. A Satisfactory Retaining Wall Design must Satisfy

;
4.00
iii
6.00
,
... I 6.00
~
I
1.
the Following Criteria
The base and stem of the retaining wall must be capa-

ble of resisting the internal shear and bending moments
- I' ••
. developing as a result of soil and other loadings;
2. The wall must be safe against overturning.
4 ('0 3. The wall structure must be safe against sliding
-, -
I
I
4. The bearing capacity of the foundation material support-
I II
• ing the wall must not be exceeded .
f
4.00 4.00 I 4.00
!
2-9 RIP-RAP AND GROUTED RIP-RAP
PLAN
Rip-Rap is either with or without grout, with or without filter
FIGURE 2-21 backing. ,Stones intended for rip-raping shall consist of rocks
78 79
SIMPLIFIED CO~STRUIN ESTIMATE MASONRY
which are nearly rectangular in section as possible. The stone Excavation and Placing
shall be tough, durable and dense. It shall be resistance to the
action of air and water and suitable in all aspects for the pur- The bed for 'rip-rap is excavated dow!' tf' t~ e required depth
pose intended. Adobe stone shall not be used unless specified. and properly compacted, trimmed and shaped. The rip-rap
foundation is laid below the depth of the scour filling the toe
trench wi~h :;lOAs of the same class as specified.
'::nch stone is laid with its longest axis perpendicular to the

slope in c..lose contact with adjacent stone. The rip-rap is thor-
oughly rammed into place and the finished stones are laid to an
even tight surface. Intersections between stones are filled with
small broken fragments firmly rammed into place.
H The stones are placed by hand or individually laid by ma-

chine. Spaces between stones are then filled with cement mor-
30x30x30
tar sufficient enough to completely fill all the voids except the
Gravel backfill face surface of the stones left exposed.
1:4 Batter Cement grout is placed starting from the bottom to the top of
the surface and then swept with a stiff broom. After grouting, the
surface is cured like structural concrete for a period of at least 3
days after the installation.
Dry Rubble Cement Rubble TABLE 2-12 QUANTITY OF CEMENT AND SAND ON A STONE
RIP-RAP PER CUBIC METER
FIGURE 2-22 CROSS SECTIION OF RUBBLE RETAINING WALL
Cement in Bags
Stone Grout Mixture Sand
Class 0 Stone for Rip Raping
Class A B C cu. m.
Class A Stone ranging from 15 to 25 kilograms with at least Class - A 2.574 1.716 1.287 .143
50% of the stones weighing more than 20 kilograms Class - B 2.448 1.620 1.214 .135
Class - C 2.232 1.488 n16 .124
C I ~s B - Stone ranging from 30 to 70 kg. With at least 50% of Class - 0 1.944 1.296 0.972 .108
the stcnes weighing more than 50 kilograms.
Class C Stones ranging from 60 to 100 kg. With at least 50%

ILLUSTRATION 2-14
of the stones weighing nlOre lhem 80 kilograms.
Class 0 . Stones weighing from 100 kg. to 200 kg. withat least A stone rip-rap retaining wall 50 meters long as shown in
50% of the stones weiqhing more than 150 kgs. Figure 2-23 specify the use of Class B stone with class C grout
fO 81
SIMPLIFIEDCQNSTRUCTION ESTIMATE MASONRY
mixture. list down the materials required including the weep 4. 'For 2 layers weep hole, add 25 pieces 3- at 1.00 m.
hole drain pipe and the gravel backfill as granular soil filter.
.60 Total: 25 pes. 3" diameter at 1.50 m. long .

25 pes. 3" diameter at 1.00 m. long
5. Fin~ the volume of the granular soil (gravel) filter.
V = .30 x .30 x ,50.00 m.

V = 4.5 say 5 cubic ,efers
6. Summary ofthe materials
260 cubic meters Class. B stone
316 bags Portland cement
35 cubic meters sand
,5 cubic meters gravel
FIGURE 2-23
21 pieces 3" )( 3.00 m. PVc pipe
SOLUTION 7. For back filling, add 20% to volume for compaction.
1. Solve for the volume of the proposed riprap. 2-10 CONCRETE:RETAINING WALL
Volume = Width x Height x Length An .existing stable earth slope can experience significant
movement called slope failure or landslide due to changes in its
V1 = .60 x 4.00 m x 50 m. = 120 cu. m. natural condition or man-induced changes. There are instances
V2 = (1.40 x 4.00) x 50 m. = 140 cu. m. where the materials in cut banks slip.. down to tht: roadway or
canying portion of the shoulder of ~he road. This pattern of fail-
2
Total volume .. .. .. .... , .... = 260 cu. m. ure is common in fills or cut slopes of homogenous non-
granular materials.
2. Refer to Table 2-.12. Using Class B stone and Class C
grout mixture, multiply ILLUSTRATION 2-15
Cement: 260 x 1.214 =
315.64 say 316 bags.
A gravity wall 50 meters long has the following dimensions
Sand: 260 x .135 = 35.1 cubic meters
as shown in figure 2-24, list idown the materials required USing.
class A concrete. . '
3. Length of the riprap divided by the weep holes at 2.00
meters spacing distance;
SOLUTION
50.00 m. = 25 pieces 3" dia. pipe at 2.00 m. spacing
2.00 1. Find the volume of stem.
82
83
v = (.15 + .30);:c 4.00 x 50.00 = 90 cu. m. 25 pieces at .50 m. 2nd layer

25 pieces at .40 m. 3rd layer
7. Find the volume of Gravel Filter Filler:'
v := .30 x .30 x 50 m. x 3 layers = 13.5 cubic meters

r:=~I&ti1- .30 x .30 Gravel FlU
S. Find the volume of backfill materials.
H =4.00m. V '= .60 x 4.00 x 50.00 = 120 cubic meters
8. Add 20% for compaction; 120 + 24 =144 cu. m

Weep Hole 10. Summary of the Materials
1148 bags cement

64 cu. m. sand
1.50 128 cu. m. gravel
7 pes. 3" x 6.00 Pvc pipe
FIGURE 2-24 CROSS SECTION OF RETAINING WALL 14 cu. m. gravel
144 cu. m. back fill materials.
2. Find the volume of the footing..
V = .50 x 1.50 x 50.00 = 37.5 cu. m.

2-11 GABIONS AND MATTRESS
3. Total volume of 1 and 2. Gabions and Mattresses are used to give permanent protec-
tion and support to sea walls, river banks ~ , culverts, reservoirs,
V = 90 + 37.5 = 127.5 cubic meters road bridges and many .other structures in civil engineering
works. Gabions are box shaped containers made of tough
4. Refer to Table 1-2. Using class A mixture, multiply: woven hexagonal netting strengthened by selvedges of heavier
wires. To further strengthen the container, diaphragms are
Cement: 127.5 x 9.0 = 1,148 bags added to divide the gabion into 1 m compartments I
Sand: 127.5 x .50 = 64 cu. m.
Gravel: 127.5 x 1.0 = 128 cu. m. Recommended Uses
5. For Reinforcement, see plan and refer to Chapter-3 When filled with quarried stpne on site, Gabions and Mat-
tresses prove to be excellent materials for ccnstruction of
6. For Weep Hole pipe, divide length by 2.00 mete, _ retaining and anti-erosion structures. Major apli~ ~ tions include:
50.00= 25 pieces at .60 m. 1st layer 1. Slope stabilization for embankment and cutting
2 2. Prevention of erosion in river embankments.
85
,
SIMPLIFIED CQNSTRUCTION ESTIMATE METAL RElNtrORCEMENT
TABLE 3-1 STANDARD WEIGHT OF PLAIN OR DEFORMEb'ROUND . ..,. " TABLE 3-3 MECHANICAL PROPERnES OF STEEL BARS
STEEL BARS IN KILOGRAM ,
Olam.
t--
5.00 6.00 7.50 I
,
Length of Steel Bars in Meters
0,00 10.50 12.00 13.50

CIna Grade
Y'-Id
Strength
Mpa
Ten.11e
Strength
t.tpa mm
~Iongatl
Percent Angle
Diameter
Specimen In 200 mm Bending of pin d0-
nominal
rnrca mm mm degree die. at
, Specimen
8mm 1.98 2.37 2.96 3.56 4.15 4.74 5.33
Hot Rolled 230 230 390 0<25 18 180 3d
10mm 3.08 3.70 4.62 5.54 6.47 7.39 8.32
12mm " 0>25 16 <4d
4.44 5.33 6.66 7.99 9.32 10.66 11.99
Non Wet-
13mm 5.21 6.25 7.83 9.38 10.94 12.50 14.07
, dable def. 275 275 480 0<25 10 180 <4d
16mm 7.90 9.47 11.84 14.21 16,58 18.95 21.32
atael bar 0>25 8 5d
20mm 12.33 14.80 18.50 22.19 25.69 29.59 33.29
415 415 620 0<25 8 180 5d
25mm 19.27 23.12 28.90 34.68 40,46 46.24 52.02
28mm
0>25 7 6d -
24.17 29.00 36.25 43.50 50.75 58.00 65.25
30mm 27.75 33.29 41.62 49.94 58.26 66.59 74.91 H~Roled 230 23'0 390 0<25 20 180 3d
32mm 31.57 37.88 47.35 56.82 66.29 75.76 85.23 Weldable 0> 25 18 <4d
36mm 39.96 47.95 59.93 71.92 83.91 95.89 107.88 Deformed 275 480 480 0<25 16 180 <4d
or plain 0> 25 14 5d
TABLE 3-2 DEFORMATION ,REQUIREMENTS 415 415 550 D < 25 14 180 5d
0> 25 12 6d
Nominal Max Average Height Tolerance Max. Value
~iametr Spacing of lugs Minimum Maximum Summation
Of luasaap TABLE 3.. AREAS OF GROUPS OF REINFORCING STEEL BARS
8 7.0 0.3 0.6 5.5 Bar Number of Bars (mm 2 )

10 7.0 0.4 0,8 7,8 Oia.
~
mm. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
12 8.4 0.5 1.0 9.4 '.
6 28 57 85
13 9.1 O.S 1.2 10.2 113 141 170 198 226 254 283
8 50 101 151 201 251
16
20
11.2
14.0
0.7 1.4 12.6
10 79 157 236 3,1 4 3~
302
471
352
550
.628
402 452
707
503
785
1.0 2.0 15.7
, 12 113 226 339 452 565 679 792 905 1017 1131
25 17.5 1.2 2.4 19.6
16 201 402 603 804 1005 1206 1407 1608 181)9 2Q11
28 19.6 1.4 2.8 22.0
20 314 628 942 1257( 1571 1885 2199 2513 2827 3142
30 21.0 1.5 3.0 13.6
24 491 982 1473 1963 2454 2945 3436 3927 4418 4909
32 22.4 1.6 3.2 25.1 32 804 1608
I 36 24.5 1.8 3.6 27.5 40 1256 ..2§13
2412
3769
3216
5026,
4021
6283
4825
7539
5629
8796
6433
1005
7237
1131
8042
1257
88
89
11
J I:!.
.."."...
SIMPIFIED CQNSTRUCTION ESTIMATE METAL REINFORCEMENT
In order to provide -a higher degree of sufficient bond be- HOW TO DETERMINE SPLICING LENGTH OF STEEL BARS
tween the concrete and the reinforcement, steel bars were pro-
vided with a surface deformation in various forms and designs,
Types of Reinforcement Minimum Splice Length
3-2 IDENTIFICATION OF STEEL BARS 1. Tension Bars 25 x Bar size + 150 mm

2. Co'mpression Bars 20 x Bar size + 160 mm.
Steel reinforcing bars are provided with distinctive markings
identifying the name of the manufacturer with Its initial brand
and the bar size number including the type of steel bars pre- ILLUSTRATION 3-1
sented as follows:
Determine the length of the splice joint for a 16 mm and 20
N =For Billet mm steel bars under the following conditions:
A =For Axle
Rail Sign =For Rail Steel a.) Tensile reinforcement of a beam
b.) Compressive reinforcement of a column
SOLUTION (For 16 mm steel bars)

Main Ribs Main Ribs -
Initial of a.) Classification of the reinforcement is under tension. Mul-

Manufacturer tiply:
Bar Size Bar Size 25 X 16 mm + 150 mm = 550 mm or55 cm.
- Steel Type b.) For the reinforcement under compression,

~-Hf Grade lJIark
multiply:
Grade 40 One Line· Grade 60
G~e50 • ....-itlIo--Two Line· Grade 75 20 X 16 mm + 150 mm =470 mm or 47 cm.

Therefore, the splice jOint for a 16 mm tension bar is 55 cen-
STEEL BARS MARKING SYSTEM
timeters long and 47 centimeters for a compression bars.
FIGURE 3-2
SOLUTION (For 20 mm steel bar)
3-3 BAR SPLICE, HOOK AND BEND
a. Length of splice for te~ion bar.
In estimating the quantity of steel reinforcing bars, one has . 25 X 20 mm + 150 mm = 650 mm. or65 cm.
to consider the additional length for the hook, the bend and the
splice whose length varies depending upon the limitations as b. Length of splice for compression bars . .
prescribed by the National Building Code. 20 x 20 mm + 150 mm =
550 mm or 55 cm.
90 . 91
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE . METAL REINFORCEMENT
MILD STEEL MINIMUM HOOK AND BEND ALLOWANCE
Hook Len~th =L + h
. ,
L • 2A + 38 +22d
Hook Length • L + h for hook
HOOK BEND
l. • 2 ( A + 8 ) + 20d Total l.ength • A + B + C
mGH YIELD BARS MINIMUM HOOK AND
BEND ALLOWANCE
Hook Length =L + n
4d
h :: 11d n = 5.5(:1' '?P_...l
~d
~=-Jd
;;:: -,
L -~i t---- L---4
Hook Length = L + n for Bend
. ,.
HOOK BEND
l.ength :: A + 26 + C + 0 • 2r - 4d
FIGURE 3-3 HOOK AND BEND ALLOWNCE FIGURE 3-4 LENGTH OF HOOK AND BEND
92 93
METAL REINFORCEMENT
To those who have not yet been exposed to detailed drafting
~- ~4r
worX or actual field construction of reinforced concrete , wi" find
A ___ A It difficult to make a detailed estimate of the various types of re-
Inforcement required.
Total Lengtl1 = A Total Length = A+h
The various type of metal reinforcement that an estimator
should be familiarized with are:
I~l /\
i
Total Length
B-·
=A + B· 112 r· d
~ @====A=-=·
=
'R
Total Length A + 2h
A. Concrete Hollow Block Remforcement.
This is the simplest type of vertical and horizontal reinforce-

ment placed in between ·the layers and the hollow core of the
blocks. This type of reinforcement is Insta"ed and spliced pro-
gressively with the rise of the concmte blocks. .
~=Ar B. Foeting Reinforcements
1. Footing slab reinforcement for sma" and medium size

Total Length = A+ h Total Length :;: A + 2h
footings.
2. Dowels, cut bars, anchor, and bend bars
3. Beam reinforcement for medium construction
b;:::::::=::=====A ~ ===
.
4. Beam and slab for large construction
=~Jrc ~=:i
5. Stirrups
-~ I t- c-; C. Post and Column Reinforcements

Total Le:lgth = A + 8 + C . r - 2d Total Length =A + B + C
1. Main vertical reinforcement
a. Single or
b. Bundled bars
2. Lateral Ties
a. Outer ties
bf Inner ties .
c. Straight ties [
3. Spiral Ties for circular column
4. Dowels for partitions and other future attachments.

FIGlJRE 3·5 LENGTH Or- HOOK AND BEND
95
94 -.
I'""'r " I
SIMPLIFIED COHSTRUCTION ESTIMATE METAL REINFORCEMENT
D. Beam and Girder Reinforcements SUlleated Procedures in Estimatinl

Steel Bar Reinforcement
1. Main Reinforcement
a. Straight bars 1. The main reinforcement of post, column, beam, girder and
b. Bend bars the like structures, are determined by the simple Direct
c. Additional cut bars for tension and compression Counting Method, that Is" by countlrig the number of main
d. Dowel bars for future attachment . vertical reinforcement on one structure then multiplied by
the total number of the same type or category In the plan.
2. Stlrup~
a. Open stirrups 2. Do not forget to Inclu~e the additional length for hook, bend
b. Closed stirrups and splices for end lapping joints. The additional length Is
c. Straight stirrups .or ties the one most often overlooked In ordering ,length of steel
bars. In ordering steel bars, always think of minimizing the
3. Cut Bars splices If it cannot be totally avoided.
a. Over and across the support '
b. Between supports
3. For other reinforcement parts such as lateral ties, stirrups,
c. Dowels and hangers for ceiling and partition ' spirals, dowels, cut bars and the like 'should be treated or
estimated separately one at a time taking Into consideration
the additional length for the hook, bend, and spliCing length.
E. Floor Slab Reinforcement
1. Main reinforcements .
4. After knowing the length of the lateral ties, stirrups and
other similar parts, select the steel bars from the various
s. Stralght 'main reinforcing bars extending from one commercial length of 8.00 to 13.50 meters long where
beam to the other these cut ' bars could be obtained avoiding or minimizing
b. Alternate main reinforcing bars with bend between unnecessary extra cuts. Extra cuts are waste when classl·
and over the beam ' support. (see figure floor slab
reinforcement) -
fled as.junk materials. .
c. Main alternate bars over support (beam or girder) , '5. Considering Its cost, Tie Wire for reinforcement joints Is a
big Item in large construction work. The length of each tie
2. Temperature bars tied perpendicular to the main rein·, wire should be cut to the minimum required length based on
forcement. the diameter of the bars to, be tied on. Indiscriminate cut·
3. Additional altemate cuf barS over the support (beam). tlng of tie wire should not be permitted.
4. Dowels and hangers for cel~g and other attachment.
,I: E. Other Types of Reinforcement 3-4 REINFORCEMENT OF CONCRETE

,
HOLLOW BLOCKS
Other special types of reinforcem'ent designed for a particu-
lar structure which may be presented 'in details. Not until after Steel bar as reinforcement is a requirement for all types 'of
., familiarizing with these different parts and types of reinforce- concrete and masonry works. The National Building Code has
ment could one make a sound and reliable estimate. promulgated guidelines on how and what kind of reinforcement
I
96 97
~ I ii
~
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE METAL REINFORCEMENT
Is appropriate for a certain type of work depending upon the

purpose for which It Is to serve. The size and spacing require-
ments for concrete hollow block reinforcement must be Indl·
cated on the plan or specifications.
Concrete hollow block reinforcement could be determined In Hortzontal Rein',
at everv 3 layera
three different ways:
1. By the Direct Counting Method

2. By the Area Method
Natural Ground
3. By the Unit Block Method
::!~t:=!k' 40 om
_Footing
The Direct Counting tfethod ~,Om
Under the direct counting method, the vertical and horizontal

reinforcements are counted individually In the plan. The length FIGURE 3-6
Is also determined from the elevation. The hook, bend and lap-
ping splices are Imagine )!y calculated and added to its length TABLE 3" LENOTH OF REINFORCING BARS FOR CHB IN METERS
because it is very rare to see a plan in a large scale drawing
showing this particular r qulrements of reinforcing ,steel bars. ~!lIQ81 B!IOf o ~ l:g~!2D1 B!llotmcamlm
Thus, estimators must be familiar with the hook, the bend and Spacing Length of bars In meter Spacing Length of bars In meter
splicing requirements, to be able to work effectively even ,If the cm. ,Per Block Per Sq. M. Layer P,er Block Per Sq. M.
plan Is not accompanied with such details.
40 0.235 2,93 2 0.264 3.30
In the event that estimating by the Direct Counting Method is
somewhat difficult, one can use the Area Method with the aid of 60 0.171 2,13 3 0.172 2,15
Tat;>le 3-5 prepared for this purpose. 80 0.128 1.60 4 0,138 1.72
"
Estimating by the Ar a Method

The Area Method is the simplest approach in computing the SOLUTION ( By the Area Method)
steel bar reinforcement for CHB with the aid of Table 3·5. The
values presented in the table include the allowances required 1. Solve for the Area of the fence
for standard bend, hook and lapping splices.
Area = Length x Height
A = 4.00 x 3.00 m.
ILLUSTRATION 3-2 A = 12sq.m.
From Figure 3-6, determine the number of: 2. For vertical reinforcement spaced at 80 centimeters, re-
(a) 10 x 20 x 40 cm CHB fer to Table 3-5. Under column length per sq. m. multiply:
(b) Vertical reinforcement spaced at 80 cm .
(c) Horizontal reinforcement at every 3 layers. 12 sq. m. x 1.60 = 19.20 m. long
98 '99
METAL REINFORCEMENT
4. Add the results of (a) and (b)
3. Solve for the horizontal bars at every 3 layers. From Ta-
. ble 3:'5 under HO.rlzontal ReInforcement per square me- 19.2 + 25.80 = 45.00 meters long
ter, multiply:
6. Convert' thls length to the commercial size of steel bars,
12 sq. m. x 2.15 I: 25.80 meters long
say 6.00 meters long. Divide: .
4. Add the results of 2 and 3
45,00 m, = 7.5 order 8 pieces 1'0 mm x 6,00 m,
19.20 + 25.80 I: 45.00 meters . 6.00
5. Convert this value to the commercial Jeogth of steel bar, 3-5 TIE WIRE FOR CBB REINFORCEMENT
say 6.00 meters long, divide:
Tie wire refers to gauge No.16 galvanized iron wire popular1y
45.00 m. I: 7.5 order 8 pes. 10 mm x 6.00 m.long.
known asG.1. tie wire . Tie wire is used to secure the steel bars
6.00 into its deSigned position. Ordering tie wire is not by feet nor by
meter length but in kHograms or roll. One roll is equivalent to 45
SOLUTION (By the Unit Block Method) kilograms, or approximately 2,385 meters at 53 meters per kilo-
gram.
Solving the same problem of illustration 3-2, by the Unit
Block Method, we have the following solution: The length of each tie '.'/ire depends upon the size of the
bars to be tied on. Tie wire is cut into length ranging from 20 to
1. Find the area of the wall. 40 centimeters for small and medium size steel bars. For larger
steel bars, the length of ties varies depending upon the conven-
Area: I: 4.00 x 3.00 m. I: 12 sq. m. ience of the steel man.
2. Determine the number of hollow blocks. R~fer to Table 2-2. This particular item 'of constructiop material is always in-
Multiply: cluded in the bill of materials but never been comput~d. The
quantity is determined through a more or less calculation. In
CHB: = 12 sq. m. x 12.5 =150 pieces short, it is a quantity with uncertainty of its accuracy. The only
thing that is certain is either it is over estimated or under esti-
3. Refer to Table 3-5. mated which is as bad as the other.
a.} Vertical reinforcement at 80 cm. spaCing, length of
steel bar per block; multiply: Length of Tie Wire Reinforcement
~ 50 x 0.128 = 19.2 meters long. The common size of steel bar reinforcement specified for
concrete hollow block work is either; 10 mm, 12 mm or 16 mm .
b.} Horizontal bars at every after 3 layers, refer again to diameter depending upon the plan and specifications. For this
Table 3-5. length of steel bar per block; multiply: particular size of reinforcement, a 25 to 40 centimeters long tie
wire folded at the center is satisfactory.
150 x 0.172 = 25.80 meters long.
101
100
TABLE 3-8 No. 16 G.I. nE WIRE FOR CHB REINFORCEMENT SOLUTION -2

PER SQUARE METER
Klloarams per Square Meter 1. Find the wall area.

Vertical
Spacing
Horizontill
Layer Spa~ing 25 ern i,
-
I
---'
30 em, Tie 40 em, Tie Area = 4.00 x 3.00 = 12 Sq. m.
40 2 ,054 ,065 ,086 3. Refer to Table 3-6. Along 60 em. vertical spacing with
40 3 ,039 ,047 ,063 one horizontal bar at every after 2 layers of block and us-
,024 ' .029 ,039
40 4 ing 30 ~m . tie wire, multiply:
.057
60
60
2
3
.036
.026
.044
.032 .042 12 sq. m. x .044 = 0.53 kilograms # 16 G.I. wire .
60 4 .020 .024 .032
More of this Tie Wire will be presented' in the succeeding
80 2 .027 .033 .044 examples on steel reinforcement.
80 3 ,020 .024 .032
80 4 .01 5 .01 8 .024
3-6 INDEPENDENT FOOTING REINFORCEMENT
ll..LUSTRATION 3-3 Indep n~e t column footing is also referred to as individual

or isolated footing. The ACI Code provides that the minimum
Continuing the so ution f illustration 3~2, find the requi red underground protective covering of concrete to steel reinforce-
Tie Wire in kilograms 'f the reinforcements are spaced at: ment Shall not be less than 7.5 centimetps. The reinforcement ,
for this type of structure is detennined by direct counting from '
1. Vertical ba"S ~Pdce at 80 centimders and one horizontal
the detailed plan under the following procedures:
bars tl I :,y after 3 layers of thE: block.
v
2. Vertil" I t:li:a"S at SO centimeters and one. horizontal bar at

every after 2 layers of the block
3. Tie w in~ in kilograms.
SOLUTION - I
1. Solve for the wall area.
Area = 4.00 )( 3.00

7.5 cm~ ___ -=--___-+.:-:7.5 L
A = 12sq.m. Bar Length = L • + 4 (7.5 em.)

;
2. Refer to Table 3~6. Along 80 cm. vertical spacing and 3 FIGURE 3-7INDlVIDUAL'FOOTING REINfO: '{'EMENT
layers horizontal spacing of reinforcement at 30 cm. long
tie wire, multiply: 1. Know the actual dimensions of the foo ....g as to its length
and width. .
12 sq. m. x .024 = .29 kgs. # 16- G.\. wire
102 103
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE .METAL REINFORCEMENT
·2. Consider the 7.6 em. minimum underground protective
covering of concrete to the steel reinforcement.
ILLUSTRATION 3-4
3. If the plan does not specify hook or bend of the footing
reinforcement, the length ::1f the bar is equal to the lengttt . Fro,:" Figure 3-8, find the number cif 12 mm steel bars re-
or width of the footing min ~s the 7.5 protective covering qUired If there are 24 footings having a general dimensions of
at both ends. 1.50 x 1.50 meters.
4. If the plan Indica~e hook or bend of the reinforcement,
the bar cut should Include the allowances for the hook
SOLUTION
and band as presented In Figure 3·4 and 3·5.
5. Know the spacing distance of the steel bars both ways to
determine the exact number required. As much as pos- 1. Find the net length of one cut reinforcing bar.
sible, select the appropriate commercial length of steel
bar which is divisible by the required cut length to avoid Net Length is =1.50 m. - 2 (.075)
unwanted cuts. L = 1.35 meters.
One Important consideration in estimating steel bar rein- 2. Find the total number of these cut bars in one footing.
forcement is to find. the required lenQth and qu~ntly of a
particular reinforcement then choose a commercial length bars 10 x 2 = 20 pieces of 12 mm at 1.35 m. long.
which when cut into the required sizes will minimize unwanted
cuts. For instance, if 5 pieces at 1.20 meters long is needed, the 3. Find the total number of cut bars in 24 footings.
most ideal order is 6.00 meters long steel bar. Likewise, if the
work requires 2.50 meters cut length, the order will not be 6.00 Total cut bars: 24 x 20 = 480 pieces
meters but 7.50 meters long steel bars.
4. If 6.00 meters long steel bar will be used we obtain the
1.SOm.
following cuts. '
6.00 m. = 4.44 pieces ...

1.35 m.
111111_-12 mm steel-bars crosswise
5. The result simply mean that in one 6 meters long steel
bar we could get 4.44 pieces at 1.35 met~long. We will
not consider the fractional value of .44 beCause it is less
than 1.35 meters length of one cut bar. Instead, we will
only use the whole value 4.0.
L =: 1.35m. 6. Divide the result of dtep 3 by 4.0 to get the number of e

meters steel bars required.
PLAN .._-CR0S8-SIiCTION
480 = 120 pieces steel bars at 6 meters long.
FIGURE 3-8 INDEPENDENT FOOTING REINFORCEMENT 4.0
104
105
I
SIMPLIFIEn C'()NSTRUCTION ESTIMATE METAL REINFORCEMENT
N· = 6 x 2 (crosswise) = 12 pieces per footing 360 = 72 pieces 12. n 'Tl x 6.00 meters steel bars
5
3. Find the total cut bars for 30 footings.
The question now is, when to use the first method and when
12 cut bars x 30 footings = 360 pieces. to use the second. The following rules will help in making the
right choice.
4. Find the total length of 360 pes. cut bars at 1.20 m. long. 1. Determine the net length of one reinforcing cut bar
360 x 1.20 = 432 meters 2. Divide 6.00 meters or any chosen commercial length of
steel bar by the result of step 1.
5. Divide by 6.00 m. length of one commercial steel bar 3. If the result in dividing the length of one steel bar by ,the
length of one cut bar is a whole number (exact value) use
432 m. = 72 pieces 12 mm x 6.00 m. steel bars. the second procedure. ,
6 4. If the result has a fractional value, use the first method.
Comment: Estimating The Footing Tie Wire

1. The above solution is correct because in dividing 6.00 m. Estimating the Tie Wire was initially discussed in Section 3-5
by 1.20 (. length of one cut bar), we got an exact amount under the reinforcement for CHB. Applying the same principles
of 5.0. Meaning, there is no extra cut in one 6.0 meters in illustration 3-4 and 3-6, we have the following examples:
steel bar.
2. In step 5, dividing 432 by 6.00 meters, yield an exact

A) Solving the Tie Wire for mustration 3-4
number of 72 pieces at 6.00 meters steel bar. Therefore,
I ,
1. Looking at the plan of Figure 3-8 there are:
all cuts are exactly the same without excesses.
10 x 10 =100 intersections of~stel bars to be tied
Solving the Same Problem by the First Method per 0(" 109
1. The net length of one cut bar is 1.20 meters and Jhe total 2. Solve for the total ties of the 24 footings:
number of bars in 30 footings is 360 pieces. 100 x 24 :: 2,400 ties.
:-' 2. Select a commercial length of steel bar which is divisible 3. Using a 30 centimeters long ties, multiply:
H by 1.20 without extra cut. Try 6.00 meters 10'1g steel
bars. 2,400 x .30 m.:: 720 meters G.!. wire.
6.00 m =5 pieces I
1.20 m. 4. Convert this leng h to kilogram . (One kilogram (jf No. 16
tie wire is appr Imatel 53 meters long.) Divide:
3. This simply mean that in a 6.00 meter long steel bar, we
obtain exactly 5 pieces at 1.20 m. long cut bar. Divide the lli.,m.:: 13.58 say 14 kilograms # 16 G.I. wire.
total cut bars for 30 footings by 5 53
108 109
B) Solving the Tie Wire lor Dlustration 3-6 The quantity and length of the main reinforcement is deter-
mined by the "Direct Counting Method~ giving special attention
1. Looking at the plan of Figure 3-9. There are 36 steel bar to the additional length
I .
for:
intersections to be tied with G.I wire
a. Lap joints of end splices
6 x 6 = 36 ties per footing b. ~lIowance for bending and or hook
c. Additional length for beam depth and floor thickness if
2. Solve for the total ties of 30 footings. the height indicated in the plan is from floor to ceiling.
d. Distance from floor to footing slab.
36 x 30 =1,080 ties. e. . Provisions for splices of succeeding floors.
3. If one tie is 30 cm. lo~g, find the total length of 1,080 ties;
ILLUSTRATION 3-7
.30 m. x 1,080 = 324 meters long.
From the following figure, list down the main reinforcement
4, Convert this length to kilograms. Using the value of 53 from the footing to the second floor using 20 mm if mere are 10
meters per kilogram, divide: columns in the plan.
324 m. = 6.1 kilograms # 16 G.I. wire. 8· 20 mm

53 ,40 m DOWf!1 for ~ Floor
m~rib
-e:;,~if+<"'4. ' •. 15 Concrete slab
3-7 Pf)ST AND COLUMN REINFORCEMMENl'
The reinforcement of post and column to be considered In
this study are: (a.) The m Ii or vertical reinforcement, (b.) The
lateral ties or (c.) SpirAl tip.s for circular column.
a-20 mm
3.50 Cr09$ Sec:tJon of Column

fica", Add \itlpth of ACio: and Beam
Ground Floor lin
FlDorline I 1.20
line
FIGURE :\·10 POST AN,D COLUMN REI FORCEMENT FIGURE 3·11 LENGTH OF MAIN REINFORCEM NT
110 111
SOLUTION 3. Identify the bars with hook and bend for adjustment of
their order length. '
1. Determine the total length of the main steel bar reinforce-
ments. Slab Slab
Beam Beam
a.
b.
Bend at the base footing ....................... 20
Length from footing to ground floor ....... .1.20
- r-- - .---------, ...-
c. Height from ground line to beam ........... 3.50 I-- Column--
d. Depth of beam ..... ..... .............. :......... .50
e Thickness of the floor slab .. ... ............. .15
f. Dowel for second floor (20 x 20 mm) ..... .40
Center to Center Center to Outer side
Total Length of the Reinforcement.... 5.95 M.
2. Select a 6.00 meters long steel bar Slab Slab
3. Multiply by number of bars in one post x'10 post.

-
Beam
- -
Beam '
-
8 x 10 = 80 pieces ~-Column
4. Order: 80 pes. 20 m' 1 •• O\) meters long steel bars.
3-8 REAM AND GIR E :.EINFORCEMENT Inside to Inside ' Outer to Outer side
The Direct Countino:; .I'll • e )e,;t' • cd in determining

FIGURE 3·12
the nllmber of main reinfo~' IT! rot oj bl 1, - alld girder. The
length h(1w~var. is determined y the physical condition of the
strucef~ in relation with their 'PP' 3-9 LATERAL TIES
1. Verify the plan if the span or distance of the column Tied column has reinforcement 'conSisting of vertical bars
where the beam is resting indicates the following condi- held In a position by lateral reinforcement calied lateral ties.
tions:
The ACI Code provides that: "All non pre-stressed bars for
a) Center to center of the column
b) Outer to center of the column tied column shall be enclosed bll lateral ties of at least No. 3 in
c) Outer to outer side of the column
size for longitudinal bars No. 10· or smaller and at least No.4 in
d) Inside to inside span size for No, 11 to 18 and bundleq longitudinal bars", '
2. Verify the splicing 'position of the reinforcement if it is ad- The Code Provisions Simply Mean that:
ju~ed to the commercial length ..>f crteel bars. Take note
that "the lesser th splice the Ie.. r L h cost". a.) If the main longitudinal reinforcement of a tied column is
112 113
No. 10 bars or smaller in size (lower than 30 mm), the Lat-

eral Ties should not be smaller than No. 3 bar or 10 mm
SOLUTION
diameter. '
1. Determine the spacing distance of the lateral ties.
b.) If the main reinforcement of a tied ~ _ n is No. 11 to a) 16 x 20 mm =320 mm or 32 cm.
No. 18 (35 mm to 66 mm) and bundled bars, the Lateral b) -48 x 10 mm =480 mm or 48 cm.
Ties should not be less than No.4 or 12 mm diameter. c) The least side of the column is 30 cm. =
The Code further provides that Lateral Ties Spacing 2. The lowest value is 30. Therefore, adopt 30 centimeters
shall not exceed the following: spacing of the lateral ties
1. 16 x the longitudinal bar diameter , TABLE 3-7 NUMBER AND DIAMETER OF STEEL BARS
2. 48 x the lateral tie bar diameter or Bar No. Designation Inches mm.
3. The least dimension of the column 2 Y- '. 6

3 3/8 10
4 112 12
5 518 16
lLLUSTRATION 3-8 6 % 20
7 7/8 22
Determine the spacing distance of the lateral ties for a tied 8 1.0 25
9 1-1/8 28
column as shown in the following figure. 31
10 1-1/4
11 1-3/8 35
12 1-1/2 38
13 1·5/8 41
-,~U=l: VOOlumn Re.lnforcement. 20 mm. - 14 1-3/4 44
16 2.0 50
c:~=1" ~. 18 2·1/4 " 65 I

30cm_ .... I@J
: ~
10 mm Latera ITiel -
ILLUSTRATION 3 - 9
A building has 26 square columns 7.00 tn . high with cross I
sectional dimensions of .50 x .50 m. with 8 pieces 20 mm main
reinforcement. Find the lateral ties required using 10 mm and
1----- - -·- the corresponding tie wire. r
30cm. 30cm.
SOLUTION
ELEVATION SECTION CROSS SECTION
i
1. Determine the spacing of- the lateral ties. I
FIGURE 3-13 SPACING DISTANCE OF LATERAl:. TIES
16 x 20 mm. = 320 mm or 32 em
I
114 115
I
:1
METAL REINFORCEMENT
7. Find how many 1.80 meters could be derived from a
48 x 10 mm. = 480 mm or 48 cm. commercial length of steel bars ranging from 6.00; 7.50
or 9.00 meters long. By trial division we have:
The least dimension of the column is 50 cm.
2. Adopt 32 cm. spacing of the lateral ties being the small- 6.00 = 3.33 L50 =.4.16 9.00 = 5: 0
.1.80 1.80 1.80
est valUe.
3. Determine the number of lateral ties in one column. 8. From the above results, select 5 for having exact val 'jA
which means exactly 5 pieces could be derived frorr I
Spacing = 7.00 m. ht. = 21.875 say 2, 9.00 meters .Iong steel bar.
.32cm.
9 Divide the total number of ties In step 5 by the values
found in step 7 to get the number of steel bars required.
~!a-10 mm. Lateral Ties 598 = 119.6 say 120

20mmcolumn 5.0
reinforcement
10 Order: 120 pes. 10 mm x 9.00 meters long steel bars.
5Ocm.
CommeBU:
32cm.
1. Step 7 is very important treca use wtihout these trial divi-
sions, cutting could be done on a 6.00 m. or 7.50 rn.
42cm. steel bars making so many extra cuts to be classified
lacer as surplus or junks .
.
2. In cases where results of the trial divisions does not give
an exad quotient, it becomes the estimator's choice to
FIGURE 3-14 decide which length to use that will not produce exces-
sive waste.
4. TaKe note that this 22 is the spacing distance between
lateral ties. What we are after is the number of ties in one '3. In this example, we have learned .how to program the
column height. Add one to get the number of lateral ties. buying and cutting of steel bars for lateral ties minimiz-
ing if not totally avoiding unwanted cuts.
N~. of Lateral Ties: 22 + I = 23 pieces.
5. Solve for the total lateral ties In the 26 cohllmns. Solving for the Tie Wire
Total ties: 23 x 26 columns = 598 ties 1. Find the number of main .reinforcement in one column
multiplied by the number of intersections with the lateral
6. Detennlne the length of one Lateral Tie. By inspection, ties.
the tie Is 180 em. or 1.80 meters long.
117
116
8 bars x 23 lateral ties = 184 intersections per column SOLUTION

2. Find the total intersections in the 26 columns: 1. Determine the spacing of the lateral ties
184 x, 26 = 4,784 ties 16 x 20 mm =320 mm. Or 32 cm.
3. This 4,784 is the total numbl:!r of Tie Wires. If each tie is
48 x ~O mm =
480 mm. Or 48 cm.
The least dimension of the column is 40 cm .
40 cm. long, multiply to get the total length in meters.
.40 x 4,784 = 1,914 metersG.l.wire 2. Adopt 32 em. spacing, the smallest value found .
3. Determine the number of lateral ties in one column.

4. One kilogram of No. 16 G.I. wire is approximately 53 me-
ters, divide: Spacing = 8.00 m. ht = 25 pieces + 1 = 26
.32 m.
1,914 m. = 36.1 say 37 kilograms
53 4. Find the total lateral ties in th e 30 columns.
ILLUSTRATION 3-10 a.) Inner Ties : 26 x 30 = 780 pieces

b.) Outer Ties: 26 x 30 = 780 pieces
From the following figure, find the number of 10 mm. lateral
ties if there are 30 columns at 8 meters high each including the 5. By Inspection, the length of the lateral ties are :
tie wire in kilograms. .
a.) Inner ties = 100 em or 1.00 meter
b.) Outer ties = 140 em. or 1.40 meters
6. Find how many 1.00 meter and 1.40 meters eOlJld be de-
8-20mm rived from a commercial length of steel bars. By trial divi-
main reinf. sion we have: r
a.) 6.00 m. = 6.0 pes. the result has no fraction.

Lateral TieiH+¥A. 1.00
b.) 6.00 m = 4.28 pes. with fraction ~ try another length

1.40
c.) 7.50 m = 5.35 pes. with fraction, try another length .

40 em. 1.40

d.) 9.00 m. = 6.42 pes. still with fraction.
1.40
FIGU~3-15 7. The results dictate that we use 6.00 meters steel bars.
118
11 9
a) For Inner Ties: 780 = 130 pieces No. of Ties: 8 x 26 x 30 columns = 6,240 ties
6
2. Using .40m . .Iong Tie Wire, find the total length of the
b) For outer Ties : 730 = 195 wire.
4 ~f\ (disregarding .28)
8. Add (a) and (b) = 325 t'v;.) . 10 mm x 6 m. steel bars.

.4.0 x 6,240 m. = 2,496 meters.
3. Convert to kilograms. 2.496 = 47 kilograms
TABLE 3-8 NUMBER OF LATERAL TIES IN ONE STEEL BAR 53 .
AND QUANTITY PER METER LENGTH OF COLUMN
Table 3-8 was prepared to simplify further the estimate of
Lateral Number of Length of Number of Cut in One
Ties Lateral ties Ties with Steel Bar Lenath
column lateral ties and stirrups for beam and girder. The x - en-
Spacing per M. ht. Hook & Bend try simply mean · that such length of steel bars, is not recom-
5 M. 6 M. 7.5 M. 9 M. 12 M. mended for economical reasons.
The table will guide the estimator in selecting rei nforcing
15 6.70 60 X 10 x 15 20 bars whose commercial length when divided by the length of
70 7 x x x 17
each Lateral Tie or Stirrups will minimize extra cut of unwanted
20 5.15 80 6 x x 11 15
85 x 7 x x 14
length. To use the table, consider the following example:
25 4.13 90 x x 8 10 13
95 5 x x x X ILLUSTRATION 3-11
30 3.43 100 5 6 X 9 12
105 x x 7 x x
35 3.00 110 x x x 8 x A building has 20 columns with cross sectional (iimensions
115 x 5 x x x of 30 x 40 cm. each with a clear height of 7.00 meters. Find the
40 2.64 120 4 5 x X 10 number of 10 mm steel bars for lateral ties using Table 3-8.
125 4 x . 6 x x
45 2.36 130 x x X x 9
135 x x x X x
50 2. 14 140 x 4 x X x .3Om.
145 x 4 5 6 X
55 1.96 150 x 4 5 6 8
160 3 x x x X
"/<11'......""-1':.4- Col. Reinf.
60 1.81 170 X x x 5 7
.30
180 x x 4 5 x .40m
190 X 3 x x 6 ·"' ;'~1-0 mm Lateral
200 X 3 X x 6 Ties
x- Not advisable length for economical reasons .
SOlVing for the Tie Wire ELEVATION SECTION CROSS SECTION
', . Find the number of intersections between the main rein-

FIGURE 3-16
forcement and the lateral ties.
121
120
SIMPLIFIED CONSTR~I ESTIMATE . METAL REINFORCEMENT
'II,
SOLUTION 8. If the length of each tie is 40 cm. find the total length :
1. By Inspection, there are two types of lateral ties. 3,840 x .40 = 1,536 meters
• • _"0"1
9. Convert to kilograms, divide by 53 m.

a.) Outer ties = 125 cm . with hook
b.) Inner ties = 80 cm. with hook 1,536 m. = 28.9 say 29 kilograms.
53
2. Find the total length of the 20 columns.
Problem Exercise
7.00 x 20 column' = ·140 meters.
From the following figure, find the number of 10 mm lateral
ties and tie wire if there are 36 columns with cross sectional di-
3. Refer to Tatile 3-8. Under spacing of lateral ties at 30 cm.
mensions of 60 x 90 cm. at 12.00 meters long per column.
distance, there are 3.43 pieces per meter height. Multiply:
140 m. x 3.43 = 480 pes. outer ties

- 10 - 25 mm main reinforcement-j
480 pes. of Inner.ties.
0 U
4. Refer again to Table 3-8. Under length of ties along 125
centimeters, 4 and 6 pi'eces could pe derived from a 5.0 P C
.90 m
and 7.50 meters steel bars respectively. If 6 cuts is cho- Lateral Ties -~I=l
(';
h
sen, divide:
480 = 80 pes.-10 inm x 7.50 m. steel bars o 'X. 0

6 ?
.SOm.
5. For the 80 cm. long lateral ties, 6; 11 and 15 cuts can be
obtained from a 5.0 m., 9.0 m. and 12 meters steel bars
respectively. If 11 is chosen, divide: CROSS SECTION
480 = 43.6 say 44 pes.-10 mm x 9.00 m. steel bars .60m.

11
FIGURE 3-17
6. Order: 80 pes. 10 mm x 7.50 m. steel bars

-3-10 STIRRUPS FOR BEAM
f
AND GIRDER
44 .pes. 10 mm x 9.00 m. steel bars
stirrup is the structural reinforcing member that . holds or
7. ' Finding the Tie Wire we have: binds together the main reinforcement of a beam or girder to a
designed position. The two types of stirrup commonly used are'
480 lateral ties x 8 main reinforcement = 3,840 ties the open stin:ups and the closed stirrups.
122 123
METAL REINFORCEMENT
spaced as shown in Figure 3-19. If there are 16 beams of the
The procedures adopted in estimating the number of stirrups
same design, find the materials required for the stirrups.
for beam and girder is the same as that of the lateral ties as ex-
plained using 'Table 3-8. However, the spaciny distance of the
stirrup requires special consideration because they are gradu- SOLUTION
ally becoming closer towards the support. Hence, it is important
to get the average number of stirrups per _span or by direct 1. By'direCt counting, there are 17 stimJps at 99 cm. long
counting from the detailed plan. say 1.00 meter.
2. Find the to~1 number of stirrups
[JO
FIGURE 3·18 OPEN AND CLOSED STIRRUPS
17 x 16 beams = 272 pieces.
3. Refer to Table 3-8. For a 1.00 m. long stirrup the choice is
either 6.0 m.; 9.0 m.; or 12 meters long steel bar. For
easy handling use 6.0 meters long. Divide.:
.
272 = 45.3 say 46 pes. -10 mm x 6.00 meters
6
Bend bars Main reinforcement
Column
Main reinforcement Stirrups
Stirrups
33cm.
.L-J...-i-li-- Column
12 mm stirrups
23cm. 42 cm.
Main reinforcement
FIGURE 3·19 STIRRUPS ON BEAM

f
30cm.
ILLUSTRATION 3-12
A. reinforced concrete beam with a cross-sectional dimen-

FIGURE 3·20 STIRUPS ON GIRDER
sions as shown aLove specify the :use of 10 mm open stirrups
125
124
.. METAL REINFORCEMENT
ILLUSTRATION 3-14
ILLUSTRATION 3-13
A spiral column with a cross sectional diameter of 50 cm. re-
From Figure 3-20, compute the number of 12 mm stinups quires 10. mm spiral reinforcement as shown in the following
required if there are 12 girder Qf the same design. figure. I~ there are 14 columns at 7.00 meters high, find the
;. number of 10 mm steel bars needed for a 5 cm. pitcti spirals.
SOLUTION
1. By direct counting, there are 15 stinups per span, if there
are 12 girders; multiply:
li~;:UI.- Column Rein!. -
. 15 x 12 girders = 18Q stinups

_ - Spiral Ties ~
2. . By inspection the length of one stinup is 150 cm. Refer'
to Table 3-8, along 150 cm. length of ties, 4, 5, 6 and 8
cuts could be derived from 6.00; 7.50; 9.00 and 12 me-
180
. .
ters steel bars respectively. If we chose 6.00 m, long.
= 45 piece' 12 mm x 6.00 m. steel bars.

=t 5cm Pitch
4
3. If we chose 7.50 meters long steel bars we get: FIGURE 3-21 SPIRAL COLUMN
180 = 36 pieces 12 mm x 7.50 m.

5' SOLUTION
A. Solving the Spiral Reinforcement
3-11 SPiRAL AND COLUMN TIES
1. Total~ngh of 14 columns: 7.00 m. x 14 = 98 meters.
The spiral reinforce.ment consist of evenly spaced ~ontiu
ous spirals held firmly in place by at least three vertical bar 2. Find the number of 10 mm b'ilr spirals. Refer to Table 3-
spacers under the following considerations 9. For a 50 cm. column diameter, .5.0 cm. pitch using a
6.00 meters steel bars, multiply:
1. "That the center to center spacing of the spiral should not
98 m. x 4.919 = 482.1 say 483 x 10 mm x 6.00 m .
.
. exceed 6th part of the diameter core.
2. That, the clear spacing between the spirals should not 3. If 9.00 meters will be used as spiral, from Table 3-9.
exceed 7.5 centimeters nor less than 5.0 centimeters. along 50 em column diameter,S cm. pitch under 9 m.
steel bars the entry is 3.223. Multiply:
3. That the clear spacing between the spirals be less than
1-1/2 times the biggest size of the coarse aggregate.
98 m. x 3.223 = 316 pieces. 10 mm x9.00 m.
127
126
T
. ~
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE .METAL REINFORCEMENT .

TABLE 3-9 NUMBER OF SPIRAL REINFORCING BARS
PER METER HEIGHT 5.00 21 .0 7.234 4.740 3.524
70.0 6.25 17.0 5.856 3.837 2.853
Column Pitch No. of Tum Number of Steel Bars from a 7.50 14.3 3.234 2.405
4.936
Dia. cm. cm. oer Meter ht. 6.00m. 9.00m. 12.00 m.
,
, , 5.00 21.0 8.391 5.498 4.088
! ) , \
5.00 21.0 2.604 1.706 1.269 80.0 6.25 17.00 6.793 4.451 3.31·0
30.0 6.25
7.50
17.0
14.3
2.108
1.778
1.381
1.165
1.027
0.866
7.50
5.00
,
14.3
21 .0
5.726
9.549
. 3.752
6.256 '
2.790
4.652 I
90.0 6.25 17.0 7.730 5.064 3.766

32.5
5.00
6.25
7.50
21 .0
17.0
14.3
2.894
2.342
1.975
1.896
1.535
1.294
1.410
1.141
0.962
7.50 14.3 6.366 4.171
!
3.101 :
5.00 21.0 10.706 7.014 5.216
?,OO 21.0 3.183 2.085 1.550 100.0 6.25 17.0 8.667 5.678 4.222
35.0 6.2~ 17.0 2.577 1.688 1.255 7.50 14.3 7.137 4.676 3.477
7.50 14.3 2.172 1.423 1.058
5.00 21.0 3.472 2.275 1.692 il

37.5 6.25 17.0 2.811 1.842 1.393 B. Finding the Tie Wire
7.50 .14.3 2.370 1.524
• 1.154
5.00 21.0 3.762 2.465 1.833

1. Find the number of vertical bars per column :: 12 pieces
.,
.... ' 40.0 6.25 17.0 3.045 1.995 1.484
. 7.50 14.3 2.567 1.682 1.251 2. Refer to Table 3-9. Under 50 cm. column diameter,S cm
pitch, the number of tum per meter height is 21 .
.... 5.00 21.0 4.051 2.654 1.974 Multiply:
42.5 6.25 17.0 3.281 2.149 1.598
7.50 14.3 2.765 1.812 1.347
~
12 x 21 = 252 Ties per meter height
5.00 21.0 4.340 • 2.844 2.115
45.0 6.25 17.0 3.513 . 2.302 1.712 3. Total Ties for 14 cplumn at 7.00 m. high is:
7.50
5.00
1.4.3
21.0
2.962 1.940 1.443
252 x 7.00 x14
.
. r
47.5 6.25
7.50
17.0
14.3
4.630
3.748 "
3.033
2.455
2.256
1.826 = 24~69 ties I
3.1 59 2.070 1.539
SO.O
5.00
6.25
7.50
21.0
17.0
4.919
3.982
3.223 '
2,609
2,397
1.~40
4. TotallengtlJ 9f the wire at .30 m., long per tie:
.,
. .,
,
..
'
. , 24,696 x .30
14.3 • 3.357 2.1 99 1.635
,
" :r
, , i
5.00 21.0 . 5.49S 3.602 2.678 . =; 7,409 meters.
..
55.0 6.25 17.0 4.525 3.017 2.253 ~
>-, ,
7.50 14.3 3.752 2,524 1.888 • {
..
5. Convert to' kilograms. Divide by 5j, ,
5.00
.
21.0 6,077 3.981 2,960
60.0 6.25 17.0 4.919 .3.223 2,396 ,.
7.50 14,3 4.146 2.717 2,020 7.409 = 139.8 'say 140 kilograms .1
53 . I
128
• , "
129 .!
I
;j
- ~
J
3-12 ONE WAY REINFORCED CONCRETE SLAB ILLUSTRATION 3-15

One of the most commonly used concrete floor systems is From Figure 3-22 of a 'one-way reinforced concrete slab, de-
the solid slab that is continuous over parallel supports. The sup- tennlne the number of 12 mm. steel bars including the tie wire
ports may consist of bearing walls of masonry or a set of evenly required.
spaced ' concrete beams. The principal reinforcement runs in
one direction parallel to the slab span and perpendicular to the A. SOLUTION (By Direct Counting)
supports. One method used in finding the number of steel bars
for a one-way reinforced concrete slab is either by the direct Given Data:
counting or by the area method.
Spacing of main reinforcement = 15 cm.
"';"'!r":. Temperature bar spacing = 30 cm.
'" a.nd bal1l 20 mm clear = 12 mm diameter
Size of the reinforcement
! +
Type of reinforcement = One way
1 . . Find the number of main reinforcements at .15 m. spacing
5.70 = 38 pieces
.15
- --
-- .
- ........
1
1
-~
r-
-=---""';'''::,r
Cutbal1l I
f
107.5
2. This 38 . is the spacing between bars, and to get the
number of steel bars add 1
t
!' Temp bars \ 38 + ,1 = 39 pieces x 6.00 m . main reinforcement.
I
I J \' ! This 39 bars are the alternate straight an~ b,end bars.
II I \
J straig~ bar.
~i I 3. Find the number of cut bars in. between the bent bars.
430 I I I \ II 21 5
8enc:lbal1l
I I t !I 5.70 + 1 =(20 x 2 'sides ) = 40 pes. at 1.40 m.
I V
I
I I 1 ]' I .30
1\
I
I
' Cut balll
1 I
f
I
-L t
1075
4. Using a 6.00 meters steel bar, divide.by 1.40 to get the
number of cut in one steel bar. .
6.00 m. = 4.28 cuts (use 4 disregarding .28 )

-
-~ ~- -.!"~T ,--- - I ' 1.40
" 470 .
'
---
II
5. Divide the result of step 3 by this 4 cuts
40 = 10 pieces at 6.00 m. steel bars

I .
FIGUR:E 3· 22 ONE WAY SLAB REINFORCEMENT 4
130 131
TABLE 3·10 QUANTITY OF REINFORCING STEEL BARS

6. Find the main reinforcement; add step 2 and step 5.
IN A ONE-WAY REINFORCED CONCRETE SLAB
39 + 10 = 49 pieces 12 mm x 6.00 m. Bar Number of Steel Bars per Square Meter
I
Spacing ~
Finding the Shrinkage and Temperature Bars em. 6.00..M, 7.50M. 9.00M. 12.00M.
! I
1. Across the main reinforcement, divide by .30 spacing 10.0 3.764 2.937 2,421 1,769
12.5 3.062 2.381 1.934 1.427
5.50 + 1 = 19.33 say 20 pieces x 6.00 m. 15,0 2.584 2.004 1.636 1.197
17.5 2.232 1.726 1.407 1.033
.30
20.0 1.980 1.528 1.258 0.914 !
22.5 1.786 1.369 1.109 0.810
2. Along the 1.40 m. span top bars. 25,0 1.627 1.250 1.014 0.736
1.40 + I = 5.6 say 6 pieces at 6.00 meters.
.30 • The ACI Code provides that the center to center bar spacing must not be
greater than fIVe times the slab thickness.
3. Since there are ,2 sides at 1.40 m. multiply:
TABLE 3·11 QUANTITY OF TIE WIRE ON A ONE WAY REINFORCED
6 x 2 sides = 12 pieces at 6.00 m.eters long CONCRETE SLAB IN KILOGRAMS PER SQUARE METER
4. Add the results of step I and step 3. Length of Steel ' Bars
20 + 12 = 32 pieces Bar Spacing 6.00M·

. 7.50M 9.00 M 12.00M
- in
Centimeters .30 .40 .30 .40 .30 .40 .30 .40
5. Summary:
I
Main reinforcement: 39 + 10 = 49 pes. 12 mm x 6.00 m.
Temperature bars: 20 + 12 =..1£Jles:...12 mm 'x 6.00 m.
10.0
12.5
15.0
.474 .632
.316 ' .422
.228 .303
.462
,307
.616
.409
.460
.295
.614 .448
.394 .293
.598
,391 I
.217 .289 ,214 ,285 ,207 .276
Total....... 81 pes. 12 mm x 6.00 m. ·17.5 .168 .224 .162 .216 .158 .210 .153 .204
20.0 .132 '.175 .126 .168 .125 ,167 .120 ,160
It will be noted that the preceding, solution by Direct Count- 22.5 .110 .147 .102 .135 .099 ,132 .095 .126
ing Method is some what complicated Considering that there are . 25.0 .089 .118 .086 .114 .081 .108 .077 .103
three different items of reinforcement involved: .
a) The main reinforcement composed of straight and be,nd B. SOLUTION (By the Area Method)
bars;
b) The cut alternate bars between the bend bars-and 1. Detennine the floor area.
c) The shrinkage and temperature bars.
"
Area: 5.70 x 5.50 = 31.35 square mete s
Table 3-10 was prepared for a more simplified solution in
finding the reinforcement of a one way slab by the so called 2. Refer to Table 3-10. Using a 6.00 meter long steel bars
Square Meter Area Method. at 15 em. spacing distance, multiply:
, - 132 .
, '' 133
31.35 x . 2.584 = 81 pieces 12 mm x 6.00 meters. 3~1 TWo.·WA Y REINFORCED CONCRETE SLAB
Solving tlie Tie Wires at. 30 em. long A two-way reinforced' concrete slab consists of a multiple
bays of solid twQ : ,~ay spanning,slab supported by bea'ms or
girder-s. .
Refer to Table 3-11, along b(,r spacing at 15 crn. using
. ' · t- ~ '#
a 30 cm. tie wire, multiply:
I.' .j I I 1', 1 I
j
t~i-
I ' I
31.35 x .228 = 7.15 say 8 kg . # 16. G.I. wire.
. I '"'!-
I
.... 1-,
:-
~IHsr-
.-
I·
I
I I
ILLUSTRATION 3-16 1.80 m' T,I . .~ I I ,F --

From the following floor plan, find the quantity of steel bars
Iii:
J
Bend Bartf
.,....
~ -..
and the tie 'wire required using 12 mm x 7,50 meters steel bars. -
-
3.60 - . 7.20m
7.20
_ _- - - - - _ Beam
r-- I
~2
rt· , Iraight Bars
3.50 mmat .125 m. o.c. ...
I-+..!i-~ Beam -+.Tend Bars i
__
- l Ctlt £jars ~
iI 1.80 m. I "- T-rii -l
3.50
I Ij_ _ _ _ _
+~
il i I 11
. ~:H'
~I ... .....,j Beam
'. ~
I I
"
I
,'-,'1F
FIGURE 3·23 REINFORCED CONCRETE FLOOR PLAN -tr----- Temp. Bars
7.20 m. - _ . . . 'i
PLAN'
SOLUTION
1. Solve for the Area of the floor: 7.20 x 7.00 =50.40 sq. m. 1.87 cut bars Concrete Slab 1.87 cut bms
2. Refer to Table 3-10 along 12.5 spacing, under 7.50 m.

steel bars, multiply:
50.40 x 2.381 = 120 pieces 12 mm x 7.50 m.
3. For tie wire, refer to Table 3-11. using a .30 m. long multiply SECTION
'50.40 x .307 = 15.5 kilograms FIGURE 3·24 REINFORCEMENT OF TWO WAY CONCRETE SLAB
135
134
~LUSTRAION 3.,.17 Floor Area = 7.20 x 7.20 = 51.S4 sq. m.
From Figure 3-24, detennine the number of 12 mm steel 2. Refer to Table 3-12. Using a 7.50 m. steel bars at 10 cm .
bars spaced at 10 cm. on center including the tie wire required. spacing of main reinforcement, multiply:
SOLUTION ( By Direct Counting Method) 5,1.84 x 3.337 = 173 pieces 12mm x 7.50 meters
1. Solve for the number of main reinforcement. TABLE 3-12 QUANTITY OF STEEL BARS IN A TWO WAY
REINFORCED CONCRETE SLAB PER SQUARE METER
3.60 + I = 37 pieces
.10 Bar Spacing Number of Steel Bars per Square Meter
in
2. There are two cross run of main remforcement, multiply: Centimeters 6.00M 7.50M 9.00M 12.00M
37 x2 = 74 pieces 10.0 4.369 3.337 2.772 2.022

12.5 3.603 2.662 2.245 1.635
3. For additional cut bars at 1.80 m. long, 4 cuts can be ob- 15.0 3.221 2.296 1.921 1.382.
tained from a 7.50 m. steel bars. Divide 17.5 2.647 2.025 1.650 1.196
20.0 2.360 1.775 1.461 1.056
74 = 18.5 say 19 pes 12 mm x 7.50 m. steel bars 22.5
25.0
2.168
1.917
1.601
1.466
1.312
1.217
0.907
0.862
4
• The ACt Code provides that the center to center spacing of temperature bars
4. Find the Temperature bars across the 1.80 m. span
must not be greater than five times the slab thickness.
spaced at .20 m. on center.
1.S0 + I = 10 pieces TABLE 3-13 TIE WIRE IN A TWO-WAY REINFORCED CONCRETE

.20 SLAB IN KILOGRAMS PE~ SQUARE METER
5. Multiply by 4 sides at 2 layers, one atihe bottom and one Length of Steel Bars
at the bend bars. (see figure 3-24)
Bar Spacing 6.00M 7.50 M 9.00 M_-+_12_.0.,.0_M__ _
in
10 x S = SO pieces bars at 7.50 m. long
Centimeters.3O .40 .30 .40 .30 .40 .30 .40
-4~+_
6. Summary of steel bars from step 2, 3 and 5. 10.0 .592 .896 .648 .863 .648 .864 .596 .794
12.5 .416 .554 .420 .560 .431 .574 .421 .561
74 + 19 + SO = 173 pieces 12 mm x 7.50 m. 15.0 .350 .466 .307{ .409 .257 .343 .297 .396
17.5 .247 . .330 .231 .308 .223 .298 .206 .275
20.0 .174 .232 .171 .227 .173 .231 .163' .217
SOLUTION (By the Area Method) ' 22.5 .168 .224 .150 .200 .148 .198 .130 .173
25.0 .142 .189 .134.178 .114.152.116 .155
1. Find the area of floor slab
136 137
Solving for the Tie Wire 2. Total length of one ring plus .15 m. splice.
1. Refer to Table 3-13, along 10 cm bar spacing and 30 cm. 3.1416+ .15 = 3.29 meters
long tie wire, multiply by the area:
3. Find the total number of ring at 15 cm. spacing distance.
51.84 x .648 = 33.6
1.00 m. = 6.7 number of spacing distance
2. Order' 37 kilograms of No.16 G.I. wire. .15
3-14 CONCRETE PIPE REINFORCEMENT 4. Add one to get the number of ring: 6.7 + 1 = 7.7 say. 8
pieces at 3.29 meters.
ILLUSTRATION 3-18 5. Find the number of shrinkage and temperature bars at
say .20 m. on center.
From the following Figure, determine the quantity of 10 mm
steel bars and the tie wire required. 3.29 = 16.45 say 17 pieces
.20
Concrete pipe
6. Summary of the Reinforcements
Reinf. Ring
8 pes. 10 mm. x 3.29 m. long
17 PC:S. 10 mm. x 1.00 m. long
Solve for the Tie Wire
1. Total number of ring multiplied by the number of shrinkage

and temperature bars. '
Temp. Bars I 8 x 17 = 136 ties x .30 cm. long per tie = 41 meters
2. Convert this length to kilograms. Divide by 53.

FIGURE 3-25
SOLUTION
41 = .77 say 1.0 kilograms # 1oG.1. wire
53
1. Solve for the circumference of the circle at midpoint of the I
concrete. thickness· t • Problem Exercise

C =1t'd 1. A road construction requires 75 pieces concrete pipe at
C = 3.1416 x (.90 + .10) '= 2.1416 m. 60 centimeters diameter. Compute the number of 8 mm steel
bars, tie wires and the ~(>ncret required using class A mixture.
138 139
METAL REINFORCEMENT
3. From the following circular column, determine the spiral
. 2.) A flood control project requires 80 and 50 pieces con- . reinforcement and the tie wires required under the following
crete pipes with 120 and 90 centimeters diameter respectively. specifications: I
Compute for the following:

a. Spiral reinforcement = 10 mm
a) 10 mm reinforcement for the 120 cm. pipe b. 'Pitch of spiral= 5 cm.
c. Number of columns = 12
b) 8 mm reinforcement for the 90 cm. pipe
d. Height of each column = 5.00 in.
c) Tie wire e. Diameter of the column = 55 centimeters
f. Number of main reinforcement 16 -16 mm
d) Concrete using class A mixture .
3.) From the following figure, find the main and lateral ties
steel reinforcement for 20,columns each with a height of 15 me-
ters.
o =55cm.
12" ~
16 FIGURE 3· 27 SPIRAL COLUMN
4. Determine the required reinforcement and tie wire of a

one way reinforced concrete slab using 12 mm steel bars de-
signed as follows: .
COLUMN A • COLUMN B a.) Main reinforcement 12 mm at 5 inches on center.
b.) Temperature bars 12 ITU11 at 10 inches on center.
FIGURE 3·26
Main Reinforceme.nt 16 mm = Main Reinforcement = 20 mm

Lateral TieS = 10 mm Lateral Ties= 10 mm
Number of column = 20 Number of column = 20
Height =
16 meters Height = 24 meters
4.00m m
Suggested Estimating Procedures
a. For accuracy of the lateral ties cut length make a full scale
drawing then measure the actual length.
5.8.5 5.85
b. Check the length of your tie wire from the actual size of
main steel bars ·and the lateral ties. .
FIGURE 3·28 ONE WAY CONCRETE SLAB
c. Remember the additional length for hook and bend.
141
140
5. A two way reinforced concrete slab will be reinforced by

12 mm steel bars space at 7 Inches and the temperature bars at
14 inches on center. List down the metal reinforcement required CHAPTER
Including the tie wire.
5.60 m. 5.60m.
LUMBER
4-1 .WOOD
5.70m.
Wood is that fibrous substance which composes the trunk

and the brancttes of a tree that lies between the pith and the
bark. The versatility of using wood In every construction has
11.20 lifted it to its present importance and high demand in almost all
types of construction. '"
FIGURE 3·28 REINFORCED CONCRETE SLAB
Even with the introduction of new materials and methods of
construction, wood is evidently .much in use. Wood, because of
its strength, light in weight, durability and ease of fastening be-
come one of the most important building materials.
4-2 DEFINITION OF TERMS

Lumber - is the term applied to wood after it has been
sawed or sliced into boards, pla~ks, timber etc.
Rough Lumber - is the term applied to unplaned or un-

dressed lumber. In short, those lumber with rough surfaces.
S2s and S4s - are dressed lumber wherein the number con-
notes the smooth sides. For instance, S2S means lumber hav-
ing two smooth sides and S4s with four sides.
Slab - is a kind of rough lumber cut tangent to the anri4al

rings running through the ,full length of the log containing at
least one flat surface. '
Surface or Dressed Lumber - is a p laned lumber having at

least one smooth side. ' .
"142
143
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE LUMBER
Timber ' - is a piece of lumber five inches or larger in its 3. With Respect to Leaves - is either:
smallest dimension. a. Needle shape
b. 'Broad shape
Plank - is a wide piece of lumber from 4 to 5 inches thick.
4. With Respect to Shades or Colors
Board -is a pie~ of lumber less than 4 centimeters thick 'a: White
with at least 10 centimeters wide. 'b. Yellow
c. Red
Flitch - iss thick piece of lumber. , d. Brown
e. Black, etc.
Fine Grained - when the annual rings are small, the grain or
marking , which separates the adjacent rings is said to be fine
grained. When large, it is called Coarse Grained.
Sapwood - __!Ii' Modular Rays
Straight Grained - Is a term used when the direction of the
fibers are nearly parallel with the side and edges of the board. Pitch Outer Bark
Heartwood
Camb;ium
Crooked or Cross Grained - is a lumber taken from a
crooked tree. Inner Bark
4-3 CLASSIFICATION OF WOOD Crosa Section of a Tree
Wood that are used in building constructions are those

which grows larger by addition of a layer on the outer surface
each year known to botanists as EXOGENS.
Wood is Classified According to:

;
1. Mode of Growth Crooked Grain Cro.. Graln Straight Grain
a. Indigenous - are those trees that grows from the. FIGURE 4-1
inside. These kind of trees has a soft center core
,and are not preferred for lumbering. 5. With Respect to the Grain
a. Straight
b. Exogenous - are those outward growing trees pre-' b. Cross
ferred for lumbering.
c~ Fine
2. With RespeCt to Density - It Is either: d. Coarse
a. Soft
b. Hard 6. With Respect to the Nature of Surface when Sawed
144 145
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE ' LUMBER
a. Plain _ The Methods and Manner of Log Sawing

b. Grained
c. Figllr8d or Marked 1. Plain or Bastard Sawing
2. Quarter or Rift Saw~ng
a. Radial
Cambined RadiaLand
Tangential b.. Tangential
c. Quarter Tangential
d. Combined Radial and Tangential
4-5 DEFECTS IN WOOD

The term defect refers to irregularities found in wood. And
the most common defects in wood are:
Quarter 'Tangential Tangential Plain or 1. Caused by Abnormal Growth Such as:

Bastard Sawing
a. Heart Shakes are radical cracks in wood origi-
Star Shake nating from the heart of the logs. Heart shake is
commonly found in old trees.
b. Wind Shakes or Cup Shakes . are cracks or

breaks across the annual rings of the wood duro
ing its growth caused by excessive bending of
the tree due to strong wind.
c. Star Shakes are composed of several heart

shakes radiating from the center of the log in a
star like manner.
FIGURE 4·2 METHODS OF LOG SAWING d. Knots - occurs at the starting point of a limb or
branch of the tree.
4-4 METHODS OF LOG SAWING 2. Due To Deterioration
Lumbering is the term applied to the operations performed in a. Dry Rot - is caiused by fungi in a seasoned lum-·
preparing the wood for' commercial purposes. Logging is the
ber due to the presence of moisture.
process or operations from cutting of trees, hauling and delivery
to the sawmill for sawing. Sawing on the other hand is the op- b. Wet Rot - takes place sometime in the growth of
eration of cutting logs into commerCial sizes of lumber. the tree caused by water saturation.
146 147
4-6 SEASONING OF LUMBER The Process of Preserving Wood are:

By nature, trees contain moisture in their cell layers. This 1. External Process. The wood is coated with preserva-
tive applied as paint to penetrate the fibers of ·the
moisture has to be expelled ~horugly to preserve the wood
from shrinkage or d~cay. Experiments proved that wood im- wood.
mersed .in water immediately after cutting is less subject to split- 2. Internal process. A chemical compound is impreg-
nated at a prescribed pressure to permeate the ' wood
ting and decay. It reduces warping but become brittle and less
elastic. Soaking of wood in liquid is the oldest method of sea~ thoroughly
soning lumber introduced and practiced by the ancient Roman
builders. 4-7 THE UNIT MEASURE OF LUMBER
Methods of Seasoning Lumber Board Foot is the unit of meaSure used in computing the
volume of lumber. Despite the adoption of the Mettie System
1. The Natural Sunlight or Air- Seasoning Process is (SI). board foot for lumber is still in use for convenience and
considered as one of the best method used in seasoning practical use. One board foot simply mean, one square foot by
of wood although the period involved is relatively longer. one-inch thick lumber or an equivalent of 144 cubic inches. The
width and thickness of commercial lumber are expressed in
2. The Artificial Seasoning is a process where lumbers are inches while the length is in feet 6f even numbers.
stacked in a drying kiln and then exposed to steam and
hot air. Under this method, lumber undergoes a quick Board foot is found by dividing the product of the thickness,
drying process. the width and the length by 12.
The Artificial Methods of Seasoning Wood are: ILLUSTRATION 4-1

1. By Forced Air Drying Find the total board feet of 5 pieces 2" x 6" x 14- ft. lumber.
2. By Kiln Drying
3. By Radio Frequency Dielectric Drying
SOLUTION
Good seasoning is the primary consideration for successful
preservation of wood. Wood does not decay naturally through
Board foot =5 x 2 x 6 x 14 ft. = 70 bd. ft.
12
age, nor will it decay if it is kept constantly dry or continuously
submerged in water. Finding the board foot of a commercial size lumber is as
simple as the above illustration. But the question is how to find
The Common Causes of Decay in Wood are: the net board foot of a round log or a standing tree knowing its
diameter and height? This que~ion can be answE'red using the
1. Alternate moisture and dryness following formula: . .
2. Fungi or molds
3. Insects and worms Bd. Ft. Volume = (D - 4 ) 1 X L
4: Heat and confined air· 16
149
148
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE L~
Where: D = The smaller diameter of the iog , The board foot method is simply computing the total board
,L = The length of the log foot of sawed lumber then multiplied by the agreed price per
4 = Constant as reduction factor board foot. On the other hand, the meter length method is mul-
tiplying the width in inches by the tength in meter times the
agreed unit price per meter run.
ILLUSTRATION 4-2 '
ILLUSTRATION 4-3
Determine the total board foot lumber which could be derived
from a round log 28 inches diameter by 6.00 ,meters (20) long
as shown in Figure 4-3.
How much will it cost to slice a
6" x 6" x 3.00 meters wood
to produce a 2 x 6 lumber if the unit price'ls P2.00 per board ft .
•• :\0 " ,"
6"
6,00 m (20') ------'.1

i=IGURE 4-3 NET BOARD FOOT IN A LOG Line of cutting
FIGURE4~
SOLUTION
1. Substitute given data in the formula: SOLUTION ( By Board Foot Method)
( 28 .;.. 4 ) 2 X 20 ft. = 720 bet ft. 1. Find the total board foot of lumber
r
16
6" x 6" x 10ft = 30 bd. ft.
In solving board foot of iumber, convert first all measure- 12
ments from Metric to English. Take note that the thickness and ·
width are in inches and length in feet. • 2. Multiply by the unit price say P 2.00
30 x 2.00 = P60.00
Manner of Payment in Sawing or Slicing Lumber'
There are two methods of computing payment for slicing or SOLUTION (By Inch-M~ter Method)
sawing lumber.
1.' Multiply. the width by the length
1. By board foot or
2. By meter le,ngth 6" x 3.00 = 18
150 151
1
LUMBER
2. For a two story building, verify if the height indicates
2. Multiply by number of cut from floor to floor. If so then consider the, additional
depth of the girder, the floor joist and the flooring. And
18 x 2 = 36 Inch - Meter
for the second floor, add the depth of the girts, bottom
chord or rafters to the height of the post.
3. Multiply by the unit cost
36 x 1.65 = P 59.40 3. Take note that the commercial length of lumber is al-
ways of even number. If the computed length is odd
number adjust the order to the next even number
4-8 WOOD POST length.
In estimating wooden post for building structure, there are

only three t hings to consider: " " ILLUSTRATION 4-4
1. The size of the post From Figure 4-5, determine the length and board"loot of the
2. The quantity or number of posts posts required if there are 8 pieces 6- x 6- wood posts.
3. The length or height of the posts
SOLUTION
The size of the post is already indicated in the plan. The
quantity is directly counted in the plan and the length is deter- 1. Find'the total height of the post from floor to ceiling
~ined through the following considerations:
2.70 + 2.70 =.5.40 m.
1. For one story building, verify if the elevation height indi-
cates from floor to ceiling. If the ceiling is below the girts 2. Detennine the depth ofthe girder, floor joist, flooring and
add the depth of the girts including the bottom chord OlY the girts.
the rafters to the height of post. Girder = .20
----- ------
=
Floor joist .15 ..
Flooring = .025
M : :~ : ~: : : : :~i; ,~t: :i : :~ ~ :~ : ~: : :*~ { ~ ~ : :~ : :~;ln : :\}f : ~:1
Girts = .20
.575m.
Girts
'-+ • -r
F%+: -. ~-
3. Add results of 1 and 2 to get the total length.
2,70
F1~ring
Floor joist r-+.....'I""III-....,;;,....,;-----..."- ~ L- -' L = 5.40 + .575
Girder ~p =5.975 meters
Post -.-- 2.70
Floor line
4. Convert to feet: 5.975 = 20 ft
.30
Ground line
i , ,FIGURE 4-6
5. Order:.a - 6- x 6- x 20' = 480 board ft.
153
152
I
I
4-9 GIRDER
Girder is the structural member of a building that canies the
floor joist and the flooring. It is determine by Direct Counting
Method based on the framing plan of the building. The length
however, is subject to the following considerations:
1. If the span or distance of the post is indicated from cen- . Post

ter to center, the length of the girder is equal to the span · L = Span + ( 1/2 side of post)
plus one side width of the post (Figure 4-6).
FIGURE 4-8 CENTER TO OUTER SPAN
4. If the span or distance of the post indicates inside meas-

urement, the length of the girder is equal to the span plus
two width of the post. (Figure 4-9).
L = Span + 2(112 side of post)

FIGURE '.~ CENTER TO CENTER SPAN o
2. If the span of the post indicates from outer to outer side

Post
of the post, the girder length is equal to the span of the
post. L =Span + Overhang
Span
FIGURE 4-9
Flooring .
5. If the second floor has overhang, wherein the girder has
to carry the floor joist, the girder length is equal to the
Girder span plus the overhang (Figure 4-9). _
I,. = Span of post 4.;10 FLOOR JOIST AND WOOD FLOORING

FIGURE 4-7 OUTER SPAN
Floor Joist is the structural member of a building that sup-
ports the wood flooring. Floor joist is estimated by direct ~ount
3. If the span of the post indicates from center to outer side ing method based on the floor framing plan. However, I~ the
of the posts, the length of th~ girder is equal to the span absence of a detailed plan, estimating could also be done If the
plus one half the width 'of one post.
spacing and length of the girder is known
154
155
f
IH~-U Floor Joist

Girder
-~r _ .' ~~ 1-L.·H~0 ~I-"'oli1
~-
Post P~st S.OOM. S.OOM.
FIGURE 4-11 FLOOR JOIST AND WOOD FLOORING
SOLUTION
A. Finding the Floor Joist
FIGURE 4- 10 FLOOR JOIST AND T & G FLOORING 1. Determine the length of the girder. Divide by the spacing
of the floor jOists.
T & G is the popular name for Tongue and Groove wood
board used for flooring, ceiling, paneling, forms etc. The thick-
5.00 = 16.6
.30
ness of the board varies from 16 to 20 mm. Its width also varies
from 7.5 to 15 centlmeters. · Other sizes for Architectural pur- 2. This number represents the spacing of the joist. Add one
poses are obtained through special order. to get the exact number of fI,oor joist.
There are two methods presented how to determine the re- 16.6 + 1 = H.6 say 18 pieces
quired number of pieces and board foot of T&G for a known
floor area. 3. For two span, multiply: 18 x 2 = 36 pieces.
4. Determine the length of the floor joist in feet.

1. By Direct Counting method or
2. By Board Foot per square meter 3.50 = 11.66 say 12 feet.
.30
ILLUSTRATION 4-5
Order: 36 pieces 2- x 6" x 12 ' = 432 board foot
From the floor framing plan as shown in Figure 4-11, deter-
B. ,Solid Bridging
mine the nuniber and boarq foot of floor joist and the T & G
flooring required. 1. Find the length of the girder In feet:
';11
156 157
5.00 = 16.66 ft . D. Finding T &G Flooring by the Area Method

.30
1. Find the floor area,
1. Find the total number and thickness of the joist
3.50 x 10.00 m. = 35.0 square meters
18 x 2 inches thickness = 36" or 3 ft.
2. Refer to Table 4-1 ,Using 10 mm. wood board multiply:
2. Subtract from step - 1 35.0 x 13.714 = 480 bd. ft.
16.66 - 3 ft. = 13.66 or 14 feet 3. Order 480 board foot 1" x 4" T &-G. or to be specific con-
vert the board foot to number of boards.
4. Order: 2 pes. 2" x 6" x 14 ft. = 28 bd. ft.
1" x 4" x 12" = 4 bd. ft. Divide: 480 = 120 pieces
TABLE 4-1 QUANTITY OF WOOD FLOORING AND SIDING BOARD 4
PER SQUARE METJ:R AREA
4-11 SIDING WOOD BOARD
Size of Board Effective Width Board Foot
In Inches in Meter p~r Sq. M. The common types of commercial siding wood boards are:
1" x 3" .0625 14.400 1. Stone cut 4. BCB Cut
1" x 4" .0875 13.714 2. Double Stone Cut 5. Weather cut
3. V~ Gut
1" x 5" .1125 13.333
1" x 6" .1375 13.091
C. Finding T&(; Flooring By Direct Count Single Cut Double Cut BCB
1. Find the length of the floor joist = 3.50 m.
2. Using 4" T&G, divide by the effective width.
3.50 = 40 pieces x 2 span = 80 pieces. V-Cut Weather Cut

.0875
FIGURE 4-1~ SIDING WOOD BOARD
3. Length of girder is 5.00 m. or 18 feet.
The thickness of siding wood board varies from 16, to 20
4. Order: 80 - 1" x 4" x 18 ft = 480 board foot. mm. Likewise, the width ranges from 15 mm (6j to 20 mm (8j
of even length from 8 to 16 feet. The quantity is estimated un- __
5. If 18 ft. lis not avail"le: ( ord~ 120 - 1" x 4" x 12 ft. der the following considerations: '
f
I 158 159
~ J
LUMBER
1 . The area of the opening such as windows, doors and the SOLUTION
like are subtracted from the gross area of the wall to be
covered by the siding wood boards. 1. Determine the total length of the wall board
2. Consider the additional -depth length for the girts, floor-
ing, floor joist and the girder. FIQOr to ceiling 3.18
3. The length of the siding wood board must be specified Depth of girts .25
to avoid joints in between the heights. Flooring and joist .17
Depth of girder .30
ILLUSTRAnON 4-6
3.90 m. = 13 ft.
Order length . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 14 ft.
From the following Figure, find the number of 8 inches Oou-
ble Stone Cut siding wood board. 2. Length of the wall = 5.00 - ~.O window = 3.00 m.
3. Refer to Table 4-2 for an 8- or 20 ,em. wood board,

5.00m. multiply:
3.00 x 5.33 = 16 pieces.

4. Order: 16 pes. 1- x 8- X 14i = 149.3 board ft.
12
3.00 8" Double atone cut
.50 ........- - + - SOLUTION - 2 ( By Board Foot per Square Meter)
2.00 1. Solve for the wall area:
3.90 x 3.00 m. = 11.7 sq. m.

2. Refer to Table 4-2. Using 8- wood board,
FIGURE 4·13 multiply:
TABLE 4·2 QUANTITY OF SIDING WOOD BOARD

11.7 x 12.76 = 149.3
Size of Wood Board Number per Approx. Board Ft. 3. If 6- wood board will be used then from Table 4-2,
Inches Centimeter Meter Run per Sq. Meter multiply:
6 15 7.27 17.40
11 .7 x 17.40 = 203.58 board ft.
8
-20 5.33 12.76 4. Order:' 204 board ft. 1- x 6- x 14 ft.
161
160
T
1
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ~STIMAE LUMBER
4-12 ROOF FRAMING 1. By Direct Counting Method

I
2. By the Square Meter Method
Roof framing comprises the . girts, bottom chord, rafters,
purlins collar plate, center post, strut and .blocks are comp~ed By Direct Counting Method is Simply counting the number
by direct counting method. Shorter parts like collar ~Iates, km~
of vertical and hOrizontal member from a detaile,d plan. In the
post, strut and wood blocks are determined acordm~ to their absence of a detailed drawing plan, an imaginary counting
sizes combined together and adjusted to the commercial le~gth through arithmetical calculation will do.
of lumber. For accuracy .of estimating these items, ,a detailed
drawing indicating their sizes and length should be made as By the Area or Square. Meter Method is simply finding the
basis in finding the unit length of every parts. wall area multiplied by the values given in Table 4-2 corre-
sponding to the size and spacing of the studs.
• ... Collar plate . TABLE 4-3 NUMBER OF BOARD FOOT OF STUDS AND NAILING
Wood block . ,.. 1""'0,., J Diagonal strut JOIST PER SQUARE METER
II
Td·~'f:, . . . ~
Lumber
size in
Inches 30x30
Spar:ing in Centimeters (Center to Center)
30x60 40x40 40x60 60x60

~;H Bottom chord / Girts~H ~ ,1 x 2 4.103 3.147 3.189 2.686 2.268
Post- 2x2 8.198 6.293 6.379 5.373 4.594
2x3 12.284 9.440 9.569 8.060 6.898
FIGURE 4-14 2x4 16.414 12.592 12.758 10.746 9.195
4-13 STUD
ILLUSTRATION 4-7
Stud is the structural member in building . construction
wherein the sidings or partition boards are fastend l l~ is some-
A wall partition 5.80 meters long and 3.40 meters high spec-
times referred to as the ribs of wooden walls or partitions. Lum-
ify the use 2" x 3" studs spaced at 60 centimeters on center
ber intended for studs should be straight and uniform in width of
both ways. Find the total board foot required.
either S2s or S4s for uniformity of wall thickness.
S.80m.
Advantage of Using S2s and S4s Lumber
1. Good quality, straight and uniform in thickness. 3.40m. t.-t-t-+-t......."'fo-o1t-+-t-t 'Z' x 3" studs
2. .It is economical in terms of labor cost. H-+-1-t....~H'1-t .60 o. c.
3. The work progress is not affected or delayed.
There are twO methods presnt~d on how,to find the qu'an-

tily of studs at a given ·vertlcal and horizontal ·spacing. FIGURE 4 - 16 WALL STUDS
! 162 163
1
S.sOM.
SOLUTION -1 ( By Direct Counting) 2 x 3 at .60 horizontal studs.
l' . Find the number of Vertical Studs

t--t--+-I--+--+-I--I--Io-'-.... 2 x 3@ .40 m.
5.80 = 10 (rounded) Num~r of spacing 1-+-+-+-+-1-.....4--1-"--1 vertical studs.
.60 . 4.00M.
2. Add 1 to get the number of studs.
10 + 1 = 11 at 3.40 m .or (12 ft.)

3. Find the number of Horizontal Studs. FIGURE 4-16
3.40 + 1 = 7 at 5.80 m. or ( 20 ft.)

.60
ILLUSTRATION 4-8
4. Order: Vertical Studs 11 - 2" x 3· X 12' = 66 A wall partition of Figure 4-16 measures 5.80 meters long by
Horizontal Studs 7 - 2" x 3" X 20' = 70 4.00 meters high specify 2" x 3" wood studs spaced at 60 cen-
Total... ... 136 bd. ft. timeters for vertical and 40 centimeters for horizontal center to
center distance. Find the number of board foot required.
SOLUTION -2 ( By The Area Method)
SOLUTION --1 (By Direct Counting)
1. Find the area of the wall partition.
Area: 5.80 x 3.40 = 19.72 sq. m. 1. Find the number of vertical studs
2. Refer to Table 4-2 Using 2" x 3" at :60 x .60 m. spacing 5.80 = 9.7 say 10 spacing
multiply .60
19.72x 6.898 = 136 bd. ft. 2" x 3" lumber. 2. Add 1 to get the number of vertical studs:
Comment 10 + 1 = 11 pes. 2 x 3 x 5.80 m. or (14 ft.)

1 . Computation by the Area Method give results in board 3. Find the number of Horizontal studs.
foot unlike the direct Counting Method where the· number
of pieces and length of the lumber were known outright 4.00 = 10
, ahead of the board foot. As to which met~od will be used .40
depends uJ)9ti the choice and purpose of the estimator.
; 4. Add 1 to get the number of Horizontal studs.
2. There. are instances where small discrepancies arise be-
tween the results of the two methods. This is due to the
adjustment of lumbel' from od~ to even length.
10 + 1 = j1 pieces 2" x 3" x 5.80 m. or {20 ft}
165
164
.1
,SIMP,LIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE LUMBER
/
5. Order: 11-- 2" x 3" x 14' = 77 bd. ft. ILLUSTRATION 4-9

11 - 2" x 3" x 20' = 110 bd. ft.
Find the total board foot required for a 4.00 x 5.80 meters
187 bd. ft. living room using 2" x 2" ceiling joist spaced at 40 x 40 centime-
ters on cel)ter. (see figure 4-17)
SOLUTION - 2 (By the Area Method)
SOLUTION -1 ( By direct counting)
1. Find the area of the wall partition
1. Find the number of joist perpendicular to 5.80 meters.
Area: 5.80 x 4.00 = 23.2 sq. m. 5.80 = 14.5 say 15 spacing of joist
.40
2. Refer to Table 4-2. Using 2" x 3" at 40 x 60 cm. multiply:
2. Add 1 to get the exact number of jOists. \
23.2 x 8.060 =187 bd. ft.
15 + 1 = 16 pieces at 4.00 m. or (14 ft.)
4-14 CEILING JOIST 3. Find the number of joist perpendicular to 4.00 m. span.
Ceiling joist is the structural member in building constructioo \ 4.00 = 10 spacing + 1 = 11 pes. at 5.80 or ( 20 ft.)
where the ceiling board is fastened. It is otherwise known as the .40
nailing strip. The common size used for ceiling joist are 1 x 2 ;
1 % x 2; 2 x 2 arid, 2 x 3 lumber spaced to suit the size of the
4. Order: 16 pes. 2 x 2 x 14 ft. = 74.66
ceiling board. In short, the ceiling board dimensions govern the 11 pes. 2 x 2 x 20 ft. = 73.33
spacing of the ceiling joist for economical reasons.
Total......... 147.99 bd. ft.
Vertical 5. If 20 feet is not available, the order could be:
2x2@ ,4OM.
5.80M. 16 pes. 2 x 2 x 14 ft. = 74.66
22 pes. 2 x 2 x 10 ft. = 73.33
Total...... 147.99 bd. ft."
4.00 M.
SOLUTION - 2 ( By the Area Method)
1. Find the area of the ceiling.
!
4.00 x 5.80 = 23.2 sq. m.
Horizontal 2 x 2 @ .40 M. 2. ,Refer to Table 4-3 USing 2" x 2" at 40 x 40 cm~ multiply:
FIGURE 4-17 CEILING JOIST , 23.2 x 6.379 = '147.99 bd. ft ,
166 167
.I i
LUMBER
4-15 CEILING BOARD 1. Find the area of the ceiling;. 4.00 x 5.00 = 20 sq. m.
There are numerous kinds ~ f ceiling board of different brand, 2. See Table 4-3 Using 2 x 2 at .40 x .60 spacing, multiply:
quality and dimensions a V 31~'h !e for building construction.
However, the simplest way of fil ding the number of boards re- 20 sq. m. x 5.373 = 107.46 bd. ft.
107.46 x 5 = 537.3 bd. ft. of 2- x 2-
quired is to divide the total ceiling area by the effective covering
3. For 5 rooms
of one ceilIng board chosen or by the square meter method with
the aid of Table 4-3.
B. Ceiling Board
ILLUSTRATION 4-10 1. Find the area of ceiling: Area: 4.00 x 5.00 = 20 sq. m
2.. Refer to Table 4-4. Using a 1.20 x 2.40 m. plywood,

A bedroom with a general dimenso~ of 4.00 x 5.00 meters divide:
specify the use of 1/4" x 4- x 8- plywood ceilng on a 2- x 2- ceil-
ing joist spaced at 40 x 60 centimeters. Find the number of ply- 20 sq, m. = 7 pieces per room
wood and the ceiling joist required if there are 5 rooms of the 2,88
same size.
3. For 5 rooms, order 35 - %- x 4' x 8' plywood
TABLE .... QUAN1TrY OF Cb.JNG BOARD PER SQUARE METER

ao.dsa. Number of pieces
InC. ........ per Square Meter
3Ox30 0.09 11 .111

4Ox40 0.16 6.250
4.00m. 4Ox60 0.24 4.167
6Ox60 0.36 2.n8
60x 120 .0.72 1.389
SOx 180 1.62 0.617
120 x 240 2.88 0.347
ILLUSTRATION 4-11
FIGURE 4-18 CEIUNG PLAN An office room measures 6.00 x 9.60 meters long specify a
60 x 120 em. ceiling board, List down the materials required.
SOLUTION ( By the effective coverage method)
SOLUTION-l ( By Effective Area Coverage Method)
A. Ceiling Joist
1. Find the area of the ceiling.
168
169
SIMPL.lFQ:D CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE LUMBER
1. That the quotient in dividing the area of the ceiling by the

Area : 6.00 x 9.60 = 57.6 sq. m.
effective area covering of one board yields an exact num-
2. Refer to Table 4-3. Using a 60 x 120 'ceiling board, divide ber or value (no fraction).
the area by its effective covering. 2. That the , ceiling design is plain and not interrupted by
beams, girders, rafters and the like.
57.6 = 80 pieces 60 x 120 ceiling board. 3. That the ceiling has no intricate design or decorations that
.72 ' requ·ires more ~uting of the ceiling board.
4. When cutting of the board could not be avoided, wastage
9.60m. is also inevitable but could be replenished by an allow-
arice factor of about 2 to 5% depending upon the design.
ILLUSTRATION 4-12
6.00m
An elementary classroom building has a general dimensions
of 6.80 x 8.00 meters specify the use of a 90 x 180 centimeters
ceiling board.j=-.ind the number of ceiling boards required for a
12 classrooms.
B,QOm,
FIGURE 4-19 CElUNG PLAN
SOLUTION- 2 (By Direct Counting Method)

1. Find the number of boards along the 6.00 meters.
6.00 m. = 10 pieces 6.BOm .

.60 '
2. Find the number of board along the 9.60 meters span.
9.60 m. = 8 pieces
1.20
3. Multiply the results of1 and 2 FIGURE 4-20 CEILING PLAN
10 x 8 = 80 pieces 60 x 120 ceiling board. I

SOLUTION -1 (By the Effective Area Coverage Method)
Comment:
1. Find the area of the ceiling .
The result of the two methods as presented are correct if the
ceiling area falls under the following conditions: 6.80 x 8.00 = 54.40 square meters
171
170
LUMBER
2. Refer to Table 4-4. Using a .90 x 1.80 cm. ceiling board;
divide: ILLUSTRATION 4-13
54.40 = 33.6 pieces
1.62 A 20 classroolJl building with 2 doors each specify 3" x 6"
door jamb. List down the materials needed for fabrication .
3. For 12 classroo/Tls: 33.6 x 12 = 403 pieces SOLUTION
SOLUTION -2 ( By Direct Counting Method) A. Ordering one length for each jamb.
1. Find the number of board along the 6.80 meters side. 1. Determine the total length of the jamb.
6.80 = 7.555 pieces Jamb = (7' + 3" ) x 2
.90 = 14.5 ft.
2. Length of Header: 3' + 6"
2. Find the number of board along the 8.00 meters side. = 3.5 ft.
8.00 = 4.44 pieces
Total length = 18.0 ft.
3. Ordr.r: 40 peS. 3"x6"x18'
1.80 = 1,080 board ft.
3. Multiply 1 and 2:
Header
7.55 x 4.44 = 33.57

4. For 12 classrooms, multiply: . Jamb thickness .
varies trom 5 cm
to7cm -_-+
33.57 x 12 = 403 pieces.
2.10 m.
4-16 DOOR FRAME
Estimating the material for fabrication of door frame is simply .90

determining the size and length of the lumber that will accom-
modate the door panel whose width varies from 60 to 100 cen- FIGURE 4-21 DOOR JAMB
timeters wide. Door panel and frame bigger"' than one meter
.width is considered special design and order. • B. Combination of Jambs and Headers
In ordering lumber for door frame, the estimator has two op- 1. One header is 3' - 6" dr.. .... . 3.5 ft.
tions:
2. Total length of 4 headers is 14.0. ft.
1. Ordering 18 feet long for each door jamb and header or 3. For 40 headers, order 10 pcs. 3" x 6." x 14 ft.
2. A combinalion of 7 and 10 feet for jamb and head.er.
4. For jambs = 7.3" + 3" x 2 sides =14'-6" or 16 ft.
172
173
1
Lumber length is of even numbers, for 40 jambs order: ILLUSTRATION 4-14
40 pes. 3" x 6" x 16' = 960 bd. ft. A low cost housing project requires 50 pieces window frame
10 pes. 3" x 6" x 14' = 210 bd. ft. as shown in figure 4-22. List down the materials needed for fab-
TotaL ..... 1,170 bet. ft. rication .
Comment: SOLUTION
1. Jamb: (150 + 5 + 5) x 2 pes. = 320 em. or 12 ft.
Comparing the results of the two methods, there is a differ-
ence of 90 board feet if the second method is used. However,
considering the scarcity of lumber, length from 16 teet and
Order: 50 pes. 2" x 6" x 12 ft. = 600 bd. ft.
12
above may not be available in the market and the only choice is
to order shorter length from 8 to 12 feet.
2. Header and sill: (220 + 10) x 2 = 460" or 16 ft.
The price of lumber varies according to its length and width. ./
Order: 50 pes. 2" x 0'" x 16 ft. or

The longer the need, the higher is the price.
100 pcs. 2" x 6" x 8 ft. = 800 bd. ft.
4-17 WINDOW FRAME 12
The different parts of a window frame to be considered in 3. Mullion 100 - 2" x 4" x 1.50 m. or
estimating are: Jamb, Sill, Header, Transom and Mullions. 50- 2" x 4" x 3.00m .
Order: 50 - 2" x 4" x 10 ft.

2 x 6 H~ader
5em~ 4. Transom: 100 - 2" x 6" x (2.20 + 10)
Order: 100 - 2" x 6" x 8 bd. ft. = 800 bd. ft.

12
150 em.
" - 2 x 6 Jamb Problem Exercise
1. From the following figure, list down the floor framing ma·
terials required :
r 220 em. 1 (a) Girder,

(b) Floor jOist
(c) Header and bridghig
FIGURE 4·22 WINDOW FRAME (d) 1" x 4" T&G wood flooring .
174 175 .
3. From the following ceiling plan, list down the required

materials:
a) 1.20 x 2.40 m. marine plywood

I
b) 2" x ·2" ceiling joists'40 x .60 m. on center.
4;50m. 4.50m. 4.00m.
I-
2" x 6' floor joist at 30 crr . o.C. 30.00 M.
2x Bridging I-
4.oom
Gir e\
- B.ooM.
iIo
Header
PLAN
2~6 Joist 3. 5Om.
Flooring -1" x 4" T & G.
Floor joist - 2" x 6" - Girder
Girder - 2" x 8" pair 3.5 Om.
Heeader i
4.50
FIGURE 4-23
2. A 10 door apartment 40 meters long by 10 meters wide FIGURE 4-26 CEILING PLAN
requires 2 x 6 floor joist and 1" x 6" T&G wood flooring . Find the
number of board foot required for floor joist and T&G flooring.
4. Twenty one roof framing of classroom building specify the
10.00M. use of wood trusses on a concrete beam as shown on Figure 4-
24. List down the following materials required: (make an scaled
2 x 6 fir. joist
oy drawing at 1:20 to get the accurate length of every parts)
~,
@.300.c.
. VV a.) Bottom chord
4.ooM. B.R. b.) Top Chord
vV . 0 c.) Pur1ins 2" x 4"
I--
,/ B.R. d.) King post
/ e.) Vertical strut
1/ 1. 1 1.90
f.) Diagonal strut
g.) Collar plate and blqcks.
FIGURE 4-24
177
176
/
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ·ESTIMATE
2- 2" x 6" collar plate CHAPTER

~-, 2" x 6" king post
, x 4" diagonal strut
, ,"~ , '. ,. ~" x 4" vertical strut
~'f;:. ~
block . ~:'j<t" .. ~" '~ ':%::,,-, 2" x 6" top chord
1 50 ~f» t1' , .% <»
FORM, S~AFOLDING
w,~ .
I .
'. W 2- 2" x 6" bottom chord joint block ..,<

AND STAGING
5-1 FORMS
10.00 m.
The structural members of a building are built-up into its de-
FIGURE 4-26 ROOF TRUSSES
sired shapes and dimensions through the use of form. Form is a
temporary boarding, sheathing or pan used to produce the de-
sired shape and size of concrete.
Concrete mixture is generally semi-fluid that reproduces the

shape of anything into which it is poured. Thus, concrete forms
shall be water tight, rigid and strong enough ' to sustain the
weight of fresh concrete.
Forms must be simple and economically designed in such a

manner that they are easily removed and reassembled without
oamage to themselves or to the concrete.
Selection of Forms are based on:

1. Cost of the materials
2. Construction and assembling cost
3. The number of times it could be used
4. .Strength and resistance to pressure and tear and wear.
Classification of Forms:
A. As to Materials
1. W ood 3. Plastic I ,
2. Metal 4. Composite
178
!:
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE FORM,SCAFFOLDING' AND STAGING
B. As to Shape A thicker mixture is recommended on warm weather condi-

1. Straight . tion. However, greasing of forms should not be allowed after the
2. Circular, etc. steel bars have been set to its position. Metal forms also need
oil application to prevent rust formation ,
C. Solid or Hollow Cast
1. Single
2. Double 5-2 PLYWOOD AS CONSTRUCTION FORM
D. As to Methods of Construction Plywood IS a versatile construction material used as wall
1. Ordinary partitions, cabinets, and furniture . Plywood is also utilized in
2. Unit boat building as well as forms for reinforced concrete construc-
tions.
E. As to Uses
1. Foundation 4. Beam and girders
2. Wall 5. Slab Plywood as Form has the following .advantages.
3. Steps 6. Sidewalk, etc.
1. It is economical in terms of labor cost.
F. Construction of fonns consist of: 2. It is lightweight and handy
1. Retaining board 4. Spacer 3. It has smooth surface which may not require plastering
2. Supporters or studs 5. Tie wire 4. Less consumption of nails
3. Braces 6. Bolts and nails 5. Ease of assembling and disassembling
6. Available
G. Types of Post and Wall fonn
1. Continuous Plywood is manufactured in various thickness ranging from
2. Full unit 4; 6; 12; 20 and 25 mm with a standard commercial sizes of
3. Layer unit .90 x 1.80 and 1.20 x 2.40 meters.
a. Continuous
b. Sectional
5-3 FORMS FOR SQUARE AND RECTANGULAR
Greasing of Forms COLUMN
Fonns are constantly greased before its use. The purpose of- IRdetermining the materials for square and-rectangular col-
greasing the form is to make the wood waterproof preventing umn forms, one has to consider the following:
the absorption of water in the concrete which .causes swelling
and warping. Greasing of forms also prevent the adherence of 1; The thickness of the bQard to be used.
concrete into the pores of the wood. 2. The size of the frame
Crude oil is the most economical and satisfactory materials 3. Types of framework to be adopted
for this purpose. The crude oil is mixed with No. 40 motor oil to
a proportion of 1:3 mixtures or with varying viscosity depending a.) Continuous rib type
upon the temperature condition. b.) Stud type
180 181
I
SIMPLIFIEP CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE FORN!, SCAFFOLDING AND STAGING
e ,
.30 e
+-!!£§::§:::S@:§::::':!!g...- Plywood
STUD TYPE .40

CONTINUOUS RIB TYPE
-
FIGURE 5-1 TYPES OF FORM · PLAN
Fonnula in Finding the Materials for Square and .30 .40

Rectangular Column Fonns ELEVATION OF FORMS
FIGURE 5- 2 PLYWOOD FORM ON 2 X 2 FRAME

(1)
SOLUTION
Where: P = lateral perimeter of the column
a =
shorter side of the column A. Solving for the Plywood fonn
b = the longer side of the column
.20 = constant value for the lapping of form joints 1. Find the lateral perimeter of one colu;rln using the for-
mula: .
(2) Multiply P by the height of one column times the p = 2 ( a + b ) + .20 ~
number of columns to get the total area of the forms. P = 2 ( .30 + .30) + .20
P = 1.40 m.
(3) Divide the total area found by 2.88 to get the number
of plywood forms. 2. Multiply P by the column height and the number of col-
umns to find the total area of the forms.
(4 ) Multiply the number of plywood found by 29.67 to get
the board foot of frame required .
Area = 1.40 x 4.00 x 6 columns.
A= 33.6 sq~are meters.
ILLUSTRATION 5-1
3. Divide this area by 2.88, the area of one plywood form to
Six concrete posts at 4.00 meters high with a uniform cross get the number of plywood required.
sectional dimensions of .30 x .30 m. specify the use of 6 mm
(1/4") marine plywood on a 2" x 2~ wood frame. List down the No. of Plywood: 33.6 = 11.7 say 12 pieces.
materials required using a continuous rib type forms. 2.88
1'82 183
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE FORM, SCAFOL~ING AND STAGING
Comment ILLUSTRATION 5-3

1. Take note, if 2" x 2" wood frame will be used, the multi- From Fig.ure 5-4, determine the required metal black sheet
plier is 29:67 board foot. On the other han<~, If 2" x 3" form for 8 circular columns 4.00 meters high each with a uni-
lumber will be used, the multiplier is 44.50 board foot. form cross-.sectional diameter of 60 centimeters.
2. If thicker plywood board will be used as form, the spac-
ing of the frame could be ·increased reducing its board .60 m.
foot by 20% to 30%.
5- 4 FORMS FOR CIRCULAR COLUMN

H = 4.00 m.
The plain galvanized iron sheet and black sheets are com- '
monly used as sheeting for circular, oval, elliptical and other
similar types considering its versatility in forming any shape of
geometrical design. . .
Metal sheet form is supported by metal frame of either plain

bars, angular, tee or circular in cross section or whatever speci- CROSS SECTION ELEVATION
fied in the plan.
FIGURE 5-4 CIRCULAR COLUMN METAL FORMS
Estimating Procedures: SOLUTION: .

1. Find the circumferential area of the circular column using
the formula: 1. Solve for the circumference of one column .
C = 3.1416 x diameter x Height x No. of columns C = 3.1416 x .60 m. = 1.88 meters
2. Divide the area found by the effective area covering of 2. Multiply by column height to find the surface area .
one metal sheet.
Area: 1.88 x 4.00 = 7.52 sq. m.
3. Count the number of ribs or support classified as to their
kind and length then convert to commercial size of steel 3. Find the Area of the 8 columns, multiply:
bars.
Total surface Area: 7.52 x 8 = 60.16 sq . m.
4. In estimating materials for any particular work, a detailed
,plan is imperative. Without a detailed plan, expect a half 4. Find the Number of Sheet required. Refer to Table 5-2.
hazard result even from your prightest estimator. USing a 1.20 x 2.40 m. black sheet, multiply:
186 187
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE FORM.
. SCAFFOLDING
. AND .STAGING ~
No. of sheet: 60.16 x .347 = 21 pieces 2. In. addition to the materials a$. computed, the estimator
has to consider the locking·devices and the welding rod neces-
5. Find the number of Vertical Support (ribs) at 15 em. sary for assembling the (orms. The number of locking bolts de-
spacing distance. Refer again to Table ·5-2. Multiply: pends upon the spacing as indicated in the plan which could be
determined by direct cC!.mting. .
Vert. Support: 60.16 x 25 = 1,504 meters
3. The advantage of using metal forms maximizes the utiliza-
6. Convert to commercial length of steel bars say 6.00
tion of plain sheet and its support by welding of jOints.
meters long. Divide:
1,504 = 251 pieces ( consult the plan what kind 5-5 FORMS FOR BEAM AND GIRDER
6.00 of steel bars us~d)
Form for beam and girder are made of only three parts; one
7. Solve for the Circumferential Ties. Again, refer to
bo.ttom form and two side forms. They are made of either metal
Table 5-2. Multiply: or plywood materi~ls supported by galvanized pipe staging or
wooden lumber of varying sizes from 2" x 2" to 2" x 3" frames.
Ties: 60.16 x 9.52 = 572.7 say 573 meters When coconut lumber is used, a bigger size from 2" x 3" to 2" x
4" are used.
8. Convert to the commercial length of steel bars say 6.00
meters. Divide:
Wooden forms are rigidly supported with sufficient verti~1
573.00 = 95.5 say 96 pieces ( consult the plan and diagonal braCing to carry the heavy load of concrete weigh-
6.00 what kind of bars used) ing approximately 65 kilograms per cubic foot.
The ease of dismantling is the primary consideration in the

TABLE 5-2 QUANTITY OF METAL FORM FOR ~IRCULA COLUMN
assembling of forms. Th.e freedom from pain and difficulty in
Size of Metal No. af Sheet Length of Vert. Ribs In M. Length of removing the form depends on how it was fastened.
Sheet per Spacing in Centimeters Circumferential
in Meters Sq. Meter Ties in Meter
15cm. 20 ern. Formula in Finding the Materials for Beam and
.90 x 2.40 .462 25.0 18.0 9.52 Girder Forms
1.20 x 2.40 .3 47 25.0 18.0 9,52
(1) p = 2 (a + b ) + .10·
Comment:
Where: P = Perimeter of tw,o sides form
. d = th~. two sid,e forms
b = the bottom form
1. The kind.of steel bars for vertical support (ribs of the form) .10 = constant value for the lapping of form
depends upon the design. The illuStrated solutions sl10wed how
to find the quantity of materials such as: the plain sheet, the ( 2 ) . Multiply P by the length and number of beams to get
vertical support and the circumferential ties. the total area of the
,. forms.
188 189
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE .FORM, SCAFFOLDING AND STAGING
(3) Divide the total area found by 2.88 to get the number 2. Substitute data in the formula :
of plywood fGrms. .
(4 ) Multiply the number of plywood found by 22 get the

,P = 2(.60) + .30 + .10 = 1.60 m.
board foot of frame required. 3. Multiply P by the length and number of beams to get the
area of the forms.
ILLUSTRATION 5-4
. Area: 1.60 x 4.50 m. x 10 columns
Ten concrete beams with cross sectional dimensions .of .:~
by .60 meter has a uniform clear span of 4.50 ~etrs. U~mg Y4 ': = 72 sq . m.
4' x 8' plywood form on 2" x 2" lumber frame, list down the ma-
, terials required . . 4. Divide by 2.8~ to get the number of plywood required.
No. of Plywood : ..R = 25 pieces

2.88
B. Solving for the 2" x 2" Wood Frame
1. Refer to Table 5-1 . Under column beam using 6 mm X"

thick plywood on 2" x 2" frame, multiply:
6mm
Plywood formI- f- r- 25 x 25.06 = 626 bel. ft .
4 .50
2 x 2 Frame - f- .60
2. Order: 25 pieces X " x 4' X 8' plywood form
, 626 board ft. 2" x 2" lumber
.40 ILLUSTRA TION 5-5

.40 .60 Ten concrete girder with a general dimensions of .35 x .50
BOTTOM FORM SIDE FORM CROSS SECTION meter has a uniform clear span of 6.00 meters. If 12 mm. (Y2")
FIGURE-5-5 CONCRETE BEAM marine plywood will be used on a 2" x 3" lumber find the mate-
rials required.
SOLUTION
SOLUTION .
A. Finding the Plywood Form
1. Find the area of the form using the formula :
1. Find the lateral perimeter of the beam .
P = 2(d)+b+.10
P = 2 ( .50) + .35 + .10 = 1.45 m.
190 191
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE FORM, SCAFFOLDING AND STAGING
or- repairing of building. It is further defined as a temporary

framework for other purposes.
Staging on the other hand is a more substantial framework

r- t- 2" X3" - r- 2"x 3" progressively built up as tall building rises up. The term staging
is applied because it is built up in stages one story at a time.
6,00 6,00 ,55
Construction records revealed that numerous accidents in
construction happened because of neglect and faulty construc-
tion method such as insufficient supports, hjlngers and braces.
One example of tragic incident happenect'in the construction of
the Film Palace in Metro Manila where several lives including
the Supervising Engineer were buried alive in cement and rub-
.45 .55 bles when the forms and staging swayed and rammed down in
total ~olapse.
Bo,n OM FORM 2- SIDE FORMS CROSS SECTION
Staging is not Simple as others may think of it: 'It requires

FIGURE 5-6 GIRDER FORM
special skill and experienced men to do the work. Incidentally,
the primary causes of accidents and failure of the framework is
2. Total area of 10 forms at 6.00 m. long. the use of inferior quality lumber, inadequate supports and
braces, nails and others for economy or negligence.
Area = 1.45 x 6 x 10 ::: 87 sq. m'.
3. Divide by the area of one plywood (2.88) Definitely, poor quality lumber has no place in horizontal
members of scaffolding work if the builder is aware of the value
~ = 30.2 say 31 pieces. of life and property involved in building construction. Lumber
2,88 intended for temporary structure t05uPPOrt heavy load such as
concrete should be selected from straight grain of wood free
4. Refer to Table 5-1. Under Beam 12 mm (Y:z") thick board from shakes or knots and other defects. Coconut lumber was
on 2" x 3" wood frame, multiply: extensively used due to the scarcity of wood phis the prohibitive
price of lumber.
31 plywood x 28.00 = 868 board foot 2" X 3"
The use of metal pipe scaffolding and staging is now domi-
5. Order: 31 pes, 'W' x 4" x 8" plywood nating the market of construction industry considering its dura-
868 bd. ft 2" x 2" lumber form bility, multiple use and ease of assembling and dismantling.
5-6 SCAFFOLDING AND STAGING The different parts of scaffolding to consider are:
Scaffolding is a temporary structure of wooden poles and 1. Vertical support
planks providing platform for work'ers to stand on while erecting 2. Base of vertical support (as needed)
192 193
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE FO~, SCAFFOLDING AND StAGING
3. Horizontal member Today, the formerly Philippines number one exp'brting lumber
4. Diagonal braces in the world;is importing lumber from the neighboring countries
5. Block and wedges in ASi~aor ·\s domestic used. Under the present condition where
6. Nails or bolts. the price f wood is highly prohibitive like gold , using lumber as
form i ~ very costly undertaking 'unless its use is extremely
necessary. The common materials now being used as· form is
either plywood, synthetic board or metal sheet.
Th~ use of plastiC as form is the next alternative after wood

and metal conSidering its weight, durability and recycling prop-
erties. However, the problem to be encountered is the cost of
fabrication . Ordering the desired size and.form in few quantities
might tum out to be more expensive than the plywood and
metal sheet which could be fabncated on site without delay.
5- 7 ESTIMATING SCAFFOLDING AND STAGING

Estimating the materials for scaffolding and staging requires
time and wider imagination conSidering the different parts of the
structure involved such as: the vertical and horizontal supports,
the diagonal braces plus the blocks and wedges which are not
shown on a detailed plan of the building . The common practice
of most estimators is to make an estimate of this item by either
FIGURE; 5-7 by quantity of the materials or by lump sum amount in the bill of
materials and cost estimate. . -
Cost is the primary consideration in selecting the kind of
materials to be used as form . Cost of form refers to: Table 5-3 was prepared to simplify the process of estimating
scaffolding and staging.
1. Initial cost of materials
2. Assembling cost TABLE 5-3 QUANTITY OF LUMBER FOR SCAFFOLDING OR STAGING
3. The number of times it could be used lumber Column Beam Flooring
4. Durability to' resist pressure, and tear and wear.
Size Board Ft. per M. Ht. Board Ft. per M. Ht. Board Ft
The common materials used as forms for all types of con- Vertical Hor. Brace
, Vertical Hor. Per Sq. M:
struction during the 1950 and 1960 decades was the T&G lum-
ber costing only at about 15 centavos per board foot. That was 2" x 2" 4.70 21 .00 11.70 4.00 4.70 6.10
the time when lumber was so abundant and no one ever think 2" x 3" 7.00 31.67 17.50 6 ..00 7.00 9.10
that this natural resources of our country will vanish so soon 2" x 4" 9.35 42.25 23.35 8.00 9.35 12.10
because of man's insatiable greed fqr money.
I
Hl4 195
1. Find the total length of the 9 columns;
4.00 x 9 columns = 36 meters

2. Refer to Table 5-3. Using 2" x 3" vertical support,
multiply: ~
36 x 7.00 = 252 bd. ft. 2" x 3" x 14 ft.

3. Find the horizontal supports. Refer to Table 5-3, using
2" x 2" lumber, multiply:
36 x 21.00 =756 bd. ft. 2" x 2" lumber

4. Find the diagonal braces. From Table 5-3, multiply:
36 x 11.7 = 421 bd. ft. 2" x 2" lumber

B. Scaffolding for the Beam
4.50
1. Find total iength of th~ 6 beams.
Length: (4.5.0 x 6) + (4.00 x 6) _. 51 meters

4.50
2. Refer again to Table 5-3.
a.) For vertical support using 2" x 3" lumber, multiply:
51 x 6.00 = 306 bd. ft.
b.) For hOrizontal support using 2" x 2" lumber, multiply

ILLUSTRATION 5-6
51 x 4.70 = 240 bd . ft ..
A reinforced concrete building has 9 columns with.a clear
height of 4.00 meters as shown on Figure 5-8. Determined the C. Scaffolding for Concrete Slab
required scaffolding under the following specifications: 2" x 3"
Vertical support; 2" x 2" Horizontal and Diagonal braces. 1. Find the area of the cbncrete floor slab.
SOLUTION Area 4.50 x 4.00 x 4 units = 72 sq. m.

A. Scaffolding for Columns 2. Refer to Table 5-3. USing 2" x 3" support. multiply:
197
.196
72x 9.10 = 655bd . ft. 5. The used of inferior quality lumber contribute to the high
percentage of waste and risk to the workers.
D. Floor Slab Fonns
1. 'Find the floor area:

5-8 STEEL PIPE SCAFFOLDINGS
Area = (4.50 x 4.00 x 4 units) . = 72 sq. m. Steel Pipe Scaffolding can be used freely to prefabricate
height and width according to the places and forms to install.
2. DiviC!e by 2.88 effective covering of one plywood Galvanized steel pipe with good. strength makes durability and
also leads economical delivel)' and storage. Standard scaffold-
72 = 25 pes. 4' x 8' marine plywood. - ing frames have 4' (1.20 m.) width avaiiable in 3 different
2.88 heights ranging from .90 to 1.70 m. They are useful for access
platforms and concrete support works.
Summary of the Materials
1.20 m. 1.20 m.
board feet 2" x 3"
-
A.) For Columns ....... 252
1,177 board feet 2" x 2"
B) ForBeams ......... 306 board feet 2" x 3"
~
-
240 board feet 2" x 2~
C) For Slab ............ 655 board feet 2" x 3~
D) Floor Slab Form .. 25 4' x 8' plywood
Comment:
In the construction of multi-storey building, transfer of forms
and scaffolding from one floor to the next is an inevitable nor-
mal-operation wherein wastage of materials cannot be avoided
~
-
due to tear and wear. Thus, p.ercentage of waste varies Open End Frame 1.70 m. high
depending upon the following factors.
1. The difference in height between floors may require

adjustment of the forms and vertical support.
2. The difference in sizes of beams and girders also
- - - -
requires adjustments of the fQrms. .
-
-
3. The major causes of forms ancJ scaffolding tear and wear ,
are the dismantling, transferring and re-assembling op-
i-
erations. .
4. RecklesS use and handling of the materials includes the
1.20 M. high .90 M. high
making of firewo,od and pilferages during the period of
. construction. FIGURE &-8 STEEL PIPE SCAFFOLDINGS
198 199
-SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE FORM, SCAFFOLDING AND STAGING
Adjustable of level of CROSS BRACE

Scaffolding on ground.
Adjustment is up to 25 cm. Various span are available in
1.20 m., 1.50 m. and 180 m.
Span: 1.82 m. ; 1.52 m. and 1.21 m.

Short cross brace - 1.20 and .90 m. frame
Long cross brace - 1.70 m. frame
Adjustment of level of FIGURE 5-12 CROSS BRACE

wood bearers I joist.
Adjustment up to 25 cm.
o Connects frame one
ADJUSTABLE BASE JACK ADJUSTABLE U-HEAD
on top of the other
FIGURE 5-10 o
o Used on extension
to hold on to slab
o
lumber jOist
JOINT PIN
o
o o ADJUSTABLE SLAB BEARER
FIGURE 5-13 SCAFFOLDING ACCESSORIES

o 0
o o Problem Exercise
o 1. A building has 24 rectangular columns and 8 circular
columns 5.80 meters high with a cross sectional dimen-
o
sions of 15 inches by 22 inches and 20 inches radius
o
respectively. Find the numb~r of number of 6 mm x 1.20
x 2.40 m. plywood form and the corresponding frame
using (a) 2" x 2" lumber; (b) 2" x 3" lumber.
INNER PIPE
Height - 2.8; 2.5; 2.2 & 1.8 m.
ADJUSTABLE DOUBLE PROP ADJUSTABLE STRAIGT PROP
Heavy duty framed props which Ideal support for beam and slab
can be connected by cross braces as well as bracing for wall and
or pipe and clamps for supporting column.
slabs or beams. Required height 15'
can be attained by using inner pipe. Rectangular Column Circular Column
FIGURE 5-11 ADJUSTABLE STEEL SCAFF9LDING FIGURE 5-14
200 201
· SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE
2. From the followfng figure, prepare the bill of materials

Jpr~ (a.) W x 4' x 8' marine plywood (b.) Scaffoldings CHAPTER
Jor columns, beams and slab using 2" x 3" for major '
-support and 2" x 2" lumber for diagonal and horizontal
braces if the post is 4.50 meters high.
ROOFING MATERIALS
6-1 GALVANIZED IRON SHEET
The moeI common roofing material is the galvanized ron
sheet popuWty ~ as G.I. sheet. G.I. sheet is either plai I or
6.00m. conugated. Plain sheet is used for roofing, gutter, f1 ~ h n ,
doMlspout. ridge, hip and valley roll. Plain sheet stanc.ard
commercial size is 90 x 240 centimeters long.
Cofl\lg8ted gafvanized iron sheet on the other hand, is

wide!'! used for roofing and sidings having standard widt:"l of 80
6.00m. centimeters with varying length from 150 to 360 centl m ~ ters at
consecutive intervals of 30 centimeters. Long span corrugated
sheets are also available on special order.
PLAN
2..• 18"
13"
CROSS SECTION OF BEAM
8
82
FIGURE 1·1 STAfC)ARD CORRUGATED G.l stEET
The thickness of galvanized iron sheet is measured in terms

of Gauge Number from 14 to 30. The sheet becomes thinner as
gauge number becomes larger. Gauge 26 is the most
extensively used for rOOfing and various tin worts and gauge ",4
is specified for gutters and valley rolls.
202 203
ROOFING MATERIALS
How to distinguish the difference in thickness between the
consecutive gauges from 14 to 30 is so difficult even with the
Comment:
aid of a caliper.
Before estimating the required number of corrugated rOOfing
sheets, the following information should be considered first:
Gauge means thickness expressed in terms of hundreth of
an inch and the only way by which one could be certain that he 1. Verify the ptan if the side lapping is 1-Yz or 2- Yz
is buying the right thickness of the sheet is by weight measure. corrugations. ,
Table 6-1 was .prepared to present the various weight of G.t. 2. If it is .1-1/2 corrugations, the effective width covering per
sheet according to its length and gauge number. sheet IS .70 meters or .60 meters for 2-1/2 corrugations.
3. The standard end-lapping jOint is from 25 to 30
TABLE 6-1 STANDARD WEIGHT OF GALVANIZED IRON SHEET centimeters long. This · is important in determining the
IN KILOGRAMS length of the sheet to be used.
4. Spacing of the purlins should be ProportiQnally adjusted
LENGTH IN METERS AND FEET
to the length of the G.I. sheets to avoid unnecessary
Gauge Thick 1.50 1.80 2.10 2.40 2.70 3.00 3.60 cutting or excessive overlapping. In short, the length of
No. cm. 5'ft. 6 ft. 7 ft. 8ft 9 ft. 10 ft. 12 ft. the roof sheet governs the spacing distance of the purlins.
For this purpose, refer to Table 6-2.
5. A good rOOfing deSign minimizes end lapping jOint.
14 .203 22.36 26.83 31.30 35.78 40.25 44.72 53.66 Longer length of rOOfing sheet is preferred for economical
15 .180 20.25 24.30 28.35 32.40 36.45 40.50 48.60 reasons.
.16 .163 18.44 27.76 25.39 29.02 32.64 36.27 43.52
17 .147 16.43 19.72 2300 26.29 29.58 32.86 39.43
18 .132 14.73 17.67 20.62 23.56 26.51 29.45 35.34
19 .117 13.03 15.63 18.24 20.84 23.45 26.05 31.27
20 .102 11.32 13'.58 15.85 18.11 20.38 22.64 27.17
21 .094 10.43 12.52 14.60 1.6 .69 18.78 20.86 25.03
22 .086 9.52 11 .54 13.46 15.38 17.31 19.23 23.08 End Lapping
23 .079 8.73 10.47 12.22 13.96 15.71 17.45 20.94
24 .071 7.91 9.49 11.07 12.66 14.24 15.82 18.29
25 .064 7.03 8.43 9.84 11 .24 12.65 14.05 16.86 2112 Corr.
26 .056 6.19 7.43 8.66 9.90 \1.14 12.38 14.8(;
27 .051 5.76 6:91 8.06 9.22 10.37 11.52 13.82
28 .048 5.33 6.39 7.46 8.052 9.59 10.65 12.78
29 0.43 4.90 5.88 6.86 7.84 8.82 9.80 11.76 1 112 Corr.
30 0.41 4.48 5.37 6.27 7.16 8.06 8.95 10.74
Side Lapping
FIGURE 6-2 LAPPING OF G.I SHEETS
.204
205
SIMPLDIDCUMlauc ___ U i . * " ROOI'ING MATERIAi.s
aFtu... - .
-
TAa.E a.2 Effl!lCDlECCGDlM
__ A 7 . .Find the number of plain G.!. sheets required for anchor
_.... ........
strap with the aid of Table ~.
Length
A.- Meter
EfIedi¥e c-iIIg
Side I .......
1% 2% ......
PudiI:s In _
Mill
. TABLE 8-3 QUANTITY OF ROOF ACCESSORES IN KLOGRAMs
Materials Number per Kilogram
..
5' - 1.50 .70 .80 .ID 14
.,
. .75 14 G.!. Roof Nails 120
6' - '1.80
7' - 2.10
70
TO .,
. .ID
G.!. Rivets
G.!. Washers
Lead Washers
180
126
75
S' - 2.40 .10 .60 .70 1•
Umbrella Nails 120
g' - 2.70 .70 .60 .80 22
10' - 3.00 .70 .60 JrT 22
21 TABLE 6-4 SIZE AND QUANTITY OF STRAPS IN ONE PLAIN G.'. SHEET
12' - 3.60 .70 .60 .88
Size of Purlins Size of G.!. Strap
•
Number of Strap
Inches in Inches in One Plain Sheet
, 2 ESTIMATING Golo ROOF AND ITS 2° x 3° 1" x g. 384
ACCESSORIES 2° x 4° 1° x 10· 342
2· x 5° 1· x 11· 312
1. Determine the length of the purtins along . . gutter . . . 2° x 6° 1" x 12° 288
This distance is perpendicular with the roof cIredion.
) Divide this length by the effective width covering 0: one

ILLUSTRATION 6-1
G. !. sheet using either .70 for 1% corrugations or .to m.
f Of 2% corrugations. The result is the number of s1leels
From figure 6-3 find . the number of corrugated G.!. roof
or t')ne fO . sheets and its accessories required If the side lapping specify 1-
~' e t.~lmin the length of the rafter or top chord. Choose % corrugations with 30 cm. end lapping on a 2" x 3" purlins.
the right (.c r bination of roofing shef'ts that will satisfy this
length considering the 25 to 30 cent im eters standard end·
laoping.
4. It I~ the re~ It found rn step - 2 by each length of

h~ct combination a foun :.: s~p. p - 3.
S D t .fl'T'ine ;:. - 'lumber of G.I nalb o. riv ets and wac;hers

. kl!c grarr:c: 'I '1' Table 6-2 and 6-3 .
Take notp-ot1a he nUrfioer f· ... i.1in a.. or strap and lead

FIGURE 6-3
asher IS tt e <; me as 11e que n ty n -ets.
201
~06
ROOFING MATERIALS
D. Plain G.I. Strap on 2" x 3" Purlins
SOLUTION
1. Total number of rivets = 960 pieces
A. · corrugated G.I. Sheet
2. Refer to Table 6-4. Using a 2" x 3" purlins, Divide:
1. Divide the length of the gutter by the effective width
covering of one sheet. Refer to Table 6-2 under 1 % 960 = 2.5 pieces plain G.!. sheets
corrugations the value is .70 m., divide: 384 '
:,il
14.00 = 20 sheets in one row E. Lead Washers
.70
2. The length of the rafter is 6.00 meters, a combination of 1. Number of rivets is the same as the lead washer =960
3.60 and 2.70 meters long G.!. sheet or 12 ft. and 9 ft.
2. Refer to Table 6-3. For lead washers, divide:
3. Order: 20 -32" x 12' corrugated G.!. sheet
20 - 32" x 9' ' . 960 :;: 12.8 say 13 kilogranls u
B. Rivets
75 '
I!
F. Summary of the materials
1. Refer to Table 6-2. For a 12 feet and 9 feet long roof
sheet, multiply: 20 pes. 32" x 12 ft. corrugated G,!. sheet
For 12 ft. long: 20x 26 = 520 pieces 20 pes, 32" x 9' corrugated G,!. sheet
I
For 9 ft. long: 20 x 22 = 440 pieces 5.5 kg. G.I rivets
Total rivets .... .... 960 pieces
15.5 kg, G.I. washecs
2. Convert to kilograms. Refer to Table 6-3; divide: 4
13.0 kg, Lead washers
I
960 = 5.3 say 5.5 kilograms 2.5 pes. Plain G.!. sheets
180
C. G.l. Washer n.LUSTRATION 6-2

I
1. Double the number of rivets. From th~ following figure, find the G.I. roof sheets and the
umb~ela nails required adopting 2 % side corrugations and 30
960 x 2 = 1,920 pieces. centimeters end lapping on a 2" ,x 3" purlins.
2. Convert to kilograms. Refer to Table 6-3, for G.!.
washers, divide: SOLUTION
1,920 = 15.24 kilograms. A. Corrugated G.I. Sheets
128
209
208
I I
SIMPLlYIED CONSTRUcnoN r.sTIMA'B
1; Find the ~umber -of roof sheet. Refer to Table 8-2. USing eo pes. of 12 ft ..x 26 = 1.560 pieces
2 Yzcorrugations, divide: eo pes. of 9ft. x 22 = 1.320 Pieces
Total.: ....... ... 2,88(f Pieces
18.00 ro. = 30 pieces
.60
2. Convert to kilograms. Refer to Table 6-3, divide:
'2AH. :a: 24 kilograms

120
IlUJSTIlADON 6-3
Fftn ~ 8-5, find the number of roof sheets, nails. and
.... , . . . . If the ... specify 2 % side lap corrugations.
FIGURE'"
2. The length of rafter is 6.00 meters (201 a com bintatTionbof

3.60 m. (121 and 2.70 m. (91 roof sheet. Ref er 0 a le
6-5, multiply each sheet length by the result of step-1.
30 pes. 32- x 12' and

30 pes. 32- x 9' corrugated roof sheets
3. Take note that this is only one side of the roof, For the SOLUTION
other-side, double the quantity of the roof sheet
A. Corrugated G.!. Sheet
2 x 30 =60 pieces at 3.60 m. (1~') long and
2 x 30 =60 pieces at 2.70 m. (91 long 1. Determine the number of roof sheet In one row along.
- the 12.90 m. gutter. {Refer to Table 6-2. dMde:
B._ Umbrella Nails 12.90 m. = 21.5 say 22 pieces

.60
1. Determine the number of umbrella nails for the 12 feet
and 9 feet roof sheets. Refer to Table 6-2, multiply: 'This number is only for one side of the I"'oof.
211
21 0
ROOFING MATERIALS'
A. Roofing Sheets
2. Length of the rafter Is 4.80 meterS (16 ft.) or Ii
combination. of either: 1. Find ttle numb9r of roof sheets along the 18 00 t
gutter. P.Qler to Table 6-2, for 2 % side lapping, diV~rs
a.} 10' and l' G.I. sheet,
b.} 9' and 8' or
c.) 12' and 5' long
18.00
.60··
= 30 pieCes
If a combination of 10' and ·7' is preferred, then, the
order will be:
ft
2 x 22 = 44 pieces 32 x 10' and
2 x 22 = 44 8
pieces 32 x l' 10M.
B •.Roof Nails and Lead Washers.
1. Solve for the ·number of roof nails. Refer to Table 6-2;
For 3.00 m. (101 long roof sheet 44 x 22 = 968 ROOF PLAN

For 2.10 m. (71 long roof sheet 44 x 18 = 792
. Total roof nails.......... 1,760
2. .Convert to kilograms. Refer to Table 6-3. Divide:
1.760 = 14.7 say 15 kilograms roof nails CROSS SECTION qF TH ~ ROOF
120
FIGURE6~
1.760 = 23.5 say 24 kg. lead washers
15 2. Determine the le~gth of the rafter. For a 6.00 meters long
rafter, try a combination of 3.60 m. (121 and 2.70 m. (91
ILLUSTRATION 6-4 long G.I she-ets. Refer to Table 6-5 ,
.From Figure 6-6, find the number. of corrugated roof sheets, 30 pieces of 32ft x 12 feet and
rivets, washers, lead washers, including the plain G.!. straps 30 pieces of 32· x 9' feet long
required if the plan specify 2-1/2 side lap corrugations and .30
8
m. end lapping on a 2ft x 4 purlins.
3. Take note that .the at?ove quantities are only for one side
of the roof. To Include the other side, double the quantity.
SOLUTION •
213
212
2 x 30 • eo pes. 12ft._ 2.I§g • 38.5 say 311d1cJgrMlS
75
2 x 30 • eo pes. I ft. long
4 . COIWIkter't1tg tMt the .w. ,~ • lIIpped .type, ••

~ eM not be " ("', , prcMde .. L~
1: :: D. ....... OJ. Ancttor
1. Ret. to T 0-4. The size of G.I. strap on a ~ X 4-

IG~ of ~ If 1M __ of . . hlp Is 4(.Md1~ If is 1·x10-.
. . __ II nat 45° Get • longer to avoid . . . . . .
..... in cuIInQ. Thus; 2. of strap !s 2,ttao equal to the number of rivets .
Find ilUffib...""f of plain shMt needed to produce ·the
eo + eo • 14N pea. X f t • . . . . . af 12' 2,180 anchor Shp. Ref, 0 T4IbCe 6-4. 0Mde: .
5. 0IQer • pea. :sr X 12 feet_ ~

342
• '.42 say I pieces 38- x' ft. paain G.I. sheet.
eo pea. 32" x I fMIt lang
3. Find common wire nails to f .-.c:hor strap .
.. GJ.1Uwta
2, x 3 . p8f ap:o: 8,640 pieces
1. Find . . number of rMI&S. Refw to T'- &-2; multiply:
For 12 ft. . . . .: eo x.· 1. • .,...
4. Conven to eutograms. One kiCo of 4<2, 32 mm. C.w. nat is
n.
approximately 85 pieces. o;vide:
For 1ft. . . . . eox22· ' . " ..IliQ • 12.43 My 12.5 kg. 4d c.w.
T...... ......... ...... 2.-.,-c:es ee5
2. CoIWeIttD ....... __ toT.... W . ..,. dille Materials
.J.IIIl • ,. . . .. . , pieces 3,2- x 12 fl. COt'rUg.aed G.', sheet

110 eo pieces 32" x I ft. QOfTUgaled G.I. sheet
C. G.L .... UIIII . . .. . . 1.
•
• pieces • • x • ft. p&ajn G.I. sheet
UOOrams G.I.
~Iogr."
G.I. wllSherS
"vets
1. For CU ................ number Ofblenv:ts3: dlvid 12.5 kiJOgramI4d (1·112") common wire nails.
2,_ X 2 • 5,110 ..... .Refer to Ta _ . ; e:
5.710 • 45.7 ... 4I1dIogr1ImS
121
n. estimating procedure for a hipped root is the same as
2. ..... w.tter II 1M same number as the rivets. Refer to .... of the lean-to or gate type.rOOfing considering the effective
Table &-3; dMde: covering of one sheet as constant divisor.
214 215
. ROOFING MATERIALS
However, little variations might occur in actual tinsmith work
such as: 6-3 GUTTER, FLASHING, RIDGE, HIPPED
AND VALLEY ROLL
1. Errors might be commtited in cutting and or lapping of
the roof sheets.
In building construction, these items are categorized as roof
accessories under tinsmith wOrk. Estimating these type' of
2. If the hipped is not patterned at 45 degrees, extra cut of
accessories is Simply determining the number of plain G.!.
the G.!. roofing sheet is inevitable.
sheet needed to fabricate the gutter, flashing and the different
3. Under any of the preceding Circumstances, an allowance rolls according to the form and shape as shown on the plan.
of 5% to 10% is satisfactory.
The primary consideration in tinsmith work is economy,
which Simply mean, to utilize every inch of the tin sheet. As
TABLE 6-6 COMBINATION OF G.I. ROOF SHEETS ON A GIVEN much ~s possible, any unwise cutting of the tin sheet must be
RAFTER LENGTH avoided. Cutting should start from the widest to the narrowest
part of the roof accessories.
Rafter No. of Combination of Roof Sheet Length
Length Sheet Meters Feet Meters Feet Meters Feet Experienced tinsmith worker do start cutting from the gutter,
then to the flushing down to the smallest plain G.!. strap to
3.00 1 3.00 10'
avoid waste of the materials.
3.30 1 3.30 11'
3.60 .1 3.60 12' Estimating Procedures
3.90 2 2.10 7' and 2.10 7'
4.20 2 2.40 8' and 2.10 7' 1. Determine the total length of the gutter in meters.
4.50 2 2.40 8' and 2.40 8'
4.80 2 3.00 10' and 2.10 7' 2. Divide this length by 2.35 meter to find the number of
5.10 2 3.00 10' and 2.40 8' gutter required . (2.35 is the effective length of one
r
5.40 2 3.00 10' and 2.70 9' gutter)
5.70 2 3.00 10' and 3.00 10'
~ if 6.00 2 3.60 12' and 2.70 9' 3. Find the total width of one gutter based from the cross
6.30 2 3.60 12' and 3.00 10'
: 6.60
6.90
2
2
3.60
3.60
12'
12'
and
and
3.30
3.60
11'
12' 4.
section of the detailed plan.
The width of one plain G./. sheet is •. 90 meters. Divide

7.20 3 3.00 10' and 2.40 8' and 2.40 8 .90 m. by the result of step 3 to find out how many
!' 7.50
7.80
3
3
3.00
3.00
10' and 3.00
10' . and 3.00
10'
10'
and
and
2.10
2.40
7'
8'
gutter could be made out from one plain G./. sheet.
(
8.10 3 3.60 12' and 3.00 10' and 2.10 7' S. The fractional value as extra cut will be reserved for'
: 8.40
8.70
3
3
3.60
3.60
12'
12'
and 3.00
and 3.60
10'
12'
and
and
2.40
2.10
8'
7'
other smaller parts.
9.00 3 3.60 12' and 3.60 12' and 2.40 8' 6. Divide the result of step 2 by the result of step 4. The
result is the required number of G.t. sheet.
216
I'
- . 217
SIMPLIFIED CONSTItuCTION ESTIMATE ·· ROOFING MATERIALS
3. The total width (>1' the gutter is 52.5 centimeters (see

ILUST~AON 6-5 cross section of gutter) Subtract 52.5 from 90.
centimeters the standard width Of one plain G.1. sheet.
·From Figure 6-7, find the number of plain G·.1. sheets
. required to' fabricate the open gutter as illustrated.
90. cm: - 52.5 = 37.5 extra cut.
This 37.5 centimeters excess cut from one plainG.1.

sheet could be set side momentarily to ·be considered in
making other roof accessories such as f1ashi.ng,
downspout, anchor strap for riveting etc. Thus, only one
gutter at 2.40. meters (8') long 'could be made out from
10M. one plain sheet.
4. Order: 24 - 90. cm.(36") x 2.40. m. ( 8') plain sheet
Comment
ROOF PLAN It will be noted that the standard commercial width of
2:5cm. one plain G.1. sheet is 90. centimeters or 36 inches. The
total width of one gutter is 52.5 centimeters. Subtracting
5.0cm. 52.5 from 90. will result to an extra cut of 37.5 centimeters.
This simply mean that only one gutter could be made out
15 20 cm.
from one plain G.I. sheet with an excess cut of . 37.5
centimeters. The 37.5 centimeters excess does not
necessarily mean .to be considered as waste because there
7.5 cm. are several parts in the tinsmith work that requires smaller
CROSS SECTION OF GUTTER cut or dimensions such as flashing, and anchor straps.
FIGURE 6-7 PVc plastic materials are now in used as gutter and
downspout instead of the plain G.I. sheets. However, at this
SOLUTION. early stage, the use of PVc plastic gutter have not gained
satisfactory result ana acceptance for .its failure to resist
1. Find the total length of the roof gutter warping caused by temperature changes.
Length = 2 (18,0.0.) + 2 (10..0.0.) = 56.0.0. meters
ILLUSTRA TION ~-6
2. Divide length by 2.35 m. the effective length of gutter.
From Figure 6-8, find the number of plain G.1. sheet required
56.0.0. = 23.82 say 24 pieces to fabricate the gutter, ridge roN ':ind flashing as illustrated.
2.35
219
216
ROOFING MATERIALS
4.S0m. 4. Divide the result of step 2 by step 3.
~ = 4.5 say 5 pieces plain G.I. sheet

2
B. Flushihg
1. Find the total length of flashing: 4 x 4.50 m. =18 m.

2. Divide by the length of one flashing. See Table 6-6
2.Scm.
\j,.,m
Scm 18 meters = 7.8 say 8 pieces
2.30
scm.,
3. Width of plain G.I. sheet divided by width of flashing.
2!1Scm.
45 cm.
7.Scm, 90 cm = 2 pieces.
FLASHING RIDGE ROLL GUTTER 45
4. Divide step 2 by step 3 to find the number of plain sheet

FIGURE6~
Jl = 4 pieces
SOLUTION 2
A. Gutter TABLE 6~ ROOF ACCESSORIES
Item Effective-Length in Meters

1. Find the total length of the roof gutter =20 meters. (see
figure 6-8) Gutter 2.35
Flashing 2.30
2. Divide by the effective length of one gutter. (Table 6-6) Ridge Roll 2..20
Valley Roll 2.30
Hipped Roll 2.:JO
20.00 m. = 8.5 say 9 pieces gutter Soldering Lead % (.25) bar per solder joint
2.35 Moriatic Acid 10 cc per soldering lead
3. Total width of gutter is 45 centimeters. Divide width of

plain G.I. sheet bY '45 centimeters.
c. Ridge Roll
~cm . = 2 pieces derived from one G.!. sheet.
45 1. Total length of the ridge roll is 10 meters. Divide by the
length of one ridge roll, see Table 6-6.
220
22 1
. ,
I
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE ROOFING MATERIALS
10.00 m. = 4.5 pieces ridge roll from gutter down to the smallest anchor straps are made on site
out from the standard size of plain G.I. sheet, estimating
2.20
asbestos' roofing material is much simpler because all the roof
2. Determine how many ridge roll a~c be matded.o.udt fdro:;y accessories and parts to be used such as gutter, ridge, hip and
one plain G.I. sheet. Width of plain shee IVI e valley rqlls are all factory made ready for installation.
width of ridge roll
Different Kinds of Asbestos Roofing
90 cm. = 2 pes.
45 cm. 1. Standard corrugated sheet
2. 4-V Corrugated sheet
3. Find the number of plain sheet. Divide step 1 by step 2. 3. Placa Romana
4. Kanaletas
4.5 = 2.25 pieces 5. Tencor corrugated sheet
2 6. Ardex lightweight corrugated sheet
Summary a. Standard Ardex
. b. Super Ardex
For Gutter 5 pes. 90 cm. x 240 cm. plain G.I. sheet.
Flashing: 4 pes. 90" x 240 cm. plain G.I. sheet.
Ridge Roll: 2 pes. 90" x. 240 cm . plain G.I. sheet Estimating Procedures:
Total. ... . 11 pes. plain G.I. sheets.
a.) The number of corrugated asbestos roOfing required is
D. Valley and Hipped Roll determined by dividing the gutter length by the effective
width covering of one sheet.
The estimating procedure for valley anq hippe.d roll is. the
same as that of the gutter, flashing and ridge roll with the aid of b.) In finding the number of accessories such as flashing,
Table 6-6. gutter, ridge, hip and valley roll, divide each total length
by the effective length of the accessories.
TABLE 6-7 CORRUGATED PLASTIC ROOF SHEET
c.) Other parts such as ridge end cap, apron flashing, gutter
Commercial Size Effective Width Covering corner, down spout and fittings are found by direct
Corrugation counting. They are all ready made- according to factory
Size Meter 111, 211, standard ·sizes.
II
26" x 8' .650 x 2.40 .46 m. .31 m.
29" x 8' .725 x 2.40 .53 m. .38 m. ILLUSTRATION 6-7
From figure 6-9, find the standard asbestos roOfing sheet

6-4 ASBESTOS ROOFING Including its accessories required.
Unlike galvanized iron roofing sheet where accessories A. Standard .Corrugated Asbestos Sheet
222
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMAATE ROOFING MATERIALS
3.00 m. x 4 sides = 12.00 meters

3.00m
2. Refer to Table 6-8, for outside flashing, divide:
12.00 m. = 5.25 say 6 pcs~ outside flashing.

2.286
Ridge End Cap

1. From Figure 6-9. By actual count, there are 2 ridge end
cap. Order 2 pieces.
FIGURE 6-9 STANDARD ASBESTOS CORRUGATED SHEET
Summary of Materials
If .
SOLUTION 62 pcs. 1.20 x 3.00 Standard corrugated sheet
23 pcs ..standard gutter
Standard Sheet
31 pcs. standard ridge roll
1. Find the total length of the gutter: 2 x 26 = 52.00 'meters 6 pcs. stantlard flashing
2 pcs. standard ridge end cap
2. Refer to Table 6-8. Divide 52.00 m. by the effective width
52.00 m. = 62 pieces standard asbestos sheet.

Technic3:1 Data For .Estimating Asbestos Roofing
.838 TABLE 6-8 STANDARD CORRUGATED SHEETS
Gutter Length 1.20 x 3.00 m.
End lapping: Below?O degrees 0.30 m~
fotallength ofthe ridge roll is = 26.00 m. Refer to Table Above 20 degrees 0.15 . m..
6-8, divide this length by the effective length of one gutter: Effective width • 0.838 m .
Ridge Roll effective length 0.838m.
2 x 26.00 = 22 .26 pieces. Gutter effective length 2.336m.
2.336 Outside flashing 2.286 m.
Hip roll 1.676 m.
Ridge Roll
Total length of the ridge is = 26.00 meters. Refer to Table
6-8 for ridge roll. Divide: -+------ ' .838 m. ----+
Lap
26.00 m. = 31 .0 pcs. ridge roll.

.838
I
Flashing:
1. Find the total length of the flashing (see figure) FIGURE 6-10 STANDARD CORRUGATED SHEET
225
224
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION. ESTIMATE
ROOFING MATERIALS
B.) 4-V Corrugated Asbestos Sheet
D. Kanaletas
T~BLE. 8-9 4·V CORRUGATED SHEET TECHNICAL DATA
Standard Length 2,438 m. TABLE 6·11 KANALETAS TECHNICAL DATA
Effective width .965 m.
Length 7.315 m.
Ridge Roll effective length . .965 m.
Effective width .885 m.
Outside Flashing effective len.gth 2.286 m.
Eaves flashing .885 m.
Outside flashing effective length 2.40 to 3.00 m.
.965m _ _~I-
FI,GURE G-11 4-V CORRUGATED ASBESTOS.SHEET
i-rGlJRE 6- 13 KANALETAS
E. A rd, (' :\
Standard length 2.44 m.
Lapping .15 or .30 m. TABLE 6-12 ARDEX TECHNICAL DATA
Effective Length 2.29 01-2.14 m.
Standard Width .748 m. Standard width .52m. 1 05 m .
Effective Width .675 m. Effective width A.5 m. .97 m.
Outside Flashing 1.50t0300m Nominal length .75 to 3.15 m. 2.40 to 3.60 m .
Minus Lapping .15 m. Ridge roll effective length . 95m. .95 m.
Rid e Roll .953 m. Outside flashing 1.50 to 2.00 1.50 to 3.00 m.
Side lapping .15 m. .15 m
.45 m. .07 m.
Lap
FIGURE 6-12 TENCOR CORUGAT~D SHEET
FIGURE 6-14 ARDEX
226
227
ROOFING MATERIALS
27mm
E. Placa Romana
-tt
Mean Rib Width
41 mm
TABLE 6-13 PLACA ROMANA TECHNICAL DATA
.912 m. Pemale Rib
Standard lengfh
.600m.
Male Rib ••,----_ ...
Effective length
1.180 m.· 203mm 203mm
Standard width
Effective width
1.100 m.
.200 m. 406 mrr. Coverage
End lap -4~
.080m.
Side lap (427 mm) Overall Width
Ridge roll effective length
Outside flashing effective length
1.100m.
2.286 m.
•
Ridge flashing effective length
Eaves flashing effective length
1.100m.
1.100m. . FIGURE 6·16 COLORBOND KLIP-LOK
TABLE 6·14 COLORBOND KLiP LOK TECHNICAL DATA
Steel base thickness 0.60 mm.

Total coated thickness 0.63 mm.
1.10 m Lap
~- -~ Weight per meter length of panel 2.66 I<g.
Weight per covered area 6.00 M.
Length available up to 15.00 m.
Longer length special order up to 35 00 M.
Overall width .427 rn .
1.1Sm. Effective width coverage .406 m
RECOMMENDED FASTENERS
FIGURE 6·15 PLACA ROMANA .
(1WO FASTENeRS REQUIRED PER CL.lP)
Support member Normal Fastening Fastening over Insulation

6-5 COLORBOND KLIP-LOK Uo to 100 mm (4")
Steel up to 3132" No. 10-16 x 5/S" wafer No. 10-15 x 7/S" (22 mm)
Colorbond is a corrosion resistant zinc coated steel sheet (2.5 mm) thick head self drilling and wafer head self drilling
pre-painted steel ribbed tray roofing and walling with the tapping screw and"tapping screw
following special features. Steel 3132" to 3/16 No.1 0-24 x 5/S" wafer No.1 0-24 x 7/8" (22 mm)
2.5 • 5 mm thick head self drilling and wafer head self drilling
1. Concealed fastening tappina screw and tapping screw
2. Lock action rib design ,,
Steel over 3116" No. 10-24 x 5/S" wafer No.1 0-24 x 7/S" (22 mm)
3. Attractive fluted trays (5mm thick) hole for No. 10-24 x 7/S"
head thread cutting
4. Near flat roof slopes screw. Drill 4.5 mm. Wafer head self drilling
5. Less supports-wider spaced and tapping screw.
6. Strong lightweight steel
7. Custom cut long lengths
229
228
SIMPLIFU:D CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE . ROOFING MATERIALS
6-7 MARCELO ROOFING SYSTEM

2 Yo. x 9G (60 x 3.75 mm)
2" :( 9G(50 x 3.75 mm)
Hardwood counter sunk head G, \.
COl -nter sunk head G.\. TABLE 6-16 MARCELO ROOFING SYSTEM TECHNICAL DATA
spi '81 nail or No. 10-12 spiral nail or No. 10-12 x
x 1 (25 mm) typ:; ~7 1 %" (45 mm) type 17
walsr head si:llf 'Jri,;.ng wafer head self drilling Width 1.14 M.
wovd screw. wood screw. Length " 1.11 M.
Effective width coverage' .95 M,
No, 1D-12x1 %"type No. 1D-12x 113/4" (45mm)
SoftwOod type 17 wafer head self Effective Area coverage per sheet .92 sq. m.
17 wafer head self Number of fastener per sheet first row 15 pcs. per sheet
drilling wood screw, '
drilhng wood screw Succeeding rows 10 pes. per sheet
Average No, of fasteners per sheet 12 pcs, per she ~
6-6 BANAWE HORIZONTAL METAL TILE

TABLE 6-15 BANAWE METAL TILE TECHNICAL DATA
Len th in Meter
Item
.228m.
Nominal wjdth
Effective width covarage .204m.
12.19m.
Lengtb
15 degrees
Minimum roof slope
.95 to 1.125 m. ,,,----<,
FIGURE 6-18 MARCELO ROFING SYSTEM
FIGURE 6-17 CROSS SECTION OF BANAWE METAL TILE 6-8 COLORBOND CUSTOM ORB
230 231
S~LIFED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE 'ROOFING MATERIALS
TABLE 6-17 COLORBOND CUSTOM ORB TECHNICAL DATA

Normal width .86 m.
Effective coverage .76 m.
Length , 1.35 m.
Longer length Special or\ier
Max. recommended length t.-.:f A =5 em to 43 em depending upon the length of the top tile.
continuou$ sheet without joints) 24 m.
Fastened to supports through the crest of the corugatin~
Crest Fastening to Steel
2 112 corrugation Side lap

• Nailing position for intermediate
tile presses
• ~ailng position for ridge and gutter r
tile presses. rne
_----0.86 m.----_" FIGURE 6-20 MILANO LONG SPAN STEEL BRICKS

CUSTOM ORB I
Notc~ and turn oown loge OT

ClPPmg between ribs. RIDGE CAPPING
Fasten at alternate ribs.
Turn up vav oetween ribs:
-.~
Crest Fastening to Wood

Turn up tray between ribs .
. TR,ANSVERSE FASCIA CAPPING Notc,h and turn down edge of
FIGURE 6-19 COLORBOND CUSTOM ORB cappmg between ribs.
6-9 MILANO LONG SPAN STEEL BRICKS

TABLE 6-18 MELANO LONG SPAN TECHNICAL DATA
Steel base thickness No. 26 0.40 mrn

Weight per square meter 4.53 kg,
Effective coverage 0.67 M.
Length up to 6.00 M.
30 in (760 mml COVER
Recommended roof slope 1.0° min.
FIGURE 6-21 COLORBOND TRIMDEX HI-TEN
232 233
ROOFING MATERIALS
Four fasteners are requi~ per shingle located 5/8" above
6-10 COLORBOND TRIMDEX HI-TEN the
F st top of each cutout
.' and 1
. In from each side of the h'
s mg Ie.
a. eners are dnven straIght, with the heads flush to the
TABLE 6.19 COLORBOND TRIMDEX HI·TEN TECHNICAL DATA shIngle s~rface ..Fasteners must be of sufficient length to
p~netra e .mto solid w?od, pl.ywood decking %" or through the
0.40 mm thIckness of the aeckmg whIchever is less. Nail shanks must
Steel Base thickness
4.28 kg. I sq. m . ~ot be less than %" and staple legs must never be less than 1"
Weight per unit area
3.26 kg. f sq. m.
Weight per unit length
0.83 m.
m len~th. N~ils are to be 11 or 12 gauge barbed shank
Nominal width
0.76 m. C?ITOSIOn resIstant roo.fing ~ails ~ith 3/8" heads. Use 16 gauge
Effective width coverage ZinC coated staples wIth 1 nominal crown. Staple crown must
15.00 m.
Available length up to be parallel horizontal tab edge.
3 degrees
Minimum slope single sheet
Minimum slope with end lap
5 degrees
Fasteners .1 5
.30
1. For hardwood: Use Type 17 self drilling wood screw No.
.15
12 x 50 mm. Hexagonal head with neoprene washer.
2. For soft wood: Add 12 mm to length of screw.
I 3. There should be four fasteners per sheet at all supports. .90
4. For side lap fasteners, use Type S point self drilling screw
FIGURE 6·22 ASPHALT ROOF SHINGLES
No. 10 x 16 mm. Hexagonal head with neoprene washers.
5. Teks self driiling screw to steel up to 4.5 mm. Thick use
TABLE 6-20 ASPHALT SHINGLES TECHNICAL DATA
No.12 x 45 mm. Hexagonal head with neoprene washer.
Fiber glass composition
6- 11 ASPHALT ROOF SHINGLE Certain 25
Teed 20 per square .~
200 lb.
XT TM per square 225 - 230 lb.
Asphalt Roof shingle is manufactured by Certain Teed. It Dimensional tolerance 1/16"
comes into two varieties called certain teed 20 and extra tough Width 0.30 m.
25. Certain Teed 20 carries the UL Wind Resistance and is Length 0.90m.
certified by ASTM to provide high tear resistance. Solar Effective coverage -0.135sq . m.
activated, self sealing strips form a tight seal against driving One bundle covers 3 sq. m.
rain, snow and wind.
The XT ™ 25 is considered extra resistant to wind stress to ll-LUSTRATION 6-8 i

help prevent tearing and blow off. It carries the UL 997 label so
it will resist winds up to 60 mph. Special sealant strips use the A building h.as a 500 square meters total inclined roof--area.
sun's heat for additional weatherproofing and extra asphalt Th.e plan sp~clfy Asphalt Roof Shingles. Find the number of
makes it a heavier, more durable· shingle compared to basic shingles reqUired.
three-tab strip shingles.
235
234
ROOFING MATERIALS
CORRUGATED
FIGURE 6·23 ROOF PLAN
SOLUTION
,
t.,-
1. Find the total area of the roof. Since the area was g,iven ,
refer to Technical specifications and divide the. tota roo f
area by the effective coverage per shingle. I
500 = 3,703.7 pieces RIB TYPE
0.135 FIGURE 6·24 PROFILES OF UPVC ROOFING SHEETS
2. Another solution is to divide the roof area by 3 s~uda · re TABLE 6·21 UPVC ROOF SHEET TECHNICAL DATA
meters to get the number of bqndles of shingle require .
Profile Ordinary corrugation & Rib-type
Effective width
500 = 166.6 say 167 bundles. Effective width
0.91 m. for ordinary corrugation
0.80 m. for the Rib.Type
3 Color White, beige, transll.lce-nt
Thickness 1.00 mm., 1.50 mm., 2.00 mm & 2.50 mm
Length long span
6-12 Upvc ROOFING SHEET Tensile strength 30 Mpa
Impact strength 27 KJ / m2
The Upvc roofing sheet is called IMAC~of suited to Fire classification . Class 1
corrosive conditions particularly industrial establishments. It has . Chemical resistance Excellent resistance to acids/basest salts
an internal thermal conductivity equal to the expanded and numerous solvE~nt .
polyurethane and polystyrene eliminating the use of insulating
materials. IMAC Roof sheets are made up of a particular bl~nd 6-13 SPANFLEX
of thermoplastic resins and does not shatter easily unl~e
ordinary plastic, asbestos and fiberglass roofing. The roof ~s
shockproof and hinders the dispersi.on of. flames. w~en m Spanflex is a siding and ceiling system efficient substitute for
contact with fire. They only carbonize Without dnppmg or costly wood panels. It presents an interesting and impressive
breaking up. interior and exterior profile for homes and offices. Spanflex is
available in all style range of designs and colors to suit your
aesthetic requirements.
236
237
ROOFING MATERIALS
a. Number of corrugated G.I. roof sheets
TABLE 6.22 SPANFLEX TECHNICAL DATA b. Number of rivets, washers and lead washers in k'i
c. Number of plain G.I sheet for anchor strap lograms
Metal thickness 0.40 to 0.60 mm d. Number of plain G.I. sheet for:
Length Up to 6.00 m.
2.00 mI1.10 m . .
Nominal width
Effective coverage 1.65 m 11.10 m. · 1'. Gutter and flushing
Ceiling, siding and fascia 2. Ridge, hip and valley roll .
Application
Colors Ivory, Forest green, mandarin red. 3. ~umber of nails to fasten the anchor strap in
Ocean blue, white, mahogany, and kilograms. '
Pine
. Paint type Regular polyester
Fasteners Steel blind rivets, Wafer Teks, on
Wood CWN#1
6-14 BRICK TILE ROOFING

Technical Data:
Descri tion Number re uired"
Mareeille Type (flat) 3.60 14.0 per sq. m.

Ondula'Type
SR. standard ridge
Half Mareeille
4.00
2.80
2.00
1S.0 per sq. m.
2.S/sq. m.
1.0/In.
13.01 sq.
m.
m.
~m ..rm. 5 ~105 .
15
JRT-1 3.00
. 3.75 4.0/sq. m. .1 2 L J 20
~ 45 em.
JRT-2
JRT-3 3.20 1.0 Isq. m. 5
3.20 1.0/sq. m. 15 . 5 r
JRT-4
2.20 4.01 sq. m. .
JRT-5
4.00 13.0 1 sq. m.
SRT-1 GUTTER FLASHING
2.20 1.01 sq. m. RIDGE AND HIP ROLL
SRT-2
SRT-L 2.25 1.0/sq. m.
SRT-R 2.25 1.0 lsq. m.
-:v::
JSR-1 2.00 1.0 Isq. m. 5 5
3.00 4.01 sq. m.
JSR-2
SRT-U 1.75 25.0 Isq. m.
SRT-T 1.50 25.0 l'Sq. rn'
11
Problem Exercise VALLEY ROLL
1. From the following figure, using 2 Yz corrugations and 30

FIGURE 6.25
centimeters end lapping on a 2" x 4" purlins solve for
the followillg:
239
238
2. From the following Figure, determine the number of

Asphalt Roof Shingle required. CHAPTER
A
TILE WORK
7-1 CERAMIC TILES
12.00
Ceramic Tile is one of man's oldest unique building
materials continuously in use because of its durability,
functional and aesthetic properties. It is practically indestructible
and offers unlimited choices not only in design pattern but also
in color that does not fade. -
Decorative ceramic tile was extensively used as early as

10.00 the period of Medieval Islamic Architecture from Persia to
Spain. Its popularity and used was extended up to the period of
ROOF PLAN contemporary Architecture.
Ceramic Tiles are Classified into:

1. Glazed Tiles
2. Unglazed Tiles
SECTION A-A SECTION B- B
Glazed tiles· are plincipally used for walls and light duty
FIGURE 6-28
floors and toppings.
Unglazed' tiles • are homogeneous composition, hard and

dense quality primarily used for floors and walls.
Various Types of Tiles
1. Porcelain Tiles .- are made out from the pressed dust

processed into fine smooth dense and shapely formed
face.
2. Natural Clay Tiles· are made from either the pressed or

the plastic method from dust clay that produces a dense
body with distinctive slightly textured appearance.
240 241
TILEWORK
3. Ceramic Mosaic Tiles - are mounted on a 30 x O~
centimeters paper as binder of the tiles to facilitate its
1. C;olve for the wall area.
laying or setting. Area :::: 1.50 x (5.00 + 3.00) = 12 sq. m.
4. Quarry Tiles - are made through the plastic extraction
process from natural clay or shale.
2. Solve for the area of one tile. .10 x .20 = .02 sq. m.
5. Faience Mosaic Tiles - are tiles less than 15 square 3. Di vide wa ll area by the area of one tile
centimeters in facial form.
12 = 600 . pieces 10 x 20 (4" x 8" glazed tiles)
.02
Special Purpose Ceramic Tiles:
a) Non -slip tiles c) Frost proof tiles B.) Solving for 20 x 20 Unglazed Floor Tiles
b) Ship or gallery d) Conductive tiles
1. Solve for th e floo r area.
ILLUSTRATION 7-1 Area = 5.00 x 3.00 = 15 sq. m .

From figure 7-1, determine the quantity of the following 2. Floor area divided by the area of one tile.
materials:
1§... = 375 pieces
a) 10 x 20 cm. glazed wall tiles .04
b) 20 x 20 cm. unglazed floor tiles
c) Cement for mortar c.) Solving f or t he Cement Mortar
d). White cement for joint filler
1. Find the total area of the wall and floor
,..
3.00m. Total area: 12 + 15 = 27 sq . m.
10 x 20 glazed tiles 1.50m .
2. Refer to Table 7-1, along cement mortar, multiply:
I
/~' -i' Cement mortar: 27 x .086 = 2.3 say 3 bags
1.50m. , / White cement filler: 27 x .50 = 13.5 say 14 kg.
2r ..{ 20 em . floor ti!es
3. For breakage allowance, 5 to 10% is satisfactory.

f
FIGURE 7-1
SOLUTION -2 ( By the Area Method)
SOLUTION -1 (By Fundamental Method) A.) Solving for the 10 x 20 c;:m- glazed wall tiles
A.) Solving for 10 x 20 Glazed Wall Tiles
1. Determine the wall area: A = 12 sq. m.
242 243
TaEWORK
2. Refer to Table 7-1. Using a 20 x 20 em. floor tiles;
Refer to Table 7-1. Along 4" x 8" (10 x 20) glaz~d t~les multiply:
2. under number of pieces per sq. m. (50.00), multiply.
15 x 25.00 = 375 pieces
12 sq. m x 50.00 = 600 pieces.
C.) Solving for the Cement Mortar and Joint Filler
TABLE 7•1 QUANTITY'OF TILES PER SQUARE FOOT AND METER
Commercial Size Number of Pieces per

1. Total area of wall and floor: 12 + 15 =27 sq. m.
Inches Cm. Sq. ft. Sq. M. 2. Refer to Table 7-1. along cement paste mortar, multiply:
3x3 7.5 x 7.5 16.0 177.80 Cement mortar: 27 x .086 = 2.3 bags
4x4 10 x 10 9.0 100.00 White cement: 27 x .50 = 13.5 say 14 kg.
4Y4x4Y4 10.6 x 10.6 8.0 88.40
4x8 10 x 20 6.0 50.00 3. For cutting and breakage, add 5 to 10 % allowance.
6x6 15 x 15 40 44.44
ll..LUSTRA TION 7-2
6x8 15 x 20 3.00 33.33
6 x 12 15 x 30 2.00 22.22
8x8 20x20 2.25 25.00 From Figure 7-2, determine the quantity of mosaic t/()(fr tiles,
8 x 12 20 x 30 1.50 16.66 intemal and extemal bead, capping and comer bead, 8" x .s"
8 x 16 20x40 1.125 12.50 glazed wall tiles, cemel)! paste mortar and white c.-emen-rti/ler.
10 x 10 25x25 1.44 16.00
12 x 12 30x 30 1.00 11.11
12 x 24 30x60 0.50 5.56
16 x 16 40x40 0.56' 6.25
20x20 50 x 50 0.36 4.00
24 x24 60 x 60 0.25 2.78
1.50 m . .
5 - point pent. tl~es 5 6.0/ft. 20 I Ln. M.
6 - point hex. tiles 5 4.9/ft 161 Ln. M.
External corner bead - By direct count
Internal corner bead - By direct count
Cement mortar - .086 bags per sq. m.

White cement joint filler- .50 kg. per sq. m.
Tile ADHESiVE ............. ..... . ... . .11 bag per sq. m.
s.) Solving for 20 x 20 em. Unglazed Floor Tiles
1. Determine the floor area. A = 5.00 x 3.00 =15 sq. m. FIGURE 7-2 PERSPECTIVE OF A COMFORT ROOM
244 245
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMAE TILEWORK
SOLUTION D.) Internal Bead
A.) Finding the Mosaic Floor Tiles 1. Solve for the length or perimeter of inside corner.
1. Solve for the floor areG'. .
2 ~ 3.00 m,) + 2 (2.00 m.) = 10.00 meters.
Area = 2.00 x 3.00 "". 0.00 square meters
2. Solve for the length of 4 vertical corners.
2. See Table 7-1'. Using 30x 30 cm. mosaic tiles, multiply
4 x 1.50 m. ht. = 6.00 meters
6.00 sq. m. x 11.11 = 66.7 say 67 pieces
3. Add 1 and 2 to get the total length of the inside corners.
B.} Finding the 20 x 20 em. Wall Glazed Tiles.
10.00 + 6.00 = 16.00 meters
1. Solve for the lateral area of the wall.
4. Divide by the length of one internal bead or tile (.20)
Wall Perimeter = 2 (3.00) + 2.00 + (2.00 - .60)
16.00 m. = 80 pieces 20 em . internal bead
P = 9.40 m. .20
Wall Area = 9.40 x 1.50 ht. = 14.1 sq. m.
E.) Capping
2. Refer to Table 7-1. Using 20 x 20 (8" x 8") glazed tiles;
multiply: 1. Solve for the perimeter of the wall tiles.
14.1 x 25 pes .I sq. m. = 353 pieces. P = 2 (3.00) + (2.00 - .80 door) = 7.20 m.
3. For cutting and breakage add 5 to 10% depending 2. Add capping along door jamb . .~
upon the mortality of breakage.
2.00 m. x 2 sides .............. .. .. .. . .. _ 4.00 IlL
C.) Solving for Cement Mortar and Joint Filler Total ...... .............. . ... .. 11.20 m.
1. Find the total Area of the wall and floor: 3. Divide by length of cap or tile.
Total area: (6.00 + 14.1) = 20.1 sq. m. 11.20= 56 pieces

.. 20
2. Refer to Table 7-1, along cement mortar and joint filler, ,
multiply F.) Internal and External Corner Bead
Ordinary Cement: 20.1 x .086 =

1.73 say 2 bags By direct counting, there are 4 internal corners, and 4
V\(hite cement: 20.1 x ,50 = 10 kg. . ~ ,-, external comer beads.
246 247
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE TILEWORl{
G.} Ordinary and White Cement for Paste and Filler 1. Knowing the floor area to be 200 square meters, refer to
Table 7-1 along Tile Adhesive, multiply:
1. Solve for the total floor and wall area.
200 sq. m. x .11 = 22 bags tile adhesive.
Area: 6.09 + 14.1 ::: 20 1 sq. m.
2. For joint filler. refer to Table 7-1. multiply:
2. Solve for the ordinary and white cement. Refer to Table
7-1, multiply: 200 sq. m. x .50 = 100 kgs.
Ordinary cement: 20.1 x .086 = 1.73 say 2 bags. Comment:
White cement: 20 .1 x .50 = 10 kgs.
1. The quantity of tile adhesive varies depending upon the
Summary thickness of the mortar applied and the mixture of fine
sand.
67 pes. 30 x 30 ( 12" x 12" ) mosaic tile~
353 pes. 20 x 20 ( 8" x a" ) glazed wall tiles 2. The values given in Table 7·1 was cO"1puted at 1 mm
80 pes. 20 cm. Intern.al bead thickness mortar.
57 pes. 10 cm . Cappmg
4 pes. Internal corner bead 3. The quantity of white cement joint filler also varies
4 pes. 'External corner bead depending upon the size of the tiles and its spacing
2 bags 40 kg. ordinary cement distance. The smaller the tiles, the more jOints there are
10 kilograms white cement. and mor~ filler is required. .
I
ILLUSTRATION 7-3 7-2 MARBLE TILES
inst~la':f I".!'~ ~are:.? :O~iS.'f;roeh Marble is a hard metamorphic IJmestone white or colored
texture and sometimes streaked or mottled in crystalline or
materials required. granular state capable of taking high polish. It is used in
Sculpture, furniture, topping slab, floors and the like.
SOLUTION
Marble as construction materials have been extenSively
A.) Solving for the .40 x .40 Ceramic Tiles used from the ancient time of the Greeks· to the Roman
Empire down to the modem and contemporary Architecture.
1. Find the floor area: (10 x 20) = 200 square meters
ILLUSTRATION 7-4
2. Refer to Table 7-1. Using .40 x.40 ceramic tiles, multiply:
200 x 6.25 = 1,250 pieces. From Figure 7·3, solve for the number of 30 x 60 cm.
marble tiles required including the cement and sand for class
e.) Solving for the Tile Adhesive and Joint Filler B mortar adhesive.
248 249
SIMPLIFIED, CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE TILEWORK
20.00 m. 5. Solve for Polymer liquid, hardener and calsomine

powder. Refer to table 7-2.
1.oom.
Polymer Liquid: 210 x .035 = 7.35 say 8 gallons
Hardener: 210 x .030 = 6.30 say 7 quarts
17.OOM.
Calsomine powder 210 x .045 =
9.45 say 10 kilos
TABLE 7·2 QUANTITY OF MARBLE TILES AND MORTAR

PER SQUARE METER
10.oom.
Cement in Bags Sand
Size Number Mixture
cm. t sq. m. A B C cu. m.
FLOOR PLAN
7.oom. 15 x 30 22.3 .45 .30 .225 .025
20x20 25.0 .45 .30 .225 .025
20x40 12.5 .45 .30 .225 .025
FIGURE 7-3 30x 30 11.1 .45 .30 .225 .025
30 x 60 5.6 .45 .30 .225 .025
4'0 x40 6.3 .45 .30 .225 .025
SOLUTION 60x60 2.8 .45 .30 .225 .025
1. Solve for the floor area
Polymer Liquid .035 gallons p'er square meter
A-1 = 7.00 x 20.00 = 140 sq. m. Hardener .030 quarts per sq. m.
Calsomine powder
A-2 = 7.00 x 10.00 = 70 sq. m.
.045 kilograms per sq. m.
Total Area ...... 210 sq. m. * Cement mortar computed at an aVEl-rage thickness of 25 mm.
2. Refer to Table 7-2. Using 30 x 60 cm. marble tiles; 7-3 VINYL AND RUBBER TILES
multiply:
The standard specifications for vinyl and rubber tiles
210 sq. m. x 5.56 = 1,168 pi_ces. provides that: .
~. Add 3-5 % allowance for breakage. " It shall be non-fading, odorless and non-slip even
when wet and shall be strong enough to withstand the
4. Solve for cement mortar using class B mixture. Refer to ordinary tear and wear, cleaning and moving of furniture
Table 7-2; multiply: without damage and shall be self dealing. "
Cement: 210 sq. r1 _ ~ .30 = 63 bags. Tiles shall be laid to conform with the manufacturer's
Sand: 210 sq. m. x .025 =
5.25 cu. m. specifications which partly states that:
251
250
TILEWORK
a. Adhesive cement shall be applied to the floor every atter
the tiles are laid on the surface. 7-4 GRANOLITHIC FLOOR
b. Tiles are pressed with linoleum roller to avoid blisters. .
Granolithic floor is a marble type mosaic floor finish that
c. After completion, all work shall be cleaned of cement, dirt uses Portland cement as base materials. It has a characteristic
of durability, beauty and variety installed by either: Monolithic-
and other substances. Cast in Place or Pre-Cast.
c. Apply two-coat of wax and polish to smooth shiny finish.
Monolithic or Cast·Place means massively, solid, single
and uniform floor finish cast in place. A mixture of cement and
TABLE 7-3 VINYL ANI RUBBER TILES marble chips to a proportion "of 1:3 is cast on top of a rough
floor slab surface to an average thickness of t.25 cm. The floor
Number per Gallons of Adhesive
is then grinded after it has attained SUfficient hardness to
Stock Size Sq. M. per sq. m.
withstand abrasion and vibration caused by the grinding
.20 x .20 (8" x 8" ) 25.00 .042 machine. Grinding of the floor surface is done not earlier than
48 hours after casting .
.225 x .225 ( 9" x 9" ) 19.75 .042
.25 x .25 (10" x 10" ) 16.00 .042
.30 x .30 (12" x 12" ) 11.11 .042 Pre-Cast refers to granolithic tiles in various dimensions
.40 x .40 (16" x 16" ) 6.25 .042 hydraulically pressed and molded in a factory. The distinctive
.60 x .60 (24" x 24" ) 2.78 .042 difference between the cast in place and the pre-cast
installation is the manner and place of casting or molding. The
former installed on site and the latter pressed at the factory.
ILLUSTRATION 7-5 Pre-cast is installed in a tile form while cast in place is installed
on a fresh mixed form.
. An office room with a g~neral. dimenso~f 7.~O: ~o: Normally, a dividing hard brass strips with alloy zinc are
de oin renovation. Determme the num er 0 .
~nYI ~'es ~eqUird
including its adhesive for installation. installed between tiles to contr~ and localize any shrinkage or
ii flexure cracks. The dividing strip t~icknes ranges from 1.56 to
I' 3.12 mm. or even thicker depending upon the design and
1'1' • SOLUTION speCifications.
II
I'
1. Solve for the floor area: 7.00 x 9.00 = 63 sq. m. ILLUSTRATION 7-6
2. Refer to table 7-3. Using a 30 x 30 cm. vinyl tile, multiply:
For an 8.00 m. by 10.00 meters room that specify cast-in
63sq.m.x11.11 = 700 pieces place granolithic floor, list down the materials required.
SOLUTION
i: 3. Solve for the adhesive cement. Refer to Table 7-3
multiply:
Ir
1. Determine the floor area.
63 x .C42 = 2.65 say 3 gallons.
Area: ·8.00 x 10.00 = 80 sq. m.
I
I i 252
253
;
TILEWORK
TABLE 7 ... GRANOLITHIC FLOORING
2. Determine the quantity of marble chips required. Refer
to Table 7-4, multiply: Bags Cement
Pieces per sq. m. Sand
Size per Mixture eu. m. Brass dMder
SO x .0125 = 1.0 cu. m.
, em. sq. m. per sq. m. meter / sq. m
A B
.3. Determine the quantity of white cement required. Refer
again to Table 7-4, multiply: 20x20 25.00 .338 .225 .018 10.8
25x25 16.00 .338 .225 .018 8.9
SO x .172 = 13.76 say 14 bags 30x30 11 .11 .338 .225 .018 8.0
40x40 6.25 .338 .225 .018 5.8
10.00m. 60x60 2.78 .338 .225 .018 3.4
____~ __~L- __- L____L-__~ __
Marble Chips ..... .0125 cu. m. per square meter

White Cement. .... .172 bag per square meter
8.00m.
7-5 CEMENT TILES

FLOOR PLAN
Cement Tile 'is a mixture of cement, sand and water
FIGURE 7 ...
hydraulically pressed, locally manufactured in the following
commercial sizes:
SOLUTION (By Pr~Cast Installation)
25mmx15x15cm . 1" x 6" x 6"
1. Find the floor area. 25 mm x 20 x 20 em . 1" x S" x 8"
25 mm x 25 x 25 em . 1" x 10" x 10"
Area: 10 x 8 = SO sq. m. 25 mm x 30 x 30 em . 1" x 12" x !2"
2. Refer to Table 7-4. Using 40 x 40 granolithic tilH.), Estimating the quantity of cement tiles include the cement
multiply: mortar for tile laying at an average thickness of 20 mm . The
methods used could be either:
80 sq. m. x 6.25 ::: 500 pieces
1. By the unit measure method or
3. U:::;ing class B mortar, refer to Table 7-4, multiply 2. By the Area method using Table 7-4
Cement: 80· x .225 = 1S bags

Sand : SO x .0188 = 1.5 cu. m. ILLUSTRATION 7-7
4: Solve for the brass divider. Refer to Table 7-4; multiply: Find the number of 20 x 20 cm. cement tiles required for a
school classroom with a general dimension of 7.00 x 9.00 m.
SO 54. m. x 5.8 = 464 meters usirg class B mortar mixture.
255
254
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE TILEWORK
9.00M. Estimating Wood Tiles

1. Solve for the net floor area to be covered with wood t'\
In square meter. I es
7.00M.
2. Wooq tiles come in square foot. Thus, multiply the floor
.' area found by 10.76 to get the number of square foot.
3. Multiply the floor area by. .165 to get the number of wood
FLOOR PLAN glue in gallons per square meter.
FIGURE 7,(, CEMENT TILES

ILLUSTRATION 7-8
SOLUTION An office ro~ measuring 12.00 meters wide by 20.00
met~ long specify wood tile flooring. Prepare the bill of
1. Solve for the floor area: matenals.
Area: = 7.00 x 9.00
2O.00m.
A = 63 square meters
2. Refer to table 7-4. Using a 20 x 20 cement tiles;

12.00
multiply:
63 sq. m. x 25 = 1,575 pieces
3. Refer again to Table 7-4. Using class .8 mortar;

multiply: FLOOR PLAN
Cement: 63 x .225 = 14.20 say 15 bags FIGURE 7.. WOOD TILE FLOORING
Sand: 63x.018= 1.13say1.5cu.m.
SOLUTION
7-6 WOOD TILES
1. Find the area of the floor
Wood tile is a well arranged thin small wood .pi~ces in
various dimensions with thickness ranging from 6 mm. to 8 mm. Ar~a: 12.00 x 20.00. = 240 sq. m.
Wood chips are carefully laid one at a time on a plane smo~th
surface concrete floor slab applied with a good kind of white 2. Convert to square foot, m~ltipY by 10.76.
glue. The wood tile floor is then grinded with No. 300 and 100
sand paper 24 hours after setting to produce a fine and smooth 240,10.76 = 2,583 sq, ft,
even surface. Sandpaper dust is then mixed with wood glue
used as filler of the jOints. 3. Add 5% allowance for cutting and edging.
257
Tll..EWOlU(
2,583 x .05 = 129.15 say 130 sq. ft.
SOLUTION
3. Add step 2 and 3
1. Solve for the wall area
2,583 + 130 =.2,713" pieces.
Area: 2.00 x 10.00 = 20 sq. sq. m.
4. Order: 2,713 square foot wood tiles.
2. ~:termin the thickness of the stone pebble finished say
4. Determine the wood glue at .085 gallon per square meter. mm. or .016 m., multiply by the wall area.
240 sq. m. x .085 = 20.4 say 21 gallons. 20. x .016 = .32 cu. m.
3. Refer to Table 2-1 . Using class "8" m·xt .
7-7 PEBBLES AND WASHOUT FINISH I ure, multIply:
Cement: .32 x 12.0 =
3.84 say 4 bags
Pebbles are small roundish stone used for walls and floor Pebbles: .32 x 1.0 = .32 cu. m. stone pebbles
finishes called washout and pebbles respectively. Pebble stone
is mixed with pure cement to a proportion of either 1:2 or 1:3
mortar mixture then applied on the wall or floor slab is then Problem Exercise
washed with water to a desired texture before the concrete
finally set. Twenty four hours later, the pebble surface is then 1. ~id comfort room has a f109r dimension of 4.00 meters
10
scrubbed with steel brush and a solution of water and moriatic cm ungla dmeters I.on~ The floor is finished with 20 x 20
acid to obtain the desired natural stone finish. cm: marbl!~ie2O'c tIles a~d the wall specifies 10 x 20
. meters hIgh. Solve for:
a.) 10 x 20 cm. marble tiles for wall
ILLUSTRATION 7-9 b.» 20 x 20 cm . unglazed ceramic floor tiles
.c. Cement ~oar using class A mixture
A wall roughly plastered has a general dimensions of 10.00 d.) Polymer liqUId, hardener and calsomi.le powder.
meters long and 2 meters high requires stone pebble washout
finish. List down the materials required. 2. ~:;r! following figure, find the wood tiles and adhesive
8.00M.
2.00m.
ELEVATION 8.00M.
FIGURE 7-7 PEBBLE WASHOUT

FIGURE 7-8 FLOOR PLAN
258
259
From the following floortla~fe:

d levation of a swimming
3. required using 10 x 10
pool, solve fOf the num er x 20 em unglazed CHAPTER
em. glazed tiles fOtfhthe :rta~ a~dwe cement'jOlnt filler.
floor tiles including e m
HARDWARE
55.00m.
8-1 DOLTS
Pebble finished deck
Bolt is a pin rod with head at one end and threaded at the
other end to receive a nut.
Different Types of Bolt

1. Machine bolt
2. Countersunk bolt
3. Key Head bolt
4. Stud bolt
Pebble finished decic Machine bolt is a pin rod witfl, head at one end and a Short
thread at the other end.
PLAN. Countersunk boft has a beveled head fitting into a counter-

sunk hole.
Key head boft has a head shape end frtted 10 a groove to

2m. 2m.
prevent turning when the nut is screwed inte the other end.
Stud bolt is a headless pin bolt threaded at both ends.

1.2m.
8-2 SIZE AND LENGTH OF DOLTS

The size or diameter of the bolt you need depends upon the
thickness of the object to be connected and the load stresses it
LONGITUDINAL SE~TION
has to carry or reSist. The effective length is the total length of
the bolt minus the head and the thread.
Effective Use orBolts

FIGURE 7-8
1. For lumber up to 5 em. thick, use 6 mm (1/4") diameter
260
261
HARDWARE
2. For 7.5 cm. mick (3") lumber use 10 mm. 3/8" diameter.
3. For 10 cm. (4") thick lumber use 12 mm. 1/2" diameter. , .~

4. Drilled hole shall be 1.F I' m. (1/16") larger than the bolt
diameter unless snug 1 ; nef'.essary.
5. Always use washers under head and nut of your ma-

(:)eLf -, ,jPWi1J('JD
chine bolt.
FIGURE 8·1 MACHINE BOLT
6. For carriage bolt, use washer under nut only.
7. Use toggle bolt for attaching fixture to plaster wall.
8. Use expansion bolt for fastening to masonry.

0··-, :. ' ~ i=a)
9. For outdoor exposure, use brass or cadmium plated fin- Bevel Head
ish bolt. Countersunk Head
TABLE 8-1 U.S. STANDARD THREAD OF BOLTS
Length D I AMETER OF BOLTS Turned Oval Head

Bas'( ard Head
Inches ¥.t 5/8 % 7/8 1 1-1/8 1%
mm 12 16 20 22 2.5 28 31
8·2 CARRIAGE BOLTS
10.0 1,44 2.45 3.64 5.24 7.23 9.78 12.60
=;:~
12.5 1.69 2.85 4.21 6.01 8.24 11 .06 14.18
15.0 1. 94 3.24 4.78 :6.78 9.26 12.33 15.76
17.5 . 19 3.64 5.35 7.55 10.27 13.61 17.35 Nut End Bod
Y
rAttachment Head
20.0 2.45 4.03 5.90 8.32 11.29 14.89 18.93
22.5 2.70 4.43 6.49 9.09 12.30 16.10 20.51
25.0 2.95 4.82 7.06 9.86 13.31 17.44 22.09

27.5 3.20 5.22 7.63 10.63 14.33 18.72 23.67
30.0 3.46 5.61 8.20 11.40 15.34 20.00 25.26
32.5 3.71 6.01 8.77 12.17 16.3e 21 .27 26.84

35.0 3.96 6.40 9.34 12.94 17.37 22.55 28.42 Stud Bolt
FIGURE 8-3 VARIOUS TYPES OF BOLT
262
263
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMAn HARDWARE
Estimating the Length of Bolts
Ra ilroad Track Bolt

oWelded Eye Bolt
a.) Wooden Post Anchored by Post Strap. The length of
the bolt is equal to the width of the post plus the two thickness
.
of the post strap plus 20 mm allowance
. for the thread and nut.
Length of Bolt = Width of Post + 12 mm + 20 mm.
Wooden Post
r
~
P- w.1. PostStrap
Machine Bolts _ o[ -- ---- -- -.. .
~
Step Bolt
Plain and Shouldered
Forged EyeBolt
Concrete Footing
FIGURE 8-5 POST ANCHORED BY POST STRAP
Tire Bolt b.) Post and Single Beam is equal to the width of the post
plus the thickness of the beam.
Length of Bolt = Width of post + Thickness of Beam
Stove Bolt
Beam or girder
Machine Bolt -U,":Z=$~ID
Plate Washer -
Wooden Post ---...'-II--

t = 20 mm dap
. Expansion Bolt CJ
FIGURE 8-4 VARIOUS TYPES OF BOLT FIGURE 8~ POST AND SINGLE BEAM
264 265
HARDWARE
e.) Length of Bolts on Trusses.
c.) Post with Two Beams of the Same Thickness. The
Length of bolt is equal the width of post plus thickness of two Length of Bolts = Thickness of 1, 2, 3 ... + 20 mm
beam minus the 20 mm dap. (There are two dap opposite the
column sides but only one is subtracted because the other 20
mm dap is reserved for the thread that will receive the nut.)
Length of Bolt = Width of Post + 2 Beam thickness - 20 mm

Woed Block
!I{~ ::>,
Machine Bolts
~ Plate Washer
Machine Bolt FIGURE 809 lENGTH OF BOLTS ON TRUSSES
Beam or Girder
TABLE 8·2 WEIGHT OF BOLTS WITH SQUARE HEADS AND
HEXAGONAL NUTS PER 10. BOLTS
..
Diameter in. Y. 5/16 3/8 7/16 1/2 . 9/16 5/8 0/. 7/8 1
FIGURE 8·7
of Bolts mm 6 7 9 10 12 14 16 19 22 25
POST WITH lWO BEAMS OF THE SAME THICKNESS
No. ofthread 20 18 16 14 13 12 11 10 9 9
d.) Post and Two Beams of Different Thickness. Per inch
Length of Bolt =Width of post plus ( t, + t"2) - 20 mm. Diameter of 5 6 8 9 11 12 13 18 19 22
Top Drill 13 1 ~ 23
.27 ~ 17 32 ~ 55
64 4 16 64 64 64 32 64 4 64
8-3 SCREW
Machine Bolt - - "CI~Fz:PD
. In Carpentry work, screw is sometimes used instead of nails
Beam-2
due to the following advantages
Beam -1
Post
t. Greater holding power
2. Neat in appearance
FIGURE 8-8 3. Less chance of injuring the materials
4. Ease of removal in case of repair
POST AND lWO BEAMS OF DIFFERENT THICKNESS
267
266
HARDWARE
How to Choose Your Screw 1. Iron 4. Brass 5. Copper
2. Steel 5. Bronze 6. Aluminum
1. Select one that is long enough wherein one half of two
thirds of its length will enter the base in ' which threads
b.) As to Shape of Head
are embedded.
2. The length of the screw should be 1/8" or 3 mm less
1. Flat 8. Headless
than the combined thickness of the boards being joined.
2. Round 9. Slotted (wood screw)
3. Use fine thread screw for hard wood and coarse tread
3. Fillister 10. Square (lag screw)
for soft wood.
4. Oval 11. Hexagonal
5 . Winged 12. Clove
How to Use the Screw 6. Bung 13. Grooved
7. Punched
1. Always drill lead hole for the screw.
2. Hole on top board should be Slightly larger than the
c.) As to Shape of the point
shank, in second board slightly smaller than the
threaded portion.
1. Standard
3 .. In soft wood, bore to depth half the length of the thread.
2. Full Length
4. In hard wood, bore nearly as deep as the length of the
3. Coarse
screw.
5. For lag screw, drill hole two thirds its length then drive
d.) As to Duty
in with hammer, and finally tighten with wrench
1. Wood (light duty)
How to Buy Screw 2. Lag ( heavy duty)
1'. Screws are classified by gauge and length in inches.
Each gauge has a variety of different lengths which e.) As to Finish
may be obtained up to 12. cm. (5 inches)
2. When ordering screw, specify head shape (e.g . round 1. Bright 6 ~ Blued
head). Finish (brass), gauge number and length from 2 2. Nickel Plated 7. Silver Plated
to 5 centimeters. 3. Brass 8. Bronzed
3. Square headed lag screw comes in diameter of 6 mm 4. Coppered , 9.. Japanned
to 25 mm (1/4 to 1 inch) with its length from 4 cm. to 30 5. Lacquered 10. Galvanized
cm . (1-1/2 to 12 inches)
The Three Shapes of Screw Point are:
Wood Screw
1. Gimlet POint - Is used cln wood and coach screw.
Wood screw is a screw nail with handed coarse thread to
give a grip. 2. Diamond POint - ts used when more driving is done
before turning as in drive and lag screw.
a.) Materials Used
3. Conical Point - Same as the diamond point.
268
269
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE HARDWARE
TABLE 8-3 STANDARD WOOD SCREW AND NUMBER PER KILOGRAMS
1 1% 2 2% 3 3% 4 4% 5 6
Inches. %
12 25 37 50 62 75 87 100 112 125 150
mm
515
Number 6,211 3,443 2,~9 1,779 1,414 1,186 1,126 910 739 655 Gimlet Diamond Cone
FIGURE 8-11 TYPES OF WOOD SCREW AS TO THE POINT
_"TA Flat Head Round Head
m. ,,;:'7.
Ordinary Lag Screw
Oval Head
c:C
Counter Sunk Fillister Head
~Felo ~ Closed Head
Coach Lag Screw

a; -~
6£!-oo"" Round Bung Head
i .~ d1M
Grooved Headless
~eQ-
/
Dowel
IW"·. Pinched Head

*':~
Square Bung Hea0
E;:::a ~ .Ef~
Winged i Wing~d I Winged Head
~t.
Drive
FIGURE 8-12 VARIOUS TYPES OF WOOD SCREW

FI.:;URE 8.10 STANDARD WOOD SCREW POINT
271
270
HARDWARE
8-4 NAILS
The first handmade nails were used in the United States 2d
and lasted up to the end of the Colonial Period. Likewise, in
France light nails were made by hand and hammer out of steel 3d
wire ~s eartyas th.e days of Napoleon-1. In 1851 , wire nails
was first introduced bywilliam Herser of New York. Twenty five
years later in 187S, Father Goebel introduced the manufacture
of wire nails. And at the last part of'the 18th century, twenty
three patents for nail making macnine were approved in the
United States which was introduced later in England.
Kinds of Nail as to:

1. Cross Sectional Shape
a. Cut (rectangular) b. Wire (Circular)
2. Size
a. Tacks b. Sprigs c. Brads d. Nails e. Spike
3. Materials
a. Steel b. Brass c. Copper
4. Finish
a. Plain b. Coated c. Galvanized d. Blued
5. Service
a. Common b. Fleoring c. Finishing d. Roofing e. Boat
~ ... s
Chisel Point
~
Front
Sheared
.
~ :~,
Side
I I
,l ' ' :I
Cut Nail
FIGURE 8·14 LENGTH OF NAILS
( Actual Size)
Bevel
2d to SOd - For general construction... .......... Common nail
2d to 40d - For light construction household use.... .. ... Box
2d to 40d - For Interior trim
.............. . .................. Casing
2d. to 20d - For Cabinetworx furniture ............. Finishing nail
Round Blunt Diamond Long ~moi1d Needle 2d. to 20d - Flooring construction...... ...... ...... ............. Cut
3/1S" to 3" - For light work moldings..................... Wire brad
FIGURE 8·13 TYPES OF NAIL POINTS
6" tp 12", - For heavy construi~ ............ :. ............. Spike
272
273
Tacks
IGS!li@m~ 2d to 60d .. . Common Nails
Tacks'are small sharp ' .
a thin 'flat head. Tacks ar~:I n~lIs WI ', :lpering sides and
pets and flashing of any thin mate~:Y osed In fastening car-
D,,;. ..I ...,........; ......... iIi...... 2d to · 40d .. .. . Casing
, 0·...........· .....,....,.........,....... 2d to 20d...... Finishing Nail
O1;;;;;c§##§§*;;;*me=me§;;;;;;;;:;;k#*- 3/16" x 3" \Mre Brand
I 2d to 20d ....... cut '

Fe.
tali~
Tacks
1111!!!!!i!!!iiiii!!!91Ii!!ii!!!!!i!i!!!i> 6" to 12" ..... Spike
....
FIGURE 8-17 TACKS
FIGURE 8-111 TYPES OF NAIL AND THEIR USES
TABLE 8-4 NUMBER OF WIRE TACKS PER KILOGRAM
1 T T u l'
Inches Length (mm) Number per Kilogram
..
.: ::::
:: 1/8 3
3116 35,200
OVal ,
5 23,465
Flat Large Flat Large Flat Reinforced Wire Spike % 6
5/16 17,600
B 14,OBO
3/B "10
7/16 11,732
12 B,BOO
9116 14
51B 5,B65
16 4,400
Rourid Offset Hook 11116 17

Round OVal 3,120
COunte .... nk % 19
Countersunk 2,930
13/16 20.5 "2,514
TTY iiT
71B 22 1,953
15/16 24
1 1,760
25 1,599
Cut NaU Brad Diamond 1-111 6 27
Non-Leak Cone Curved
1-1l8 1,465
Barge Spike 2B 1,200
-
FIGURE 8-18 TYPES OF HAIL HEAD
274 275
Sprigs There are two kinds of Spike;
Sprigs are small heaaless nails sometimes called barbed 1. The flat head, diamond pOint
dowel pins. The regular size of sprigs ranges from 12 mm. tc 2. The oval head, chisel pOint
5.0 cm. gauge NO.8 wire or 4 mm. diameter.
Brads
Flat Head Diamone Point
Brads are small slender nails with smalf deep heads. The
~ril';:
common varief.y is made in 'Sizes from 2.5 c. n. (2d) to 15 em.
(6d) in lenqth. Flooring brads ranges from 5 (; n. long.
)
TABLE 8..fS FLOOR BRAOS TECHNICAL DATA Oval Head Chisel Point
FIGURE 8-18 SPIKE
Size Len~th Gau, e Head dia. Approx. Gauge No. Nails
mm No. Gauge No.1 kg. No. per kg.
Boat Spike
-- -
6d 50 11 6 322 12 14,500
7d 32 11 6 277 12 12,500
8d 37 10 5 200 11 9,000
44 10 TASLE 8-6 COMMON WIRE NAILS TECHNICAL DATA
9d 5 173 11 7,800
10d 75 9 4 131 10 5,900 Gauge Length
12d 81 8 3 95 9 4,300 Approximate Number
Size No. Inches
16d 87 ·7 2 76 8 3,450 mm per kg. per keg
20d 100 6 1 57 7 2,600
2d
3d
15
14 1~
114 25
31
. 1,831
1,177
82.400
4d 12.5 1~
53,000
Nails 5d 12.5
37 666 30,100
1~ 44
6d 11.5 580 26,100
Nails is a popular name for all kinds of nail except those ex- 2 50 382
7d 11.5 214 17,200
treme sizes. such as Tacks and Spikes. The most generally 8d 56 344 15,500
10.25 2~ 63
used nails are called common nails from 2.5 cm. to 15 cm. 9d 10.25 208 9,400
2~ 69
10d 9 Hi8 8,500
3 75 138
12d 9 6,250
Spikes 16d
314 81 124 5,600
8 3~ 88
I
20d 6 , 93 4,200
An ordinary spike is a stout piece of metal from 7.5 cm. to 30 4 100 58
40d 4 5 2,625
ern. in length, much thicker In proportion than a common nail. 50d 112 45 2,040
3 5~ 125
60d 2 34 1,540
Spike is much in used in fastening railroad rails, construction 6 150 20 910
of doqks, piers and other work using' large timber.
276 277 .
SIMP\-IFIED ~P'NSfRUCTIQ. ESTIMATE
TABLE 8.7 COM~tl BAADS TECHNICAL DATA Cement coat~ nalla meaaured here
Approximate Number
LEingth. •;,er kg.
Ie per. keg
Inches . nUll
~e
."
1,904 85,700
.'
1· 2 ~ 54,300
2d . ~ 1 1,2M Bright ftat head nalla meaaured here
3d 1~ 29,800
37 662
4d 11h 566 25,500
1~ 44 17,900 FIGURE 8·19 CONCRETE NAILS
5d 50 397
6d 2 340 15,300
2~ 56 10,000
7d 63 224 TABLE 8-8 QUANTITY OF CEMENT COATED NAILS
8d 21h ,197 8,900
2~ 69 6,600
9d 75 146 Length Penny Gauge No. per keg
10d 3 137 6,200
3~ 81 4,900
12d 88 108 1 2d 15 1,863
16d 31h 68 3,100
4 '100 2,400 1% 3d 14 1,195
20d 112 53
30d 41h 40 1,800 11h 4d 121h -651
5 125 . 1,300
40d 137 28
50d 51h 1'% 5d 121h 559
2 6d 11 % 367
2~ 7d 11 % 330
TABLE 8-8 ORDINARY SPIKE TECHNICAL DATA
2% 8d 10~ 222
. Approx. No.
Length 2-213 9d 10~ 202
mm per kg. ~
Size Inches \
3 10d 9 145
75 90 3~ 12d 9 149
10d 3 83
3V. 81 3% 16d 8 103
12(1 88 66
16d 31h 50 4 20d 6 64
4 100
20d 112 37 30d 5 48
30d 4112 4%
125 28
40d 5 22 5 40d 4 37
5112 137
50d 150 19 31
60d 6 51h 50d 3
175 15 i
175mm 7 6 60d 2 24
200 9
200mm 8 8
9 225
225mm 250 7
250mm 10 6
12 300
300mm
279
278
SIMPT."IFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE
TABLE 8-10 USES AND APPROXIMATE QUANTITY OF NAILS
Material Per I
Kilogram
required
Size Kind of Nail
CHAPTER (\:\{'.,
Floor joist & bridging

at 30 cm. on center sq. m. .17 30d CWN
STAIRCASE
T & G wood board 9-1 INTRODUCTION
1" x 4" sq. m. .15 6d Flooring brad
1" x 6" sq. m. .09 6d Flooring brad
Carpenters who have experienced building stairs have found
Siding wood board on it to be an art in itself. Technically, building staircase requires
Studs at 60 cm. o.c. structural carpentry and craftsmanship of cabinet making. It is
like constructing an inClined bridge between two points on
1" x 6" sq. m. .08 6d Casing brad different floors with uniform well proportional treads and risers
1" x S" sq. m. .06 6d Casing brad that are safe and comfortable to climb and descend .
Studs/ Nailing Strips
at 40 cm. o.c. sq.m. .OS Sd CWN 9-2 DEFINITION OF TERMS
at 60 em. o.c. sq. m. .05 Sd CWN
Scaffolding per / Meter To start with this study, it is important to know and familiarize
height .73 20d CWN first with the technical terms used in building staircase.
of post
Baluster - A small post supporting the handrail or a coping.
Plywood board .
4' x 8 fL Balustrade • Is a series or row of balusters joined by a
handrail or coping as the parapet of a balcony.
Nailed at .15 em. o. e. per
joist at 40 x 60 em dist Sheet .055 2d Finishing nail
Bearer • Is a support for winders wedged into the walls
secured by the stringer.
On studs at 40 x 40 em. per
Spacing distance. sq. m. .033 2d Finishing nail
Carriage • Is that portion supporting the steps of a wooden
stairs. .
Rafters, purlins at .70 sq .. m. .20 20d CWN
distance Close String - A staircase without open well as in dog stairs.
Ceiling jOist at AO x .60 Cocktail Stair - A term given to a winding staircase.

Spacing distance . sq. m. .055 Sd Finishing nail
Circular Stair· A staircase with steps winding in a circle or
cylinder.
280 281
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE STAIRCASE
. Elliptical Stairs:~ Those elliptical in plan where each tread Rise - The height 'of a flight of stairs from landing to landing
assembly is converging in an elliptical ring in a plan. or the he!ght betweeM successive treads or stairs.
Flight of Stairs - A series- of steps leading from one landing Riser - The vertical face of a stair step .
.to the other.
Run - The horizontal distance from the first to the last riser of
Front String - The string on the side of stairs where handrail a stair flight.
is placed.
! Spandrel - The angle formed by a stairway.
. Flyers - Are steps in a flight that are parallel with each other.
Staircase - The whole set of stairs, the structure containing
Geometrical Stairs - A flight of a stair supported by the wall a flight of a stair.
,
at the end of the steps. '
Stair Builders Truss - Crossed beams which support the
Half Space - . The interval between two flight of steps in landing of a stair.
staircase.
Stair Head - The initial stair at the top of a flight of a Stair or
Handrail - A rail running parallel with the inclination of the staircase.
stairs that holds the balusters.
Stair Headroom - The clear vertical height measured from
Hollow Newel - An opening in the middle of the staircase as the nOSing of a stair tread to any overhead .obstruction.
distinguished from solid newel wherein the ends of steps ~re
Stair Well - The vertical shaft which contain a staircase.
attached.
Housing - The notches in the string board of a stair for the Step - A stair which consist of one tread and one riser.
II reception of stairs. Steps - The assembly consisting of a tread and a riser.
/
,:1;: Knee - is the convex bend at the back of the handrail. String - The part of a flight of stair which forms its ceilin}) or \
il·' • ,
Landing - The horizontal floor as resting place in a flight.
soffit. .
I ~ , Soffit - The underneath of an arch or molding.

Newel - The central column where the steps of a circular
II staircase wind. String Board - The board next to the wall hole which
receives the end of the steps .
.!
I ,I'
:
Nosing ~ The front edge of the steps that project beyond the
riser. Tread Run - The horizontal distance between tW0
consecutive risers, or the horizontal distance between)11e
Ii Pitch - The angle of inclination of the horizontal of the stairs. nOSing or the outer edges of successive treads on an oper.rriser
stair all measured perpendicular to the front edges of the nosing
Ramp - A slope surface that rises and twists simultaneously. or tread.
ill
, Ii·
282 283
'leI'
STAIRCASE
Tread - The horizontal part of a step including the nosing.
9 - 3 STAIRCASE LAYOUT
Tread length - The dimension of a tread measured
perpendicular to the normal line of travel on a stair. The fundamental prinCiples in laying out a staircase are:
Tread Width - The dimension of a tread plus the projection 1.
Detennine first the clear height of the riser in meter
of the nosing. Normally, the ~tandr comfortable rise Per step is fro~
1.7 to. 18 centImeters. The maximum height of a ste
Wall String - The board placed against the wall to receive
the end of the step. riser. IS 20. centimeters and is only allowed on speci:'
conslderat~ whe~ the physical conditions dictate
Well - The place occupied by the flight of stairs. However, th,s heIght is understood to b .
c0f!1fortable for both ascending and descni~g ~
staIrs.
2. Detennine ~h . e .number of steps from the first to the next

floor by dlv~rng the total, height of the rise by the
chosen step nser of either 17 or 18 centimeters.
FIGURE 9·1
,
Well Hole - The opening in the floor at the top of a flight or
stairs. FIGURE 9.2
Well Staircase - A winding staircase enclosed by walls 3. Divide t~e run distanc~ by the effective width of the
resembling a well. tread wh,ch normally measured as fOllows:
Width of Tread
Effective Width
Winders - Steps not parallel with each other.
25 em .... ... ..... .... .. ...... .. 20 em
30 .
Wreath - The whole of a helically curved hand rail. 3 em .... .... .... .. . .. ....... .. 25 em.
5 em ............ . :........ .... 30 em.
284
285
Effective width of the tread is its width minus the nosing SOLUTION
4. If the result of step 3 is less than that of step 2, adjust 1. The height of the rise is 2 20
the length of the run or the width of the tread to obtain .riser Divide: . meters. Assume a 17 cfT!.,
an equal 9istances and proportional steps. -
R~se = Number of risers
5. The height of the risers should be equal and uniform RIser .
from the first to the last step of the stair. No fractional
2.20 = 12.94
value in dividing the rise by the riser per step.
.17
6. If fractional value could not be avoided in dividing the . 2. The answer has a fractio I
rise by the riser, adjust the fractional value in equal says; "There should b na ~ounta of .94: ·The rule
proportion to the number of risers, but in no case shall the rise by the riser n \ no fract~onl value In dividing
the riser per step be greater than 19 centimeters nor height per riser. . hus, adjust to have an eq!Jal
less than 17 centimeters. Otherwise, the stairs will not
be considered as "Comfortable to ascend and descend 3. From the result of steo 2
disregarding the decimal a~/ . ;:,ole value of 12
Floor line Flooring
2.20 = .183 m. or 18.3 centimeters
. 12
4. ' Thp. 1 '3.3 is now the h . ht .

Headroom height of 17 . ~Ig of the nsers per step instead
5cm. Nosing and 19 as assumed ThiS
,. ' , vdl ue IS Wit. h'In the range of 17
.
2.20 m. Rise , Gm. considered as comfortable stair.
Stringer
5. Detennine the distance of the run 'using the fonnula.
17 to 19 em. Run = No. 0 f Steps - 1 x Effective width of the tread.

Floor line
Where:
Run Effective
. . width =
Tread wl'dth - NoSlng
.
NoSlng IS from 2 to 5 em.
FIGURE 9-3
Run = 12 - 1 x .25 cm.
ILLUSTRATION 9-1 Run = 2.75 meters i
From figure 9-3 determine the number of steps and the There were instances wh th
height of the rise are knowne~ .e length of th~ ru~ and the
height of the riser if the total height of the rise is 2.20 meters
detennine the width of the tread gldvethn, th~ question IS how to
. using a 30 centimeters wjdth of the tread. an e height of each riser.
286. 287
ILLUSTRATION 9 -2 3. Assuming that there are 15 steps instead of 14.72

Determine the final height of the riser.
Determine the height of 'the riser and the width of the tread
when the rise is 2,65 meters and the run is 2.75 meters.
~ = 17.7 cm. This amount is between the
.15 acceptable value of 17 to 19 cm.
4. Assume that the tread width is 30 centimeters. The

Floor line Well Hole effective width of the step is 30 minus .05 nosing 25 =
centimeters.
Ceiling
5. If there are 15 steps, multiply by the effective width of
the tread.
Head room height Run = Number of steps - 1 x 25 cm. ( see Fig. 9-4 )
Run = (15 - 1) x 25 = 350 cm. or 3.50 meters
Take note that 3.50 meters is longer than 2.75 meter

distance of the run as specified in the problem, therefore,
adjustment of the tread width is necessary.
Rise = 2.65
a. From step 4, assume tread width = 25 not 30 cm .
b. The effective width is: 25 cm - 5 cm. nosing = ·20 cm.

Riser?
c. Check distance by trial multiplication:
Number of steps x Ef~ctive width = Run

CROSS SECTION AND DIFFERENT PARTS OF STAIR 14 x .20 = 2.80 meters.
FIGURE 9-4 d. This value is acceptable since the existing distance of
the run is 2.75 meters with a difference of 5 cm. which
could be adjusted proportionally to th-e number of steps.
SOI~UTN
1. Assume the riser height to be 18 centimeters. 9-4 THE STRINGER

2. Divide the rise height by '18 centimeters. Stringer is the inclined plane supporting the treads and the.
risers of a stair. The length of the stringer is determined by the
~ = 14.72 say 15 steps use of the Pythagorean Formula or by actual measurement
.18 using a meter rule or tape:
:~8el 289
STAIRCASE
The ~Stel Square" is very useful .and effective tool in ILLUSTRA TION 9-3
staircase framing. Know its fUnctions and a satisfactory result
will be obtained. Stringer is classified according to. the methods
of.attaching the ~ser and the tread as illustrated in Figure 9-5. . From ~igure 9-6 determine the length of an open cut type
stnnger with the following data. .
The Different Type of Stririger are: Run distance =
3.50 meters
Height of the rise = 2.50 meters
1. Cut type stringer - Is popularly used in most modern
and contemporary house designs.
Well Hole
2~ Cleated type stringer- Is used for a very rough work.
3. Built-up type stringer- Is adopted on a wide ,stairs that

requires a center stringer.
4. Rabbet type stringer - Is adopted on fine works usually

made at the mill. The risers and treads are hefd in the Rise H = 2.50 m.
rabbets by wedges that are set in with glue.
Floor line
Stringer
Run = 3.50 Meters
CUT TYPE CLEATED

FIGRE 9-6 OPEN CUT TYPE STRINGER
SOLUTION -1
1. Using the formula:
Stringer. -.......t..;;1J..
~tringe Length = Run 2 + Rise 2
BUILT UP RABBETED TYPE

Length = v' 3.50 2 + 2.50 2
FIGURE 9~ TYPE OF STRINGER

Length =( 18.50 = 4.30 meters or 14.3 ft.
290
291
STAIRCASE
Find the number of steps assuming 18 em. riser height.
3. Riser Height 'is - 2 52
Rise = 2.50 m. = 13.88 say 14 steps riser 18 em. -. meters. ( See under height of
Riser .18
Stairs Inclination Angle
TABLE 9-1 HEIGHT OF RISE, tJ ~GTH OF STRINGER AND RUN
OF STAIRWA, IN METERS Ladder 50° to 90°
Ramp 1° to 20°
No. of Length of Stringer Length of Run Height of Rise
Stairs 20° to 50°
Steps Tread Width Tread Width Rise Height
Ideal Stairs . 30° to 35°
250m. 300m. 250m. 300m. 170m. 180m.
4
5
1/05
1.31
1/23
1.54
.80
1.00
1/00
1.25
.68
.85
.72
.90
-
TABLE 92 SPiRAl S1:AIRS
6 1/57 1/85 1.20 1.50 1.02 1.08 Open Riser Tread

Tread Degrees Cantilever Tread
7 1.84 2.16 1.40 1.75 1.19 1.26 No. or rread Riser
8 2.10 2.47 1.60 2.00 1.36 1.44 in Circle Head f"<oom
cm . Meter
9 2.36 2.78 1.80 2.25 1.53 1.62
10 2.62 3.08 2.00 2.50 1.70 1.80 22° - 30' 16
28° - 0' 17.5 2.10
12 - 13 18.0 I
11 2.89 3.39 2.20 2.75 1.87 '1. 98 30 0 - 0' 2.00
12 - 13 20.0
12 3.15 3.70 2.40 3.00 2.04 2.16 2.00
13 3.41 4.00 2.60 3. 25 2.21 2. 34
14 3.67 4.31 2.80 3.50 2.38 2.52
15 3.94 4.62 3.00 3.75 2.55 2.70 CANTILEVER TREADS
16 4.20 4.93 3.20 4.00 ' 2.72 2.88

17 4.46 5.24 3.40 4.25 2.89 3.06
18 4.73 5.55 3.60 4.50 3.06 3.24 PLAN
19 5.00 5.85 3.80 4.75 ' 3.23 3.42
20 5.62 6.16 4.00 5.00 3.40 3.60
SOlJUTION - 2 OPEN RISER TREADS ELEVATION
This problem can be solved instantly using Table 9-1 .

PLAN
o
... -
~St~30 -:
1 . . Length of Stringer is =
4.31 meterS. ( See column under
width 30 em. along 14 number of steps.) fIf; )-
2. Length of Run is = 3.50 meters. (See under column ELEVATION
width 30 em. along 14 number of steps.
FIGURE .9-7 CANTILEVER TD
·~S
.. " ...
292
293 .
SIMPLIFIED ~NSTRUCIO ESTIMATE STAIRCASE
The National Building Code on Stairs Provides that: Problem Exercise

1. The minimum width of any stair ·slab and the minimum
diameter dimension of an ' landing should be at least 110
1. ~:h ~:'fIt an ideal L - Shape staircase
centimeters.
Width of stair = 2.00 meters
2, The maximum rise of stairs step should be between 17 Rise
Tread
= 3.00 meters
and 19 centimeters . A rise less than 16 centimeters nor = 30 centimeters
more than 19 centimeters is not considered as ideal stair. Nosing = 5 centimeters ·
Riser height =?
3. The minimum width of a tread exclusive of the nosing shall Run =?
be 25 centimeters.
4. The maximum height of a straight flight between landings

is generally 3.60 meters except those serving as exit from Landing
2.00m.
places of assembly where a maximum height ·of 2.40
meters is normally specified.
5. The number of stairway in a building depends upon the

number of probable occupants per floor the width of
stairway and the building floor area. The distance from
I
any point in an open floor area to the nearest stairway
shall not exceed 30 meters and that the corresponding
distance along ' corridor in a particular area shall not UP
exceed 38 meters.
6. The combined width of all the stairway in any floor shall be

accommodate at one time the total number of persons
occupying the largest floor area under the condition that
one person for each .33 square meter floor area on the
landing and haHs within the stairway enclosure.
Rite = 3.00 m.
7. In building of more than 12 meters high and all
merchantile buildings regardless of height the required
stairways must be completely enclosed by fireproof
partitions and at least one stairway shall continue to the Run=?
roof. ELEVATION
FIGURE 9-8
294 295
. , . k a sketch 'plan of an Ideal U-

, From the following figure,. ma de not exceed 19 centimeters
shape staircase where the nS;~h ~ 30 centimeters tread and 5 CHAPTER
nor less than 1~ cenTtl~ of the stair is 3.509 meters.
centimeters nosing. en
PAINTING ·
10-1 PAINT
Landing 2,4Qm,
Paint is cOmmonly referred to as a "Surface Coating". It is

defined as "a coating applied to a surface or subtrate to
decorate, to protect, or to perform some other specialized
functions.
Almost everybody knows the word paint, its uses, colors,

including the orand name rated -as poor, good and durable .
. There are those who have little knowledge of paint but rated a
brand based on how it is advertised while others on cost.
UP
FIGURE 9-8 U-SHAPE STAIRCASE Generally, good quality paint is a little bit costlier than that of
a poorer one. However, in terms of Surface area coverage,
ease of work and durability, good quality paint is cheaper than
that of poorer one. Thus, never have a second thought of
having the best paint from a reputable brand, otherwise, to think
of saving a few cents for your paint might turn out later to be
more expensive.
Obtaining a good quality of paint from a reputable brand

however, is not a guarantee that you have a long lasting paint.
There are numerous kinds of paint as there are various kinds of
surface to be painted.
Applying premium quality paint to a surface not suitable for

such type of paint is considered as technical failure. Failure
which cannot be gUaranteed by the cost neither the brand of .
paint.
It is therefore imperative to know which paint for what kind of

surface to be applied with.
297
Ii
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE PAIN:TiNG
6. Emulsion-Type Film Formers. The solvent evaporation

10-2 INGREDIENT OF PAINT and the droplets of plastiC film former floating in it flows
together to form a film.
Paint has the following ingredients:
Solvent
1. Vehicle
2. ~olvent
Solvent are low viscosity volatile liquid used in coating to
3. Pigment improve application properties.
4. Additives
Vehicle Pigment
Vehicle is that substance in the paint that gives a c~n u n ityu Paint Pigments are solid grains or particles of uniform and
film and provides adhesion to the surface or $ubtrate. It IS cal ~e controlled sizes which are generally insoluble in the vehicle of
vehicle because it carries the ingredients ·to the subtrate an the coating .
remain on the surface after the paint has dried.
The vehicle contains a film former. A combination of th ~ Paint Pigment contributes to the fonowing properties.
following ingredients:
a. For the decoration of function - It contributes opacity,
a. Resins
:1 b. Plasticisers color and gloss control.
c. Drying oil, etc.
b. For protective {unction - it contribute specific properties
Components of Paint Vehicle: such as hardness, resistance to corrosion, rapid
,
Solid Thermoplastic Film Former.. The solid ~esi is weathering, abrasion, and improved adhesion.
1. melted for application and then solidifies after application .
Ii c. It make sanding easier, retard flame and serves as
2. Lacquer Type Film Formers. The vehicle dried by insulation against electricity. :
solvent evaporation. d. Pigments fill spaces in paint films. I
Room Temperature Catalyzed Film Forme!'5'. A

3. chemical agent blended into the coating before applicatIOn Additives
cause cross- linking into a solid · polymer at room
temperature. Additives are ingredients formulated in the paint to modify
. ' 4; Heat:.cured Film Formers. Heat causes .cross- Ii~kng o.f
the properties of either the vehicle or the pigmentation or both .
They give the wet paint or dried pai, It film properties, which are
the film former or activates a catalyst that IS not active until not present in the vehicle and pigmentation system_ Additives
heat has been applied. improve a certain properties of vehicle such as speed drying,
:~ 5. Oxidizing Film Formers. oxyg~n from the air enters the pigment resistance to fading or the entire paint foi' ease of
application.
I' film and cross-link it to form a solid gel.
299
298
ii, i i
i' I.
,

'PAINTING
10-3 ESSENTIAL A~D SPECIFIC PROPERTIES
chemical attack by the hydraulic fluid of the aircraft, and
OF GOOD QUA~ITY PAINT film rupture from the flexing of the film by the denting of
the surface.
Good quality paint must have the following essential and
specific properties.
1()':'4 EL~MNTS OF A GOOD PAINTING JOB
Adhesion - Coating must stick to the sl.,uface or
1. subtrate to bring other properties into work. Painting is the final touch in the construction work. It is
where all.the construction' defects, ugliness and roughness from
Ease of Application - Paint must be ea s i ~ y ap~ie ~ n masonry, carpentry, tinsmith and others are corrected,
I) 2. Accordance with the methods as preSCribed Y e smoothened and beautified.
. I h Id go into the subtrate t 0 a I
manufacturer. t ~ ou d be dried within the
1 specified film thickness an . The elements of a good painting job are:
I' specified time with the desir~ appearance possessing
The necessary specific properties.
1. Correct Surface Preparation - The primary and I
essential property which is necessary for a paint is
3·. Film Integrity - The cured or dried film. of paint must
AdheSion. Good adhesion demands good surface
have all the film properties as claimed b¥ !~e preparation.
manufacturer. There should be· no weak. spots In e
film caused by imperfect film drying or cunng.
2. Choice of the Proper Paint System - Apply the right
Consistent Quality -Paint must be consistent i.~ quality kind of paint on the right surface. For instance, always
4. such as color, viscosity, application and d~rablhty from apply the right kind of primer before the final top coat.
can to can, bateh by batch, shipm~nt by shipment. Water base paint for masonry and concrete. Oil base
paint for wood and equivalent surface, etc.
/
S. SpecifiC Propertie,.- Paint should be considered for
particular use such as: 3. Good Application and Right Technique and Tools .
a.) Maintain a uniform wet and dry film thickness.
a. Kitchen Enamel. Enamel. paint must resist grease, b.) Correct application and number of seq.lence as
heat and repeated cleaning. specified by the manufacturer I
II c.) Use the right kind of tools with good quality.
I Stucco or Latex Paint must resist water, alkali and I
b. sunlight and must allow passage of water vapor.
4. Correct Drying Cycle - The final properties of the dried 1
Swimming Pool Pain. This type m~st have a coating develop . during the drying cycle. Unless I
c' ~pecif chlorine, water and sunlight resistance. conditions are favorable, correct film properties will never I
develop.
I
Exterior Commercial Aircraft ~inshe ":,ust resist I
d. ultra violet degradation, erosion by air loss of 5. Protection Against Water - The primary cause of paint ,
adhesion at high speed, rapid temperature changes, failure is Moisture. MOisture is considered as a menace
to the best of paint job.
300
301
PAINTING
It is very frustrating to see your lovely and newty painted shall be filled with patching plaster and smoothed off to
house deteriorating so soon specially if you bought good match adjoining surfaces.
paint, used good tools and spend a lot for labor.
4. 'Plaster or masonry- Masonry or plaster shall be
. completely dried before any sealer or paint is applied.
Water is the hidden enemy of paint. I.t is. a pervasive element After the primer-sealer coat is dried, all visible suction
of deterioration and it causes the follOWing. spots shall be toughed up before the ~uceding coats
are applied. Work should not be continued until after all
a.) Rusting and other corrosion spots have been sealed. In the presence of high alkali
conditions, surfaces should be washed to neutralize the
b.) Paint peeling . alkali.
c.) Masonry efflorescence and spalling.
Metals- Shall be clean, dry and free from mill scale and
d.) Corrosive water solution (staining sea water)
rust. Remove all grease and oil from the surface.
Unprimed galvanized metal shall be washed with metal
10-5 SURFACE PREPARATION etching solution and allowed to dry before applying a
primer.
Th uickest way to achieve paint failure is thrO~g improper
surfac~ ~repation. It is just as ~mortan . t to quahfy a surface 6. Concrete and Brick Surface- The surface shall be
preparation as it is to specify a painting system. wire-brushed clean. Glazed surfaces and those with
traces of patching compound shall be sandpapered or
acid etched before applying a primer.
B. CLEANING METHODS
A. GENERAL 1. Sandblasting. Tliere are tlJree g~neral methods applied

in sandblasting:
surface Examination- No exterior paint or int~ro fin~sh
1. shall be done under condition which may Je~palz
the quality or appearance of the painting or finishing. a. Conventional Drying Sandblasting - The sand is not
recycled. However, dust respirators and other safely
Preparation _ All ' Surface to receive paint should be precautions should be observed since environment
2. cleaned and in proper condition. Wood works sha\b~ restrictions on dry blasting are increas~ly severe.
sandpapered and dusted clean. All knot hok3s, ~I c
ockets or sappy portions shall be shellacke or b. Vacuum Sandblasting - This method reduces health
~eald ~ith knot-sealer. Nail holes, cracks, or. def~s hazard because the sand is recovered outright. It is'
shall be carefuUy ~ied. after t~e first coat With pu Y however costlier and less efficient compared with
bleaching color of the stain or paint. the dry blasting method but its efficiency can be
increased by holding the vacuum cone at a slight
Interior Woodwork. Wood finish shall ~ sandp~re distance ' from the surface. The vacuum method is
3. between c,Qab.. CIaO$ biMs. Of plaster Imperfections
303
302
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE PAINTING
useful inside shops and in areas where 9ust ' might A mildewcide is usually added Low .
damage machineries. . cleaners are used on home and office wa~sure steam
c. Wet Sandblasting. Reduces the hazard of dust 4. Alkali ' cleaning- Alkali cleaners ShOUI~ not be used
and may be required by legal restrictions. The wet masonry surfaces adjacent t I . on
sand and paint residues accumulate on ledges and or galvanized metal S rf 0 a ummum, stainless steel
other flat areas where rinsing operation is cleaners must be thor~ aces ~hat are cleaned with alkali
necessary. Residual alkali and det~:Z nnse and clean with water.
to paint if they are not remov:d~ap,gt damage
2. Wire- Br~shing and Scraping - Power and hand wire- e y.
brushing are used on small jobs in cleaning areas after
sandblasting and on surfaces where .sandblasting is not
feasible. Hand scraping is used on small areas and in 10-6 KINDS OF PAINT, USES AND AREA COVERAGE
places where access is difficult and for final clean up.
3. Power Tools- Power tools such as rotary wire and disc
Kind of Paint Uses I Thinner Dryina Time Coverage
tools, rotary impact chippers and needle sealers may be ·PRIMERS·
Per 4 liters
used if sandbla'sting is not feasible. . in sq. m.
1. Interior Primer
4. Water Blasting- Water blasting is an effective method in and sealer
For Interior wood Paint 2 hours. Allow 25 to 30
surfaces
cleaning and removing old paint from large masonry Thinner overnight before
surfaces. It is generally used and acceptable for health recoating
and environmental requirements. Water blasting method 2. Exterior WOOd FOr exterior wood Paint
primer 6 hrs. Allow 30-40
is preferred for underwater or marine work. surfaces Thinner overnight before
recoating
C. CHEMICAL METHODS 3. Prepakote Primer for ferrous Paint
, 1. Acid Etching - Is the use of acid solution with or without
Red Oxide
Primer
and non- ferrous
materials
Thinner
3 hour'S. Allow
overnight before
recoating
35 to 40
sq. m.
detergent to roughen a dense glazed surface. To remove
i the residual soluble reaction of calcium and magnesium 4. Zinc Chromate For exterior and Paint
Primer 3 hours. Allow 30 to 40
I chloride which affect the adhesion and stability of latex interior metal Thinner overnight before sq. m.
Surfaces exposed
i paint in particular. to normal Indus-
recoating
trial environment
2. Paint remover - Both the conventional solvent b1:lse and
the water rinseable 'type of paint removers may be used 5. Red Oxide Rust preventive Paint 3 hours. Allow 30 to 40
Primer
to remove old paint. Most paint removers contain wax. primer for ferrous Thinner overnight before
surfaces
This wax shall be removed completely before painting for
it destroy adhesion and inhibit the drying of paint 6. Epoxy primer For steel, alum- Epoxy 6 hours. Allow 30 to 40
inurn, galvanized reducer
3. Steam Cleaning - Steam cleaning with or without overnight before
iron
recoating
detergents is frequently used'in food packing plants.
304 305
PAINTING
* WATER BASE MASONRY PAINT*
3, DaVies Roof G./. roof & other
1. Acrylic Latex Exterior & Interior % Its. 30 min. Allow 30 to 40 paint 6 hours, Allow 30 to 40
metal such as
paint masonry surfaces waterl 6 hrs. before sq. m. ovemight before sq, m,
4 liters recoating
2. Acrylic Semi- Extenor & Interior Water 30 min. Allow 30 to 40 * ENAMEL AND GLOSS PAINT *
Gloss Latex masonry surfaces .6 hrs. before sq. m. 1. Quick Drying
Recoating For exterior & Paint
Enamel Interior WOOd 5 hours. Allow 30 to 40
Tliinner 8 hours before
3. Acrylic Gloss 30 to 40 And metal surf, sq. m.
Exterior & Interior Water 30 min. Allow recoating
Latex Paint masonry surface 6 hrs. before sq. m. 2. Interior Semi-
recoatlng. Interior WOOd Paint
Gloss Enamel and metal 6 hours. Allow 25 to 30
Thinner ovemight before
4. Acrylic Clear For chalky surface Water 1 hour. Allow 30 to 40 Surfaces sq, m.
recoating
Gloss Emulsion to improve adhe- 4 hours before sq.m. 3. Flat Wall
Palnt sion of new coats recoatlng For interior Paint
Enamel 3 hours. Allow 40 to 50
of Latex paint wall and ceiling Thinner ovemight before sq. m.
Recoating
5. Latex Hi-gloss For fumiture, cal>- Use as 1 hour. Allow 30 to 40 4. Exterior Gloss
Enamel inets, doors, win- is 4 hours before sq. m. For exterior wood Paint
paint and properly 6 hours. Allow 40 to 50
Dows, tools, toys recoating Thinner 48 hours before
primed metal sq, m,
wrought iron & recoating
appliances sUrfaces
Tinting Color Acrylic colors Water 5. Tinting Colors Oil base Tinting
6. Acrylic concrete Primer to old and Water 30 min. Allow 6 30 to 40
sealer new concrete hours before sq. m.
recaating * VARNISHING *
7. Masonry Primer for old Use as 24 hours. Allow 30 to 40
1, No. 48 Davies For dark wood
surface chalky paint film is ovemight before sq. m. Use as
wood bleach to be changed
recoating is
to light natural
8. TintJPg-colors Acrylic colors Water finish & making
old Wood color
uniform
* ROOF PAINT * 2, No, n DaVies For patching up Use as
Lax-Tire 10 minutes 20 to 25
wood defects is
Plastic Wood 30 minutes sq. m,
1. All weather For galvanized Water 4 hours. Allow 4O.to 50 like knots, nail
/"
dough for dry-hard
Acrylic roof iron sheet, asbes ovemight before sq. m. holes & cracks
Shield tos, concrete recoating 3. Wood filler
bricks and stucco Sealer for open Paint
paste 12min, Allow 25 to 35
grain of interior Thinner
wood ovemight before sq. m,
2. Portland For G.I. sheet Paint 6 hours. Allow 30 to 40 recoating,
cement paint concrete, bricks Thinner ovemight ,before sq. m. 4. Non-Grain For Wood sUrface
and other zinc recoating raiSing Wood 30 minutes 30 to 40
coated metal stain sq, m.
306
307
~ 'II
-
- -.,
I
~
t
5. Oil wood .staln For paneling, Allow 24 hours 30 to 40 - AUTOMOTIVE FINISHING * r
cabinets, floors for recoatlng sq.m.
furniture, door
1. lacquer For properly
jambs, and other Lacquer Allow 30 min.
Enamel primed metal 40 to 50
woodworks Thinner before coating
and WOOd sq. m.
6. Finishing 011 To seal & finish Overnight 35 to 40 2. Automotive
Interior wood For exterior & Lacquer
sq. m. Lacquer 30 minutes 40 to 50
interior metal Thinner
surface such as sq. m.
or WOOd surfaces
furniture, wood
and paneling 3. Lacquer
I II For metal Lacquer
primer 30 minutes 40 to 50
wood surface Thinner
7. Valspar or For floor, sidings Paint 24 hours 40 to 50 sq. m.
I" ~ Spar Varnish furniture, deck of Thinner sq. m. 4. Lacquer For exterior and Lacquer 10 minutes
boats, etc. putty interior metal & 20 to 30
Thinner dry to sand in
wood surfaces sq. m.
III 1 hour
8. Daxpar For interior and Paint 24 hours 40 to 50
Varnish exterior wood Thinner .sq.m. 5. Pro-LllX Auto Automotive Fin.
Enamel Paint 2 hours. Dry 30 to 40
surface, nautical for residential & Thinner
Commercial hard in 10 hrs. sq. m.
and aeronautical
varnish
6. Pro-LllX For exterior and
Enamel paint Paint 2 hours. Allow 30 to 40
9. Hi-Solid For interior new Lacquer 10 minutes 40 to 50 interior wood and Thinner 8 hours before sq. m.
sanding wood furniture Thinner Allow 30 mi. sq.m. Metal surfaces recoating
sealer and fixtures, cab- before coating 7. Pro-LllX
inets, door, etc. For exterior and Use as 2 hours
Glazing putty interior metal & 25 to 35
is sq. ITi.
10. Hi-Solid For furniture, Lacquer WOOd sUrfaces
Allow. 30 min. 30 to 40
clear gloss cabinets, fixture Thinner before coating sq. m.
j lacquer door paneling
and trim * INDUSTRIAL PAINT~ *
11. Hi-Solid For interior Lacquer Allow 30 min. 30 to 40 1. Silver Finish

semi-gloss wood furniture Thinner before coating sq.m. For steel tanks Use as
Aluminum 1 hour. Allow 40 to 50
lacquer cabinets, doors Exterior & Interior is 24 hours before · sq. m.
shelves etc. wOOd & masonry racoating
2. Heat Resisting For interior and
12. Hi-Solid dead For interior wood Lacquer Allow 30 min. 30,to 40 Use as 1 hour. A"ow
flat lacquer exterior sUrfaces 40 to 50
II furniture, cabinet Thinner before coating sq. m. is 24 hours before
like radiators sq. m.
door jamb, trim recoating
paneling etc. boilers, pipes.'&
"","""''''
equipment
-,
13. Water White For furniture, Lacquer Allow 30 min. 30 to 40
gloss lacquer cabinets, doors Thinner before coating sq. m. 3. High Heat
II For sUperheated Use as
panel & interior resisting paint 1 hour at 450° F 40 to 50
steam lines
II. walls is maximum sq.m.
308 309
I
,..... (I
I
1 -
II
boiler casings 14. Epoxy Glue Multi-purpose Use as 8 hours full 30 to 40
drum and rocket thermosetting is strength in
1 sq. m.
launchers plastic material 96 hours
for cementing or
, For asbestos lise as 1 hour, Allow 20 to 30
bonding rigid
4. Asphalt base 24 hrs. before sq. m.
1
cement compo- is materials
Aluminum recoating
sition and metal
15. Pure Pale Use as thinner for Use as
Uses as 1 hour. Allow 20 to 30 boiled linsed
5. Traffic Paint For asphalt and exterior house is
is 24 hrs. before sq. m. oil paint
masonry surface
recoating
16. Concrete Treatment to Use as
35 to 40 24 hours 30 to 40
Paint 12 hours. AlloW neutralizer neutralize
I;, 6. Blackboard Forwood or
ovemight before sq. m. is sq. m.
metal surface Thinner masonry surface
Slating Recoating
I' 17. Rust Paint stripper Use as
12 hours. Allow 30 to 40 Overnight 25to,35
For hulls and Paint remover is
7. Davies Anti- overnight before sq. m. sq. m.
below water Thinner
corrosive recoating 18. Paint
Marine Paint line of ship Paint stripper Use as Overnight ,
remover 25 to 35
30 to 40 id sq . m.
Paint 12 hours. Allow
8. Marine boat For properly sq. m.
Thinner 24 hrs. before 19. Mildewcide Destroy molds
II 1
topping paint primed surfaces
between the light recoating mildews on new
Water I
I~
& deep load lines and previously
of ships painted surfaces
Paint 8 hours. Allow 30 to 40 -L _ _ _ __

9. Anti-Fouling For properly sq. m.
primed surface Thinner 24 hrs. before SOURCE. Davies Paint Manual of Information
Paint recoating
II~ below the water
line of ships
i 30 te 40 10-7 ESTIMATING YOUR PAINT

!
10. Hull, Deck, For use above
water line of sea
Paint
Thinner
12 hours. Allow
24 hrs. before sq . m. .
Mast & Top- recoating
side Paint vessels equip-
ment & structures
pJint manufacturer specifications include the estimated
near the sea area coverage per gallon having a net content of 4 liters.
30 to 40
Generally, the estimated area coverage is in the range interval
I' Marine engine Paint 1 hr. Allow 24 of 10.
11 . Machinery hours before sq. m.
engine enamel & equipment Thinner
casing recoating
For instance, one gallon of Quick Drying Enamel covers 30
i~
il 12. Epoxy For steel, Alum- Epoxy
reducer
6 hours. Allow
overnight before
30 to 40
sq. !}"I.
to 40 square meters surface area which simply mean a
Enamel num, galv. Iron minimum of 30 and a maximum of 40 square meters depending
I~
.1
Wood & concrete recoating upon the texture of the surface to be painted. I
I' For body repair Epoxy 2 hours
13. Epoxy The problem therefore is, what amount for which surface
glazing putty aircraft, car and
equipment texture will be used? To simplify our estimate, surface texture
II I!I will be classified into three categories such as:
310 311
1
SlMPLIFmD CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE 5. For a Coarse to Rough surface; divide:
36 0 sq. m. =12 gallons Acrylic Latex paint primer

30
6. ~'ve for the Acrylic Gloss Latex Paint final coating Use
sq. m. area coverage per gallon; divide: .
360 = 12 gallons
30
ILLUSTRATION 10-1
A concrete firewall measures 30 meters long and 12 meters
B) Solution for Fine to Coarse SUrface
high. Determine the number of gallons (4 liters content)
1. Solve for the net area of the waiL
required using Acrylic Gloss Latex Paint if the wall is:
a.l Wooden trowel finish ( coarse to rough) Net area: 30 x 12 = 360 sq. m.
b.) Paper Finished (fine to coarse)
c.) Fine to Smooth ( putty finish) 2. Solve for the concrete neutralizer at 35 sq. m. per gallon.
360 = 10.3
SOLUTION 35
A) Coarse to Rough Surface 3. If one ~urt of neutralizef is mixed with2-~ gallons f

water; divide: 2 0
1. Solve for the wall area
Area = 30 x 12 = 360 sq. m. 10.3 = 4.1 quarts neutralizer
2.5
2. 360 sq. m. divided by 30 sq. m. area coverage per gallon
of neutralizer and water solution: 4. ~il:for ~he concrete Primer Sealer (use 35 sq. per: gal.)
360 = 12 gallons
30
360 sq. m. = 10.28 gallons
35
3. If one quart of neutralizer is mixed with 2 % gallons of 5. S olve for Acrylic Gloss Latex Paint. See step 4 = 10.28
water; divide: order 11'" gallons.
12 = 4.8 say 5 quarts neutralizer
C) S o Iution for Fine to Smooth Surface
2.5
4. Solve for the concrete primer. Refer to Sec. 10-6 under 1. Divide the wall area by 40 sq. m. coverage per gallon.
Masonry Water Base Paint, using Acrylic Concrete Sealer
as primer, the area coverage· per gallon is 30 to 40 sq. m.
313
312
" 36.0 =9.0 gallons surface primer SOLUTION

40
A) Roof Paint
•
2. For final coat, the. same, 9 gallons
, 1. Fin~ the total roof inclined area.
3. For Neutralizer; 9.0 gal. = 3.6 say 4 liters
2.5 gal. A = 10.00 x 82.00 m.
A = 820 sq. m.
ILLUSTRATION 10-2 2. Ref~ to Sec. 10.6 under roof paint, the area covera of e
Acrylic Roof Shield paint per gallon is 40 to 50 g
A 10 class room elementary school building with a general 45 sq. m. average area. sq, m. Use
dimensions of 6.00 meters wide by 8.00 meters long requires
painting of the roof and the plywood ceiling. ' The plan specifies
two coatings of AcryliC Roof Shield and Quick Drying Enamel
820 sq. m.
45
= 18.2 say'19.gallons
for the ceiling respectively. Prepare an order list of the following
materials: 3. For second coating: . 19 x 2 = 38 gal.
a. Roof paint . 4. Paint thinner is not required. Clean water is used instead.
b. Wood primer for the ceiling
c. Quick drying paint for the ceiling
B) Prjrner and Enamel Paint for the Ceiling
d. Paint thinner
1. Solve for the total ceiling area including the eaves.
Area: 9 x 82· = 738 sq. m.
9.00m. 2. ~freg ~Oei' iOO-t60'4uOnder wood primer, the area coverage

square meters.
ROOF PLAN 3. For plywood ceiling use 35 square t

per gallon (4 liters).' me ers coverage area
738 = 21 gallons wood primer

35
4. For Quick Orying Enamel as to oat

meters per gallon (4 liters) p E ,use average 35 sq.
7.00m.
ELEVATION '738 = 21 gallons Quick Drying Enamel.
35
FIGURE 10-1
314 315
-
,.

PAINTING
5. Solve for the paint thinner at an average of Yz liter per
'i gallon of paint.
.' Primer Paint...... ... ...... . 21 gal. (4 liters)
For eco.nomical reason use lacquer thinner then
wash with water and soap.
Quick Dry EnameL....... 21 gal. (4 liters)
Total ...... ....... 42 gallons b.) For Water Base Paint - Wash thoroughly with
I water and soap immediately after use.
6. Multiply: 42 x Yz liters = 21 liters or 6 gallons.
c.) Lacquer Paint or Varnish - Clean with paint
7. Order: 38 gallons Acrylic Roof Shield paint thinner then wash with water and soap.
21 gallons Wood Primer
., 21 gallons Quick Dry Enamel d.) Gloss Paint, flat and quick dry ena mel - Clean
6 gallons Paint Thinner with paint thinner or kerosene then wash with
II water and soap.
, Comment:
e.) Lacquer thinner estimate for varnishing work
II ,!i .1. The paint thinner of any type is considered as the most should be. ~uficent enough to antiCipate
abused materials in all painting job. It is used for frequent thinning, multiple rubbing, cleaning of
washing of hands, cleaning of paint brush and tools, tools and evaporation .
sometimes as fuel and torches or lamps.
2. Frequent washing of painter's brush and roller after use

10-8 PAINT FAILURES AND REMEDY
will consume large amount of paint thinner. This could
be avoided if the brush is wrap-up with paper after use The different types of paint failures are identified as follows:
then placed inside a gallon container with water to avoid
cleaning and hardening of paint ready for use the next 1. Blistering or Peeling 6. Peeling or Cracking
day or any time as needed. 2. Chalking 7. Bleeding.
3. Flaking 8. Mildew
3. However, if paint brush, rollers and other tools were 4. Fading 9.' Staining
used on epoxy paint or primers that Were mixed with 5. Cracking & Alligatoring ' 10. Checking & Flaking
catalyst, cleaning after use is mandatory because the
hardening process of epoxy paint mixed with catalyst Blistering or Peeling occurs when the moisture trapped in
can not be prevented due to the chemical reactions that the wood evap<;>rates when exposed to sun or beat. The paint is
has already started like cement mixed with water. push out of the surface.
4. Protect your paint brush and roller from damages by I

Remedy
cleaning as follows: :
a.) For Epoxy Paint mixed with Catalyst - Clean 1. Locate and eliminate the sources,of moisture.
your tools with acrylic thinner.
2. Scrap off old .paint around the blistered area. Let dry and I
apply good primer, then final paint of good quality.
316 I
31 7
Chalking - The paint was too thin for the required film. Peeling or Cracking of Paint 0
th~ use of improper metal rim n G.I. ~hets - Indicates
paint film has no adhesion onPth er or no pnmer applied. The
1 Remedy: . e surface.
.11.
Be more generous to your paint. Spend a little more for Rem~dy
two coatings.
Strip o.ff the paint. Clean Wit~ ,
galvanized paint (see roof pa' tSOlvent. Dry, then apply
Flaking _ The ' result of inadequate or poor surface . In on Sec. 10-6 ).
preparation. The paint flakes off in scales or ' powdered and
Bleeding - Is the result of . .
chalk off. " at the first application of paint. madequate sealing of the surtace/
I' Remedy: Remedy

Scraped-off tne paint on affected area than seal all
cracks against moisture. Apply good prime~hn final Scrape off the surface then Repaint.
coat. . Mildew - Mildew thrives on hi h . . .
The fungus are stimulated d g humidity and temperature.
Fading _ Is a normal behavior of paint. However, if fading is covered with new coat of a~ g.rows on the paint film. If
.too fast and excessive, that means you applied a poor kind of through the new coat. pamt, JUst the same it will grow
paint. This is what usually happened when for a few cents of
I difference in 'cost the quality was sacrificed. Remedy
Remedy: Wash the surface with milde .

water. Scrub the surface Ri w a~hw SOlution diluted with
Repaint. Next time, be sure to buy the best of paint for 48 hours then apply fi~al.c:S With c:1~an
I! brand. Remember, good paint contains more and better
water and dry
,Ii , pigment.
Cracking and Alligatoring - Results when paint was
Staining - Is an effect of wood preservative or rust of nails
Remedy .
applied in several heavy coats not observing the sufficient
!l drying time between coats. The primer or undercoat used may 1 . Remove the paint on affected area
not be compatible with the final coat. For instance, using a 2. Remove rust on nails th
quick drying enamel as final coat over a flat wall paint. Ora metal and wood primer: en apply lead primer to
lacquer or acrylic paint over an ord,inary oil base paint, etc. 3. Apply final coat with good quality paint. I
A'
-, I I
Remedy: Checking and Flakin -
contraction of wood. g Is caused by expansion or
:
Remove the paint. Clean the surface properly. Apply I
'9"d kind of primer paint then final coat. Remedy: See Remedy for Blistering.
318 319
il!
!
r
I
II 10-9 WALL PAPERING pear at seems as wallpaper shrinks when it dries. Thl,ls,
avoid stretching your vinyl wallpaper.
• ferS not only to paper substances
The tenn • waIlPp~ a~d ceiling but also includes vinyl, Foil
that are pasted on a foils and many other surface coverir,lg
cork, fabncs, grass co,th .
W,
I materials: Foil is another type of wallpaper Simulated metallic finish or I
Estimating your wallpaper requires additional or extra rolls aluminum laminated paper. Do not fold or wrinkle the foil
because ~her is no remedy to crease.
in anticipation of the following: I
For replacement of ruined or da",!aged materials during Smooth surface is required to avoid reflective surfaces. Foil I
1. the process of working and handling. magnifies any imperfections on the surface to which it is
attached. Always specify mildew resistant vinyl adhesive only.
For additional areas which are not inclu~ed in the plan
2. or overlooked in actual surface measunng. Grass Cloth, Hemp, Burlap, Cork
.1
3. For future repair which requires the same pattern; color These materials are mounted on paper backing which could
texture" and design. be weakened from over soaking with paste: Hence, paste one
strip at a time.
Trim can be used as a decorative boarder. Wall paper
4. is sold by yard or meter in roll. Flocks
Vinyl Wall Paper is Classified into Three kinds: Flocks are made of nylon or rayon available on paper, vinyl
or foil wallpapers. Use paint roller or squeegee for best result.
1 . Vinyl laminated to paper
2. Vinyl laminated in cloth . Wallpaper Estimating Procedures
3. 1~:euI;o ~: :n~ciea. 1. Determine the surface area to receive wall paper.
2. Subtract the area opening such as doors, windows etc

I Caution in Buying Vinyl Wall Paper .
I~ 3. Divide the net wall area by the effective covering of the
Examine the labei if it is pure or vinyl coated only. Vinyl wallpaper size as presented in Table 10-1 to find the
1. coated is not wear or grease resistant norwashable type. number of roll.
2. Never confuse them with vinyl wallpaper. 4. Add 5 to 10 % allowance depending upon the deSign
pattern.
In buying vinyl wallpaper adheslv~, . aIways use and
3. specify vinyl mildew reSistance. adheSive only. 5. Multiply the number of rolls by the corresponding I
amount of adhesive to get the number of boxes

4. Vinyl wallpaper stretches if pulled: Hair line cracks will ap- required.
320 !
321
TABLE 10·1 WALLPAPER TECHNICAL DATA
CHAPTER
Width Length I roll Effective covering Adhesive
cm. meter per roll (sq. m.) box per roll
52 10.05 5.22 . .17

54
71
10.05
13.70
5.42
9.72
.18
.32
AUXILIARY TOPICS
11-1 ACCORDION DOOR COVER
Problem Exercise The standard height of accordion door cover is 2 40 meters

~!d J~b2 o:~er htowever, could b~ lower than this' height but
1. A narra plywood partition contains 48 pieces 1/4" x 4· x 8- . me ers standard heIght.
board specify 5 coat lacquer vamish including the primer coat of
sanding sealer. List down the required materials as follows: Esti.mating the quantity of materials for an len t
Sand paper No. 150 (rough), 220 and No. 400 (fine) . . ~:n, o~ Tabl~
DdOatOar oCfOUld brde .done easily with the aid
acco Ion door. .
~ 1f~
1. Wood stain
2. Lacquer Sanding Sealer TABLE 11·1 QUANTITY OF ACCORDION DOOR MATERIALS
3. Lacquer clear gloss PER METER LENGTH
4. Lacquer thinner
Pieces Materials
2. A national ~ighway 80 kilometers long requires centerline 12 G.!. or Black sheet blade 15 x 240 em
white altelT1ate marker 6 inches wide 3 meters long. How many
13 6 mm x 240 Steel Pin
gallons of road paint is required?
14 5 mm x 25 rnm x 240 -em. Flat st:el bars
3. A solid firewall measures 45 meters long by 18 meters 24
. high is to be painted with Acrylic Latex gloss paint. the plan 3 mm x 12 rTim x 60 em. Flat steel bars
specifies two final coat over the primer. Solve for the following 1 6 mm x 32 mm x 200 em. Flat steel bars
materials if the wall finish is coarse, fine and smooth. (a) Primer. 2 38 mm dia. roller bearing with rivets and bushing
(b) Gloss Latex and (c) Neutralizer 35 6 mm x 38 mm rivets
4. A school building has 20 class room measuring 7.00 x 52 6 mm x 16 mm rivets
9.00 meters with an eaves measuring 120 centimeters from the 112 6 mm x 20 mm washers,
wall including the fascia board. Using Quick Drying Enamel for 1
the ceiling and Roof .shield paint for the roof' solve for: (a) 50 cm. G.!. pipe 10 mm diameter
Primer paint, (b) Quick dry enamel, (c) Paint thinner, (d) Roof
paint for two coatings.
. To find the req . d ' .
each item by the Sp~eOf mthatednals for ~ gi~en opening, multiply
. e oar opening In meters.
322
323
-- -
AUXILIARY TOPICS
4 m. x 12 = 48 pes 15 x 240 em. G.I. sheet blade
.4m.x13 =
52 • 6 mm x 240 ern. steel pin
~LUSTRAION 11.. 1 . 4m.x14 =
56 5 mm x 25 mm x 240 cm. flat bars
meters wide door requires an 4 m. x24 =
96 y' 3 mm x 12 mm x 60 em flat bars I
I' For security reason a. \00 pen at the center folded at both 4 m. x.1 = 4 6 mm x12 mm x 200 em flat barS
accordion Gover. The door IS , 0 0 . 4 m. x 2 = 8 • 38 mm dia. roller bearing with bushing
sides direction. List down the matenals. 4 m. x 35 = 140 6 mm x 38 mm rivets
=
4 m. x52 208 6 mm x 16 mm rivets
4 m. x 112= 448 6 mm hole x 20 mm washers
1.00m 4 m. x 1 = 4 10 iTIm dia. x 50 em. G.I. pipe bushing
I
r \,\ "
Guide Rail J
11-·2 GLASS .JALOUSIE
One important consideration in estimating glass ialousie is
Black Sheet t"t

i rl,
'\ the clear height of the window opening. If a winaow is to
accommodate glass jalousie, the openi'ng height must be
Flat Bars - l
,
adjusted to the number of blade to be installed. Table 11-2
provides the standard height of jalousie opening corresponding
~L J ~I,i to the number ,of blade. '
With respect to the width of the glass jalousie, it does not

present any problem because the glass blade can be adjusted
__ _ Ii' r\' \,
LL l l ... i ...... "- to the design length. The glass blade however, should not be
longer than 90 centimeters.
Elevation
TABLE 11·2 GLASs JALOUSIE STANDARD HEIGHT
Accordion Door
Number Height Square Ft. Number Height
Of blade of glass . per blade of blade ofJIl ass
4 14-7/8" 4 x 22 = 0,61 ~4 49-7/8"
Plan 5 18-3/8" 4 x 24 = 0.67 15 53-3/8"
6 21-7/8" 4·x26=0.72 16 65-7/8"
7 25-3/8" 4 x 28 = 0,78 17
FIGURE 11·1 60-3/8'
8 28-7/8" 4 x 30 = 0.83 18 63-7/8"
9 32-3/8" 4 x 32:: 0./39 19 67-3/8'
10 35-7/8" 4 x 34 = 0.94 20 70-3/8'
SOLUTION 11 ' 39-3/8" 4 x 36 = 1.00 21 74-318" ,
12 42-7/8' 4x38=1.06 22 77-7/8'
1. Determine the opening span of the door =4 meters 13 45-3/8" x
4 40 = 1.11 I
2. Referring to Table 11-1, multiply: I
325
324 ,
. SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE
AUXll..lARy TOPICS
, 11-3 WATE~ TANK ' SOLUTION

The size and capacity of a water tank for building structure 1. Determine the ho rI
depends upon the volume of ';" ater to be stored in. The volume persons. ~efr to ~a'e ~t; f~n:mptio of 800
of water on the other hand , ,"iepends upon the number of COmmercial type building, multiply: Air-Conditioned
persons or occupants of the buill. ing. Thus, the problem is how
to determine the volume of water and size of the water tank that 800 x 9.2 =7,360 gallons per hour
, could serve the occupants efficiently.
2. The tank must al h
thus: ways ave Yz hour supply of Water
TABLE 11-3 WATER CONSUMPTION IN OFFICE BUILDING
I
7,360
2
= 3,680 gallons per Yz hour
Gonsumption in Gailons
lUi Building Type per Hour per Person
3. The pump must therefore supply 7 ,360 gal . per h our Qr
Commercial - No Air-Conditioning 3.8
7.3 to 9.2 7,360 gal
. . = 1227
, gall ons per minute
. .(
Commercial - With Air-conditioning
60 min.
Owner occupied with kitchen and
Laundry - No Air-Conditioning 7.3
TABLE 11-6 HOT WATER CONSUMPTION IN APARTMENT BUILDING
Owner occupied with kitchen and
IN GALLONS
Laundry with Air-Conditioning 9·.0
Consumption Public Housing f
: Apartment Hotel
I
Average Daily
TABLE 11-4 COLD WATER CONSUMPTION IN BUILDINGS Per Apartment 79
Per Person ~O
Gallons per Day per Person 28 41
Type of Building Per Room 22 36
Residential - Average 50 Maximum Daily
Residential - '..arge 100 Per Apartment 92
75 Per Person 69
Apartment - Low Rent 33 48
100 Per Room 26
Apartment - High Rent 43
Hotel 100
Maximum Hourly
Office Building 25 Per Apartment 8.9 ].6
Per Person 3.2 5.3 ,
Per Person 2.5 4.9
ILLUSTRATION .11-2
ILL US TRA TION
An air-conditioned commercial office building has a total I
occupancy of 800 persons. Determine the volume of water in . Assuming that the water consum tio n. f .
cubic meter to supply the occupant needs. IS 7,360gallons, determine the size p f th 0 a comerl~1 office oUilding
. , . 0 e tank to contain the water.
326
I
327
AUXD..IARY TOPICS
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTlMATE
/ .................................................................................................................................... .
ILLUSTRATION 11-3
i For more detail of this problem in plumbing, refer to the
tion of a commercial office
! book Plumbing Design and Estimate by the same author.
Assuming that the wa~r tCO~fhe
;
size and volume of the
building is 1 ,3eO gal~n s' o n~ a~r . ,60 gallons. 11-4 WdOD PILES
tank in cubic meters 0 C
Wood Pile Specifications provides that: ·Piles shall be

SOLUTION peeled removing all the rough bark at least 80 % of the inner
1. By conversion:
1 cubic meter is 264.2 gallons = bark. Not less than 80% of the surface on any circumference
shall be clean wood. No string of inner bark remaining on pile
1 360 gallonS to cubic meter. Olvide: shall be over 2 centimeters wide and 20 centimeters long. All
2. Conve rt , knots shall be trimmed closed to the body of the pile.·
1 360 gal. = 21.85 cubic meter
~
TABLE 11.t WOOD PILES
264.2
. . n of the tank.
. the inside dlmensl o Length of Piles Diameter from Butt Minimum Tip
Note: This volume IS . In Meter Min (cm) Max (cm) Diameter cm.
Iindrical tank IS:
I for finding the size 0 f a cy
3. The formu a Under 12 meters 30 45 20
Ox
2 0 784
· .
x Height = Volume ~ 2 to 18 meters
OVer 18 meters
32
35
45
50
18
15
I 2 .00 meters:
h," ght of the tank 's
4. Assuming that the el
02 x 0.784 x 2.00 11 .5 meters. = The diameter of piles shall be measured in their peeled
condition. When the pile is not exactly round, the average of 3
. measurements may be used.
0 2 X 1,568 := 11,5 meters.
The butt diameter for the same length of pile shall be as
0 2 x 11 .5 uniform as possible. All piles shall retain preservative of at least
1,568 the amount given in the following table:
02 x 7.33 TABLE 11·7 MINIMUM PRESERVATIVE OF WOOD PILES
f1i3
PER CUBIC METER
,
.D = Type of Processing
D = 2.72 meters diameter of the tank. Use and Type Empty Cell Process Full Cell Process
General Use 193 kg. 321 kg.

. f the tank therefore is:
~ The Size 0 Marine Use .193 kg. 321 kg. '
~. . d 1 72 fTleters in diameter
2.00 meters high an ..
329
328
AUXILIARY tOPICS
11-5 BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENT
TABLE 11-8 RANGE Of SKIN FRICTION FOR VARIOUS SOIL
oituminous material or Asphalt is a viscous liquid used as
Value in Kilograms per Square Meter birlder for aggregates in road construction. Although several
Maximum names were affixed to the bitumInous pavement, yet, there is
Type of Soil
Minimum - only one thihg to remember that all bituminous roadway is
489 nothing more than a mixture of mineral aggregates and asphalt.
244
1. Silt and Soft. Mud 1,71 2 Meaning, asphalt road is virtually a bituminous road.
587
2. Silt Compacted 3,9 1 3
1,956 TABLE 11-10 BITUMINOUS MACADAM WEARING COURSE
3. Clay and Sand 4, 891
2,446 ( Hot Asphalt Type - Approx 1.25 cm. Thick)
4. Sand with some Clay 8,804 ,
2,935 Bituminous
5. Sand and Gravel Application Materials Weight Aggregates
Liters! SQ. m. Kiloarams Literl sq. m.
ressure method with creosoted
Lumber shall be treated by p lution First Spreading 90
coal solution or creosoted petroleum so . • ~
First Application 4.0

OWANCE BEARING POWER OF DIFFERENT SOIL Second Spreading 13
TABLE 11-9 ALL Second Application 1.8
~alue in Tons per Sq. M. Third Sp~eading 11
Usual Third Application' 1.4
Min Max Fourth Spreading 8
Kind of Soil
5.38 Total 7.2 90 32
5.38 10.76
Quick sand and alluvial soil 21.50
8.07 32.28
Soft clay. 16.14 TABLE 11-11 BITUMINOUS MACADAM PAVEMENT
10.76 21.50
( Hol Asphalt Type Approximately 2' 1/4 or 5.7 cm. Thick)
Wet clay and soft. sand 21.50
10.76 43.04
Clay and sand in alternate layers Bituminous Aggregate
Activity Materials Coarse Choker Key
Firm and dry loom or clay; hard 32.28 Liter I sq. m. Kilogram Liter I sq. m.
21 .50 43.04
dry clay or fine sand
10.76 43.04 32.28 First Spreading 90 .
confined sand Second Spreading 10
First Application 5.5
compact coarse sand or stiff 43.04
30.28 64.56 Third Spreading 10
Gravel 86.08 Second Application 3.5
53.80 107.60
Sand and gravel well cemented Fourth Spreading 8
107.60 86.08 Thir(j Application 2.0
53.80
Good hard pan or hard shale 161.40 Fifth Spreading 8
53.80 269.00
Total 11.0 90
,Rock
331
330
AUXILIARY' TOPICS
TABLE 11-12 BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENT
Hot Asphalt Type Approximately 1.6 cm. thick 3. The Soil must be stable' .
conten! or other factors v:~lnst volume change as water
Bituminous Aggregate
Materials Coarse Chocker 4. The sOIl must be durable and sa .
Operations Th' ve against deterioration
Liter I sq. m. Kilograms Li~er I sq. m.
ese deSIrable featur .
selection of. soil t e e s could be achieved b
First Operation 1.0 characteristics fill y~at,rpe Plac.ement. Highly ~er
22
values by using good materials ~nsoc/ated with high densit~
First Spreading
Second Application 1.3
6.5 . proper compaction I
Second Spreading
Third Application 0.7 Estimating procedures: . '
third Spreading 4.5
1. Compute for the volu t .
Total 3.0 22 11 2. Determine the ki d ,me. be filled up
0
Values entry with bulk specific gravity of 2.65 3. MUl!iply the res~'t ~/:g cmaterials .
addItIonal volume given' T orrespondlng percentage of
Open Graded Plan Mix Surface Course 4. Add results to obtain th In able 11-13
, e c.ompact volume.
The approximate amount of materials per square meter of the
open graded plant-mix surfacing course and the sequence of
placing shall be as follows:
Loose Volume Percent Additional
1. Plant mixed aggregate ........ 80 kg. to obtain compact volume
2. Choker aggregate ....... .. ,.... 3 kg. Earth Fill
3. Bituminous materials...... .... .45 liters Earth and Sand 23 to 25 %
Selected Borrow 18 to 20%
4. Choker aggregate ............... 3 to 5 kg. 15 to 18%
11- 6 FILLING MATERIALS ILLUSTRA TION 11-4

Any type of soil may be used for structural fill provided that it . A residential lot as shown in . . .
does not contain organic or foreign materials that will ~ompute the materials required uSi~lg(r)e 11-2 reqUires filling
decompose or otherwise undergo changes after it is placed. arrow g a earth fill; (b) Selected
Whether the soil is used as foundation material. to support
vertical structures, roads or other structures, it is important to ~o
know if the in-place materials possesses the following
properties: 1'"'-:-------.1 .SO
1. That the soil must have adequate strength 1.30

2. It must be relatively incompressible to avoid insignificant
future settlement. PLAN
FIGURE 11-2
SECTION x-x
332
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE AUXJLIARV TOPICS
SOLUTION long with more or less 82 and 68 leaves per h' I .

. s mg e respectively
A. Using Earth Fill
1. Solve for the volume of A..

15 x 20 x .50 = 150cu.m.
2. Find the volume of B.
15 x 20 x 1.30 = 195 cu. m.
2
Total Volume ....... 345 cu. m.
3. From Table 11-13 consider 23% compaction allowance

345 x :23 = 79.4 say 80 cubic meters
FIGURE 11-3 NIPA SHINGLE ROOF
4. Add result of step 2 and 3
345 + 80 = 425 cu. m. compact volume TABLE 11·14 NIPA SHINGLE TECHNICAl DATA
_ End Effective Covering

e. Using Selected Borrow Lap in Square Meter
No. of Pieces No. of Rattan
per Sq. Meter per Sq. Meter
1. The volume of A is = 150 cu. m. Cm. -In. Class A Class 8 A -
8 x y
. 2. The volume of B is = 195 cu. m. 10 - 4" .1300 .1090 7.70 ~ 18 1.8 3.6
7.5 - 3" .0975 .0818
3. Total volume is = 345 cu. m. 10.27 12.23 2.0 4.0
5.0 - 2" .0650 .0545
4. From Table 11·13 consider 18 % compaction allowance 15.38 18.31 2.8 5.6
2.5 - 1" .0325
18 % of 345 = 62 cubic meters .0273 30.77 36.62 4.0 8.0
. 5. Add: 345 + 62 = 407 cu. m. compact volume. x - Rattan Ties for every other bamboo split riQ.s
Y - Rattan Ties for every bamboo split ribs. .
11-7 NIPA SHINGLE ROOFING Roof Slope

Nipa Shingle is a native local product comr:nonly used as The slope of the roof is on . '.
roofing materials. The Nipa palm tree that grows on swampy shingle is to be used Th d e.'mporta~ consideration if nipa
area is the source of nipa shingle. One palm stalk contains
approximately 174 to 180 nipa leaves. f:.Jlpa shingle is classified
~epndS upon. the in'cl:to~r ~/,fhs:gtile
. e longer Its life span to last for about 3 years. s ope
into Class A and Class B with nominal length of 150 and 120 cm
334 335
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE AUXILIARY TOPICS
Slope of rafters less than 45 degrees is not advisable for the 308 = 12.32 say 13 bundles
following reasons: 25
1. Spacing of the nipa shingles would be· relatively far and 3. Solve for thfl bamboo splits. Refer to Table 11-4. multiply:
the roof layer Is considerably thin.
~u sq. m. x 2 pes. per square meter = 60 pieces.
2. To' install nipa shingle at a closer spacing will only invite
rain water to flow back Inside the house. 4. Determine the number of bamboo poles required R f
3. Moisture is the number one enemy of nipa shingle. Even to Table.1.1-15, using Class B under coverage per~qUa:
meter, divide:
galvanized iron roof sheet deteriorate faster when installed
at a low pitch roof.
~sq . m. = 3.3 say 4 pieces
9
ILLUSTRATION 11-5
5. Ba~bo poles ar~ ~Iso ~Iasifed into three: A, Band C
A house roof framing has a gross area of 30 square meters. whlc.h are the~ divided Into splits approximately 4 to 5
Find the number of nipa shingles required adopting 7.5 centlm~rs nailed on the purlins at an intervals of 20 t
centimeters (3") end lapping tied on the bamboo split ribs at 25 centimeters on center. 0
every other intervals using Class A nips shingles.
TABLE 11-15 BAMBOO POLES DIVIDED INTO 4 TO 6 STICKS
Bamboo Number of Approx. Length

Class Coverage per
Sp"its in Meters Square Meter
A 8 9.0
8 12
C
6
4
7.5
6.0 . 9
4
!oo fresh or too dried bamboo is relatively brittle. Thus,

easily. cracked ~hen fastened with nails. Care should be
FIGURE 11-4 e~rclsd to avoid cracks or splitting of the bamboo grain for it
~I weaken. the structure. Cracks and splitting could be avoided
SOLUTION If the following procedures. are observed.
1. Knowing the area of the roof, refer.to Table 11-14, under 1. Divide t.he newly cut fresh bamboo into the deSired sizes.
class A = 7.5 (3") end lapping, multiply: 2. Do. not Install or fasten the fresh bamboo splits with nails
until after sun-dried for at least 8 hours. Nailing should be
30 sq. m. x 10.27 = 308 pieces done the fol/owing day.
3. For a. well drjed bamboo, soak or immerse in water
2. Nipa shingle is sold in bundles of 25 pieces, divide: overnight then fastened the following day.
336 337
AUXILIARY TOPICS
11- 8 ANAHAW ROOFING ILLUSTRATION 11-6
From the following figure 11-6 find th

leaves and rattan splits required using 10 ~ number of a ~ahu w
An~haw Leaves .5 em to 12.5 em . the leaves. . em. end lapPing of
• ~li ..it-.....-
Bamboo Split I
I
"I- 9" Spacing
I
FIGURE 11-6
rI
TABLE 11-18 ANAHAW ROOFING TECHNICAL DATA
I
End Lapping Number of Leaves Number of 3 m. Rattan
em. per square Meter Per square Meter
7.5 84 1 II
10.0 60 6
1/
1.5.0 45 5
I
Note: FIGURE 11-6 ANAHAW ROOFING
I
1. Add 10 pieces anahaw leaves per meter length along the
gutter line or lower end portion of the roof.
SOLUTION
I
02. Add 10 pieces anahaw leaves per meter length of the
ridge and the hip line.
1. Solve for the area of roof A and roof 8
Area A = 30 sq. m..

I
3. Add 5% allowance of damaged leaves. Dishonest Area 8 = 30 sq. m.
supplier insert damaged leaves in each bundle which Total Area = 60 sq. m.
could not be detected until after it is opened for
2. Refer to Table 11-16 d r
installation. However, if the supplier is dead-honest, multiply: ,a op Ing 10 cm end lapping:
disregard this 5% allowance.
60 x 84 =5,OU40 pieces.
338
339
,
r
SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE AUXILIARY TOPICS
:
3. Determine the length of: .Mensuration Formula
a) Ridge line = 10.00 meters Triangle: Area = Base x Altitude
b) Gutter line = 20.00 meters 2
Total... = 30.00 meters
Parallelogram: Area = Base x Altitude
Trapezoid: Area = Sum of Parallel Side x Altitude
4. Referring to notation of Table 11-16: multiply: 2
10 pes. x 30 meters = 300 leaves Circle: Area = 0.7854 x Diameter 2

5. Add result of step 2 and step 4
= 3.1416 x Radius 2
'II
Length = 3.1416
5,040 + 300 = 5,340 pes. anahaw leaves.
Circumference: x Diameter
6.2832 x Radius
~I 6. Determine the number of rattan required. Refer ,to Table

11-16, multiply: Ellipse: Area = 0.7854 x Short diameter x Long diameter
Surface Area: = Slant height x Circumference
60 x 6 = 360 pieces Cone;
(curve only) of Base
7. In the absence of rattan splits, the best SUbstiu~e the
I coralon nylon chord used by fishermen. Appropna e one Volume: = Area of Base x Height
3
II! kilogram per 5,000 leaves.
Cylinder: Surface = Length x Circumference + Area of Ends
Ii Volume = 0.7854 + Length x Diameter 2
I',
Sphere: Surface, ,= 3.1416 x Diameter 2
=- Circumference x .Diameter
Volume = 0.5236 x Diameter 3
= Circumfe~n x Diameter 2
6
= Volume of Circumscribing Cylinder

3
~
......
~
- 341
AUXILIARY TOPICS
Wrought Iron Strap Plantsuwela

ENGJ.;ISH PII JPINO Bolt Piemo
Scaffolding Plantsa
Post I . :1lige, Poste Stake Staka
Girder Gililan Plastered Course Kusturada
Joist Soleras
Flooring Sahig, Suwelo Stucco or Plaster Palitada
Girt Sepo Scratch Coat Rebokada
Pickwork on Masonry Piketa
Beam Biga Varnish Fin ish Monyeka
Truss Kilo Spacing or Gap Biyento
Bottom Chord Barakilan
Top Chord Tahilan Concrete Slab (rough) Larga Masa
Purlins Reostra /,Iignment Asintada
Plumb Line Hulog
Collar Plate Sinturon Cement Tiles Baldosa
Fascia Board Senepa Cement Brick Ladrilyo
External Siding Tabike
Vertical Stud Pilarete Door Fillet Batidora
Horizontal Stud Pabalagbag Groove Kanal
Wood Grain Haspe
Ceiling Joist Kostilyahe Pattern or ScHedule Plantilya
Window Sill Pasamaric Hinge Bisagra
Window Head · Sombrero
Window or Door Jamb Hamba Paneled Door Oe-Bandeha
Open Stringer Hardinera Earthfill Eskumbro
Masonry Fill
>
Lastilyas
~ Closed Stringer Adobe Anchor Uyabe
Madre de Eskalera
Tread Baytang Solder Hinang
Riser Takip Silipan
Handrail Soldering Lead Estanyo
Gabay
Molding Temper ( metal work) Suban, Subuhan
Muldora
Eave Sibe
. Projection Bolada
Framework Balangkas
Gutter Kanal
Conductor Alulod
342
343

Simplified Estimates by Max Fajardo

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Simplified Estimates by Max Fajardo

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Simplified Estimates by Max Fajardo

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TABLE OF CONTENTS

CHAPTER - IO PAINTING CHAPTER

This type of cement has a very high rate of strength devel-

a. Designed Mixture 6 .1524 .150 26 .6604 .650

Take note that all length in inches is divisible by one or any

2. To convert Feet to Meters: Multiply by .30 , 66 2.42

Based on actual conr~tig work, one cubic meter of gravel

In actual concreting and masoniy work, there are several

1. Inaccurate volume of delivered aggregates which is very

3. Improper measuring of the aggregates during the mixing '

Ordering of Coarse Aggregate must be Specific as to: SOLUTION

Cement: 1.5 x 5.0 = 7.5 bags

A national highway' project as shown in Figure 1-4 specify 25

SOLUTION FIGURE 1·4 CONCRETE ROAD

1. Solve for the volume of concrete pavement, convert 6 SOLUTION

3. Again, comparing the result with that of Illustration 1-2 the

Solution (or Ulustration 1-1

2. Refer to Table 1-3. Along 10 cm.slab thickness under 40 3.00m.

Cement: 15 x .600 ~ 9.0 bags

Cement:. 21 x .563 =11.82 say 12 bags 1-7 SQUARE CONCRETE COLUMN

FIGURE 1-9 FLOOR PLAN OF PARKING AREA

FIGURE 1-11 SQUARE COLUMN

Area: .40 x .40 = .16sq. m.

v = .16 x 5.00 meters .SOLUTION

ILLUSTRATION 1-8 V = 1.75 cu. m.

4. Refer to Table '1-2. Using a 40 kg. cement class "A" mix-

Cem~nt: 14 x 9.0 =126 bags

TABLE 1-4 QUANTITY OF CEMENT, SAND AND GRAVEL FOR POST

1-9 POST AND FOOTING

70x70 4.410 3.675 . 3.430 2.940 . .245 .490 1.20

75 x70 4.725 3.938 3.675 3.150 .. 263 .525 1.20m.

Sand: 11.136 x .50 =

4" floor I'» ): ~ :} ~ : : ~ {: ~ : :T -roo:.'""'

L = 12 posts x 4.00 m. ht.

2. Refer to Table 1-2. Using 40 kg. cement ~Ias ·C" con-

Cement: 1.2 x 6.0 = 7.2 bags. ELEVATIOW

3. Summary of the materials Band .C.

1. Find the total surface area of the 8 columnS. .

Area =P x height x Number of posts

SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION ESTIMATE CON~TE

3. Find the total length ot the Girder

3. Total volume ·of beam and girder

5 pes. x 8.00 m . = 40 meters SOLUTION - 1 ( ~ y the Volu me Method)

4. Refer to Table 1.:2. Using 40 kg. cement class -A· con-

Cement: 8.49 x 9.0, = 76.4 bags

2. Find the volume of one column. L = (5 x 6.00 m ht.) = 30.00 meters

12 pc$. Octagonal Column 10 pes. Hexagonal Column

2. Knowing the net volume of the concrete, refer.to Table 1-

,3. Use Table 1-6 for final result.

FGURE 1-25 CONCRETE PIPE

A road construction requires 12 pieces of 90 cm. -diameter Vt . = 3.768 cubic meters

TABLE 1-6 QUANTITY OF CEMENT, SAND AND GRAVEL CHAPTER

Diameter in CEMENT IN BAGS

SOLUTION - 2 (Per Pipe Using Table 1-6)

2. Refer to Table 1-6. Under d = 90 pipe diameter, class

In this study, what we want to know is the quantity of the ma-

7. Tie wires. 4.00 = 10 pieces

, D.-LUSTRATION 2-1 1.00 m.

A concrete hollow block wall has a general dimension of

FIGURE 2-3 NUMBER OF CHB PER SQUARE METER